Manual de Instalación, Operación Mantenimiento de Balanza Fajas PDF

MA
ANUAAL DE
D
IS
SNTA
ALAC
CIÓN
N, O
OPER
RACIIÓN Y
MANTTEMIENT
TO DE
D BALA
B ANZZA
P A FA
PARA AJAS
S

D A SH
DATA HEET
T
3
310-C
CB-1
1002
2
3
310-C
CB-1
1006
6
7
710-C
CB-1
1020
0

1 BA
1. ALAN
NZA DE FAJ
JA
SE
ERIE
ES 10-1
1 4

Series 10-14
Belt Scale
REC 3962, Rev D

Part No. 050655
Revision History
Revision Number Date Released ECO Number Release Specifics
Revision A April 1996 First Release
Revision B May 2000
Revision C February 2003
Revision D November 2004 0446 Updated language
**********
This Page Left Blank Intentionally

**********
SYSTEM DATA SHEET
THERMO ELECTRON
SERIES 10-14
BELT SCALE
CUSTOMER:
END USER:
P.O. NO.:
FILE NO.:
CONVEYOR DATA SCALE DATA

Conveyor No.: Weigh Span:
Equip. Tag No.: Tare Load: lbs
Product: Net Load: lbs
Capacity: Gross Load: lbs
Belt Speed Load Cell Size: lbs
Speed Pulley Dia.: Belt Loading: lbs/ft
Belt Width:
Idler Spacing:
Idler Trough Angle: DEG
INSTRUMENT DATA
Load Cell S/N:
Load Cell S/N:
Load Cell S/N:
Load Cell S/N:
Digitizer S/N:
Integrator S/N:
**********
This Page Left Blank Intentionally
**********
2004Thermo Electron Corporation. All rights reserved.
This document is confidential and is the property of Thermo Electron Corporation (Thermo). It may not be
copied or reproduced in any way without the express written consent of Thermo. This document also is an
unpublished work of Thermo. Thermo intends to, and is maintaining the work as confidential information.
Thermo also may seek to protect this work as an unpublished copyright. In the event of either inadvertent or
deliberate publication, Thermo intends to enforce its rights to this work under the copyright laws as a
published work. Those having access to this work may not copy, use, or disclose the information in this work
unless expressly authorized by Thermo.
“Microsoft” and “Windows” are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
united States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of Thermo Electron Corporation and its subsidiaries.
General
Thermo may terminate your license if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In such event, you must
destroy all your copies of the Software Program. You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes,
resulting from this license.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

The Occupational Safety and Health Act clearly places the burden of compliance on the user of the equipment and the act is
generalized to the extent that determination of compliance is a judgment decision on the part of the local inspection. Hence, Thermo
will not be responsible for meeting the full requirements of OSHA in respect to the equipment supplied or for any penalty assessed
for failure to meet the requirements, in respect to the equipment supplied, of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as interpreted
by an authorized inspector. Thermo will use their best efforts to remedy such violation at a reasonable cost to the buyer.
Thermo Warranty
The seller agrees, represents, and warrants that the equipment delivered hereunder shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship. Such warranty shall not apply to accessories, parts, or material purchased by the seller unless they are manufactured
pursuant to seller's design, but shall apply to the workmanship incorporated in the installation of such items in the complete
equipment. To the extent purchased parts or accessories are covered by the manufacturer's warranty, seller shall extend such
warranty to buyer.
Seller's obligation under said warranty is conditioned upon the return of the defective equipment, transportation charges prepaid, to
the seller's factory in Minneapolis, Minnesota, and the submission of reasonable proof to seller prior to return of the equipment that
the defect is due to a matter embraced within seller's warranty hereunder. Any such defect in material and workmanship shall be
presented to seller as soon as such alleged errors or defects are discovered by purchaser and seller is given opportunity to investigate
and correct alleged errors or defects and in all cases, buyer must have notified seller thereof within one (1) year after delivery, or
one (1) year after installation if the installation was accomplished by the seller.
Said warranty shall not apply if the equipment shall not have been operated and maintained in accordance with seller's written
instructions applicable to such equipment, or if such equipment shall have been repaired or altered or modified without seller's
approval; provided, however, that the foregoing limitation of warranty insofar as it relates to repairs, alterations, or modifications,
shall not be applicable to routine preventive and corrective maintenance which normally occur in the operation of the equipment.
“EXCEPT FOR THOSE WARRANTIES SPECIFICALLY CONTAINED HEREIN, SELLER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT DELIVERED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE. THE SOLE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING OUT OF
THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL BE EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO BREACH OF THOSE WARRANTIES.
THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE WARRANTIES SET OUT ABOVE SHALL BE LIMITED
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE ACCESSORY, PART OR MATERIAL WITH A SIMILAR
ITEM FREE FROM DEFECT, AND THE CORRECTION OF ANY DEFECT IN WORKMANSHIP. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.”
Purchaser agrees to underwrite the cost of any labor required for replacement; including time, travel, and living expenses of a
Thermo Field Service Engineer at the closest factory base.
Thermo Electron Corporation
501 90th Ave. NW
Minneapolis, MN 55433
Phone: (800) 227-8891
Fax: (763) 783-2525
Disclaimer
Though the information provided herein is believed to be accurate, be advised that the information contained
herein is not a guarantee for satisfactory results. Specifically, this information is neither a warranty nor
guarantee, expressed or implied, regarding performance, merchantability, fitness, or any other matter with
respect to the products, and recommendation for use of the product/process information in conflict with any
patent. Please note that Thermo reserves the right to change and/or improve the product design and
specifications without notice.
About this Manual
This manual provides installation, troubleshooting, and repair
information for the Thermo Series 10-14 Belt Scale system
manufactured by Thermo.
Who Should The Thermo Series 10-14 Belt Scale Operating and Service Manual is a
learning resource and reference for anyone concerned with the operation
Use this of the Thermo Series 10-14 Belt Scale.
Guide?
Organization This Guide is organized into 5 chapters and 1appendix

of this Guide Chapter 1: Introduction – provides a functional overview of the
equipment.
Chapter 2: Installation– provides the steps and instructions necessary to
install the equipment.
Chapter 3: Operation - provides information on equipment operation.
Chapter 4: Maintenance - provides troubleshooting and maintenance
information
Chapter 5: Replacement Parts - details the procedures for obtaining
service/repair and ordering replacement parts.
Appendix A: Drawings
Thermo Electron Corporation About this Manual i

REC 3962 Rev D
About this Manual
Documentation The following conventions are used in this manual to help easily identify
Conventions certain types of information.
• Bold is used the first time a new term is introduced.
• Italic is used to for emphasis and terms that have already been
introduced.
• Blue is used for references to other sections of the guide and serve as
links in documents.
• Small caps are used in the in the names of setup, calibration, menu
displays, and variables.
• BOLD CAPITALS are used for the names of keys.
• Note: Provides information of special importance to the reader. c
• Hint: This symbol indicates a hint that may be of value but not
- necessary for operation. c
Product If the equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection

provided by the equipment may be impaired. Contact Thermo prior to
Safety installation or operation for any other use of this equipment.
ii About this Manual Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ............................................................................. 1-1
General............................................................................................... 1-2
Description......................................................................................... 1-2
Unpacking and Inspection.................................................................. 1-2
Storage ............................................................................................... 1-2
Chapter 2 Installation ............................................................................... 2-1

Installation.......................................................................................... 2-2
Scale Location Criteria ................................................................... 2-2
Wind and Weather Effects .............................................................. 2-2
Vibration and Deflections ............................................................... 2-2
Conveyor Support ........................................................................... 2-2
Tension............................................................................................ 2-3
Uniform Belt Loading..................................................................... 2-4
Material Slippage ............................................................................ 2-4
Convex Curves................................................................................ 2-5
Concave Curves .............................................................................. 2-5
Trippers ........................................................................................... 2-6
Single Load Point............................................................................ 2-7
Conveyor Belt Take-Ups ................................................................ 2-7
Belt Tracking .................................................................................. 2-8
Scale Service Idlers......................................................................... 2-8
Idler Troughing Angles................................................................. 2-10
Training Idlers............................................................................... 2-10
Idler Alignment............................................................................. 2-10
Weightable Installation .................................................................... 2-11
Terms ............................................................................................ 2-11
Location ........................................................................................ 2-11
Site Preparation............................................................................. 2-12
Weighbridge Installation............................................................... 2-16
Scale Idler Installation .................................................................. 2-17
Electrical Components Installation .................................................. 2-19
Exciter Digitizer............................................................................ 2-19
Chapter 3 Operation ................................................................................. 3-1

General............................................................................................... 3-2
Accuracy ............................................................................................ 3-2
Chapter 4 Maintenance............................................................................. 4-1

Check Points ...................................................................................... 4-2
Service and Repair Information ......................................................... 4-2
Frequent Checkpoints ........................................................................ 4-3
Thermo Electron Corporation Table of Contents iii

REC 3962 Rev D
Introduction
Trouble-shooting................................................................................ 4-4
Calibration Shifts. ........................................................................... 4-4
Zero Calibration Shifts.................................................................... 4-5
Span Calibration Shifts ................................................................... 4-5
Field Wiring .................................................................................... 4-5
Loadcell Check by Resistance ........................................................ 4-6
Loadcell Check by Millivolt ........................................................... 4-6
Chapter 5 Replacement Parts .................................................................. 5-1

Order Information .............................................................................. 5-2
Parts List ......................................................................................... 5-3
Phone/Fax Contacts for Bulk Products .............................................. 5-5
Appendix A Drawings ..................................................................................A-1
iv Table of Contents Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Figures
Figure 1–1. . Thermo Electron Model 10-14 Weighbridge ........ 1-3
Figure 2–1. . Conveyor Support Illustration .............................. 2-3
Figure 2–2. . Recommended Installation Area.......................... 2-3
Figure 2–3. . Depth Limiting Gate Illustration............................ 2-4
Figure 2–4. . Conveyor Speed and Slope Illustration ............... 2-4
Figure 2–5. Convex Curve Illustration ...................................... 2-5
Figure 2–6. Before Curve Illustration ........................................ 2-5
Figure 2–7. After Curve Illustration ........................................... 2-6
Figure 2–8. Tripper Location Illustration ................................... 2-6
Figure 2–9. Feed Point Illustration............................................ 2-7
Figure 2–10. Take-Ups Illustration............................................ 2-7
Figure 2–11. Belt Tracking Illustration ...................................... 2-8
Figure 2–12. Scale Service Idler Illustration ............................. 2-8
Figure 2–13. Idler Deflection..................................................... 2-9
Figure 2–14. Idler Reinforcement ............................................. 2-9
Figure 2–15. Troughing Angle Illustration ............................... 2-10
Figure 2–16. Weigh Idler Modification 18" through 36"
Belt Width ................................................................................ 2-13
Figure 2–17. Weigh Idler Modification 42" through 96"
Belt Width ................................................................................ 2-14
Figure 2–18. 10-14 Weighbridge Illustration ........................... 2-15
Figure 2–19. Weighbridge Shipping Bolts............................... 2-17
Figure 2–20. Typical Field Wiring Diagram............................. 2-20
Thermo Electron Corporation Table of Contents v

REC 3962 Rev D
Introduction
**********
This Page Left Blank

Intentionally
**********
vi Table of Contents Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Chapter 1
Introduction
This Chapter provides general information about the Thermo Series 10-
14 Precision Belt Conveyor Scale
• Functional description
• Unpacking and Inspection
• Storage
Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction 1-1

REC 3962 Rev D
Introduction
General This Instruction Manual contains information on the installation,

operation, and maintenance of your Thermo Electron Series 10-14
Precision Belt Conveyor Scale.
Thermo Electron manufactures several different models of Belt
Conveyor Scale Systems to serve a variety of applications in the mining,
process and transportation industries.
All persons concerned with the operation and servicing of the belt scale
should read the contents of this manual carefully and thoroughly. Keep
this manual in a convenient place and refer to it often, as it is an
important tool in performing proper service.
Description The Series 10-14 Belt Scale is specifically designed for basis-of-
payment, fee holder-type applications requiring certification by
governmental and/or regulatory agencies.
The series 10-14 Belt Scale is comprised of the following principal
components.
• Thermo Electron Model 10-14 Carriage/Weighbridge
• The Weighbridge (Figure 1-1) is a unitized, preassembled unit
capable of supporting three or four idlers (Thermo Electron Model
10-14-3 or 10-14-4). The weighbridge assembly houses four (4)
precision loadcells that serve as the primary weight sensors. The
loadcells generate an electrical output signal proportional to belt
loading, usually expressed in pounds per foot. The full floating
weighbridge mounts to the conveyor stringers and support the weigh
idlers.
Unpacking Inspect all packages for damage before opening as often times the
and carrier may be responsible for shipping damage.
Inspection
Storage
The Precision Belt Scale and associated equipment can be safely stored,
with cover latches secured and hole plugs installed, between -58° to
+185° F (-50º and +85º C). The units should be protected against
moisture.
1-2 Introduction Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Introduction
Figure 1–1. Thermo Electron Model 10-14 Weighbridge
Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction 1-3

REC 3962 Rev D
Introduction
**********

Intentionally
**********
1-4 Introduction Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Chapter 2
Installation
This chapter provides detailed information about Series 10-14 Belt Scale
installation, including:
• Installation considerations
• Scale Location Criteria
• Weightable Installation
• Electrical components installation
Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-1

REC 4329 Rev A
Installation
Installation
All Thermo Electron Belt Conveyor Scales, regardless of their
applications, are manufactured to the same high degree of accuracy and
reliability. However, it is the application and installation of these scales
that determine the overall operating capabilities and accuracy that can be
realized.
Scale Location In applying belt conveyor scales, one must always consider external
Criteria influences originating from the material handling system and belt
conveyor. Regardless of stated accuracies, these two factors will
determine the overall long-term and short-term accuracy expected.
Wind and The scale and conveyor at the scale will be protected from wind and
Weather Effects weather effects. The magnitude of weighing errors caused by wind is
dependent on wind velocity.
Vibration and The entire conveyor frame should be isolated from bins, feeders,
Deflections crushers, and other mechanical equipment. This is to prevent bin
loading from causing conveyor deflections and to protect the weighing
equipment from vibrations and shocks imposed by mechanical
equipment.
Conveyor In the design of the scale, several deflections are taken into
Support consideration. These are the deflection of the load cells, the deflection
of the scale carriage and bridge assembly, and the deflection of the
supporting conveyor structure. It is of utmost importance that these
deflections not be excessive. In the manufacture of the scale, the
amount of deflection in the load cells and the carriage and bridge
assembly is controlled. The only variable is the deflection of the
conveyor itself. Therefore, the conveyor stringers supporting the scale
and five idlers to either side of the scale should be of ample size and be
adequately supported to limit the relative deflection between two
adjacent idlers to no more than 0.025 inches (0.6 mm). No conveyor
expansion joints or stringer splices should be located in this region of the
conveyor. Refer to field installation drawing for required mechanical
supports.
2-2 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–2. Conveyor Support Illustration
Tension In all installations, the belt scale should be installed in an area where belt
tension and tension variations are minimal. For this reason, the belt
scale should be installed near the tail section of the conveyor. The
approach weigh idler should not be installed closer than 20 feet from the
loading point, but not closer than five idler spaces to the end of the skirt
boards. This is to minimize the effect of the skirts (or material under the
skirts) contacting the belt.
Figure 2–3. Recommended Installation Area

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Uniform Belt
Although in most applications the scale is capable of operating
Loading accurately over a 5 to 1 range, it is desirable that the belt loading be as
uniform as possible. To minimize surges or feed variations, hoppers, if
possible, should be equipped with depth limiting gate.
Figure 2–4. Depth Limiting Gate Illustration
Material Slippage When a Thermo Electron Integrator is used to process belt loading and
belt travel to arrive at an accurate weight, product speed must equal belt
speed at the scale. For this reason, the conveyor speed and slope should
not exceed that at which material slippage occurs.
Figure 2–5. Conveyor Speed and Slope Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Convex Curves
Convex curves are permissible at a distance of 20 feet or a minimum of
five idler spaces beyond the scale area idlers.
Figure 2–6. Convex Curve Illustration

Concave Curves If there is a concave curve in the conveyor, before or after the scale, the
scale shall be installed so that the belt is in contact with all the idler
rollers at all times for at least 20 ft or 5 idler spaces, whichever is
greater, before and after the scale.
1. The point of tangency on a concave (upward going) curve must be at

least 40 feet beyond the scale. The belt scale should always be
between the infeed and curve (Figure 2-7).
Figure 2–7. Before Curve Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
2. If there is a concave curve in the conveyor between the scale and the
loading point, the point of tangency must be at least 40 ft. before the
scale.
Figure 2–8. After Curve Illustration
Trippers In any installation, where weighing accuracy is important, the scale

should not be applied to a conveyor that has a movable tripper. If the
scale must be installed on a conveyor with a tripper, then the same rules
apply as for an installation in a concave conveyor. The minimum
distances outlined in the above paragraph must be adhered to with the
tripper in its fully retracted position. It is also of extreme importance
that the belt tracks centrally at the scale area for all tripper locations.
* NTEP applications prohibit use of tripper conveyors.
Figure 2–9. Tripper Location Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Single Load
On high accuracy installations, the conveyor should be loaded at the
Point same point. This assures constant belt tension at the scale during all
loading conditions.
Figure 2–10. Feed Point Illustration
Conveyor Belt All conveyors shall be equipped with a gravity type take-up to minimize
Take-Ups tension effects in the scale area.
Figure 2–11. Take-Ups Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Belt Tracking
One problem in obtaining optimum belt scale accuracy is the effect of
belt tracking from an empty to a fully loaded condition. To enhance belt
tracking, the construction of the belting should have the necessary
flexibility to assure contact with all scale area idler rolls when the belt is
running empty. In addition, this also assures that the conveyed material
is being supported by the weighing idlers rather than by the carcass of the
conveyor belting. In no case shall the belt extend beyond the edge of the idler
roller for the entire length of the conveyor.
Figure 2–12. Belt Tracking Illustration
Scale Service Several idler manufactures make a scale service idler in which they hold
Idlers the tolerances on roller run out, backing heights and troughing angles.
Roller concentricity should not exceed 0.015". It is recommended that
idlers of this type be used in applications that require extreme
accuracies. The top grade idler, manufactured by most of the major idler
suppliers, under normal conditions, is an adequate idler for scale service
use. It may be required, however, to select a series of idlers that have
similar dimensions and troughing angles for scale service. All idlers
must be of the same manufacture, model and type.
Figure 2–13. Scale Service Idler Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Idler Deflection
Scale service idlers under design load should not deflect more than 0.02
percent of their width (Figure 2-13). Reinforcements should be added as
necessary to insure excessive deflection does not occur (Figure 2-14).
Figure 2–14. Idler Deflection
Figure 2–15. Idler Reinforcement

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Idler Troughing
The use of idlers with steep troughing angles causes many problems.
Angles Not only does the beam or catenary effect of the belt become more
pronounced as the troughing increases, but the effect of idler
misalignment is amplified as well.
One very important function to perform at the time of installation of the scale
is to check out the alignment of all idlers within the weighing area. This is
done to help minimize the extraneous forces introduced into the weighing
system caused by changes in belt tension or other external forces as the belt
travels across the idlers.
Troughing angles of 35Ε or less are preferred for all high accuracy
installations. Troughing angles of 45Ε are acceptable under certain conditions
(please check with Thermo Electron).
Figure 2–16. Troughing Angle Illustration
Training Idlers It is extremely important that the belt tracks centrally from no load to
full load conditions. Training idlers are normally acceptable if located
beyond 60 feet from the belt scale centerline.
Idler Alignment The scale mounted idlers and five idlers to either side must be
dimensionally aligned. The weighing idlers and five idlers to either side
of the weighing idlers are very closely aligned to make as true a
weighing platform or section as possible. The installation of these idlers
is the most critical. Good idler alignment throughout the entire
conveyor is important to assure adequate and true belt tracking under all
load conditions.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Weightable
Installation This section is to be used as a guide in the installation of the Thermo
Ramsey Model 10-14 Weighbridge and associated scale area idlers. All
models are installed in the same manner, as the models differ only in
number of weigh idlers and the scale area idler spacing. Refer to
Installation drawings. The dimensions on these drawings must be
maintained within ±1/32 inch. Overall structure deflection must be
maintained within 0.025 inches (0.6 mm) between adjacent idlers.
Terms The following terms are referred to in the installation procedure:
1. Weighbridge
The Weighbridge is a factory-aligned assembly consisting of a
full floating weigh platform, two support beams and four
precision strain gauge loadcells applied in tension.
2. Weigh Idlers
The Weigh Idlers refer to those idlers mounted directly on the
Weighbridge.
3. Scale Area Idlers
The Scale Area Idlers refer to the weigh idlers and the group of
idlers located adjacent to and on either side of the weigh idlers.
The idlers are identified as plus (+) or minus (-) on the installation
drawing. At least five and as many as eight plus and minus idlers
are closely aligned with the weigh idlers. They are considered
part of the belt scale, and play an important role in overall belt
scale accuracy and operation.
Location
Select the scale location by following the outline in Section 2.2, Scale
Location Criteria. A partial listing of the required guidelines follows:
1. Install the scale on a rigid conveyor.

2. The approach weigh idler should not be located closer than 20 feet
or five idler spaces; whichever is greater, from loading point or
skirting.
3. The scale must not be placed in concave or convex curves.
4. The scale must not be installed where conveyor speed and slope
causes material slippage to occur.
5. Locate the scale where it has maximum protection from the elements.
6. The scale conveyor should not be attached to or have vibrating devices
installed on it.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Site Preparation
After determination of scale location in the conveyor, proceed with site
preparation as follows:
1. Strengthen the conveyor framework. Refer to the installation drawing
for placement of required bracing and support legs.
2. Fishplate and weld together all conveyor sections in the region of the
scale.
3. Level the conveyor in the transverse plane between the minus 5 and plus
5 idlers.
4. All scale area idlers must be the same make, style, and model, and
should be in free-rolling and otherwise good mechanical condition.
5. Locate the exact center of the carry roll on all idlers from minus 5 to
plus 5. Permanently scribe or punch this center position on each carry
roll. In addition, perform the same procedure on the troughing and wing
rolls.
6. Depending on the model of scale (10-14-3 or 10-14-4) three or four
idlers must have there mounting brackets modified to be used as weigh
idlers. Refer to weigh idler modification drawing (Figure 2-16 or 2-17).
7. On scales for belt widths over 36 inches, the scale area idlers (plus 5 to
minus 5) should have a strengthening brace from the wing roll brace to
the bottom frame. This bracing strengthens the idler so it will not warp
under load. Refer to weigh idler modification drawing (Figure 2-16 or
2-17).
8. For ease in equipment installation and alignment, elevate or remove the
conveyor belting from the belt scale area. Belt clearance will be needed
from at least the minus 6 to plus 6 idler.
9. Remove the idlers from the section of the conveyor where the
weighbridge will be installed. Although not required, in most
installations it is easier to remove all idlers between the plus and minus
5 idlers.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–17. Weigh Idler Modification 18" through 36" Belt Width
Notes
1. Troughing idler(s) supplied by customer.
2. Remove existing mounting feet or channel from idler by torch
cutting or sawing. Make cutouts as shown. Weld idler mounting
brackets, P/N 004350, in position as shown.
3. Mounting brackets must be equally spaced from idler centerline.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–18. Weigh Idler Modification 42" through 96" Belt Width
Notes
1. Troughing idler(s) supplied by customer.
2. Fabricate steel channel gusset to suit idler. Gusset to be installed
before removing feet (see note 3) to prevent troughing angle from
being disturbed.
3. Remove existing mounting feet or channel from idler by torch
cutting or sawing. Make cutouts as shown. Weld idler mounting
brackets, P/N 004351, in position as shown.
4. Mounting brackets must be equally spaced from idler centerline.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–19. 10-14 Weighbridge Illustration

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Weighbridge
After selection of the scale location and preparation of the site, proceed
Installation with installation as follows:
1. Dimensionally locate and mount the minus 5 and plus 5 idlers. At

the same time, shim these idlers to 1/4 inch above the belt line.
Refer to installation drawing and (Figure 2-18).
2. On one side of the conveyor, scribe a mark equidistant from the
minus 5 and plus 5 idlers.
3. Determine which end of the weighbridge is toward the head
pulley in a horizontal or inclined conveyor. Refer to note on
installation drawing and (Figure 2-18).
4. Insert the weighbridge into the conveyor gallery. Determine the
longitudinal center of the weighbridge and align the weighbridge
center on the scribe mark located in Step 2.
5. Establish a conveyor centerline. Extreme care should be given to
this procedure, as all measurements will be referenced from this
centerline. If procedure in Step 5 of Section 2.3.3 has not been
completed, do it at this time.
6. Tie a high quality 30 pound test monofilament line, or equivalent,
to the base of the plus 6 idler. Run this line across the center
mark on the plus 5-carry roll through the scale area and across the
center mark on the minus 5-carry roll. Attach a 30-pound weight
to the end of the line to maintain constant tension.
7. If necessary, move the minus 5 and plus 5 idlers to position the
center of the carry rolls on the conveyor centerline.
8. Check for clearance (if any) between the line and the minus 4 and
plus 4 idler carry rolls. The proper height at this time for these
rolls is 1/4 inch below the minus and plus 5 idlers. If necessary,
add additional shimming under minus and plus 5 idlers.
9. Position the center mark on the two weighbridge supports directly
below the conveyor centerline with reference to the longitudinal
center established in Step 4 of above.
10. Drill holes for the weighbridge supports. If additional shimming
is required to level the weighbridge supports, it should be added at
this time. Insert bolts and fasten weighbridge to the conveyor.
11. Remove weighbridge shipping bolts and blocks (Figure 2-19).
Insure weighbridge is resting on all 4-load cells. If it wobbles, the
weighbridge is not level.
NOTE: Do not adjust Stay or Check Rods.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–20. Weighbridge Shipping Bolts
Scale Idler Before proceeding with the scale area idler installation, make sure the
Installation following procedures have been completed:
1. Conveyor centerline has been established.
2. Minus 5 and plus 5 idlers are level and in fact, 1/4 inch above the
normal belt line.
3. The weighbridge is on the conveyor centerline, level and
equidistant from the minus and plus 5 idlers.
NOTE: The full floating weigh platform is attached to the
weighbridge supports by four strain gauge loadcells. If the
weighbridge supports are not level, weighing errors may result.
During initial calibration, loadcell balance is checked to insure
weight is applied equally to all four loadcells. See "Loadcell
Check By Millivolt" for this procedure.
4. Weighbridge shipping bolts and blocks have been removed.
Proceed with scale area idler installation.
5. Place modified weigh idler on the Weighbridge mounting pad
adjacent to the plus 1 idler.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
6. Dimensionally align the weigh idler to the adjacent weighbridge

support and center the carry roll on the conveyor centerline. An
accurate measurement is necessary, as this weigh idler becomes
the reference point for all remaining idlers. At this time, the
weigh idler must be below the center string line. Do not shim the
idler at this time.
NOTE: Make all dimension measurements from the center of the
grease fittings on the idlers.
When locating the second and subsequent idlers, always make
measurements from the weigh idler located in Step 2 (reference
weigh idler) to avoid cumulative measuring errors.
7. Dimensionally locate the minus 5 and plus 5 idlers from the
reference weigh idler. Place a level on the carry roll and shim as
necessary to level the minus 5 and plus 5 idler. This is the final
location of these two idlers.
8. Install additional string lines across the minus 5 and plus 5
troughing or wing rolls. The string line reference points were
established in Step 5 of Section 2.3.3.
NOTE: On conveyors wider than 42 inches, additional string
lines may be necessary to ensure accurate shimming.
9. Install the remaining minus and plus idlers one at a time, working
from the minus and plus five towards the weigh idlers, prior to
installing the remaining weigh idlers. The measurement between
each idler and the reference weigh idler must be accurate to within
±1/32 inch. All idlers must be shimmed to within ±1/32 inch of
the string lines.
NOTE: A combination of shimming and movement of the idler
may be necessary to bring the troughing and wing rolls up to the
string lines.
EXAMPLE:
Center roll elevation - OK
Left wing roll elevation - Too High
Right wing roll elevation - Too Low
This indicates one of two conditions.
a. The idler is tipped down to the right (Remedy - Add shims to
the right end of the idler and remove shims from the left end).
b. The idler is located too far to the right of the conveyor or
center. (Remedy - shift idler to the left).
10. Install the remaining weigh idlers following the procedure in Step
9.
11. Shim the reference weigh idler up to the string line.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
12. This completes the weighbridge and scale area idler installation.
Prior to removing the string lines, complete the following checks:
a. Insure measurement between all idlers and reference
weigh idler are accurate to within ±1/32 inch.
b. All carry and trough rolls are shimmed to within ±1/32
inch of the reference height of the minus 5 and plus 5 idlers.
13. Remove all string lines.
14. Place conveyor belt back in place.
Electrical
Components Mounting sites should be selected with care in an effort to protect the
electronics from rapid and severe changes in ambient conditions.
Installation
Exciter Digitizer The loadcell digitizer should be mounted as close to the loadcells as
possible without being exposed to excessive vibration, heat or moisture.
The ideal mounting site would be on a reinforced section of the
conveyor next to the scale. Refer to installation drawings in the
appendix.
Some applications may require mounting the loadcell digitizer distant
from the loadcells. In such cases, a special loadcell cable should be
used, and a remote loadcell junction box is recommended for housing
the loadcell and remote excitation sense connections. Consult Thermo
Ramsey for cable and remote junction box recommendations.
NOTE: Loadcell cable extension must ALWAYS use shielded 6-
wire cable. Refer to Typical Field Wiring Diagram. Do not extend the
supplied loadcell cables unless necessary. If extension is necessary, the
maximum extension allowed is 200 feet.

REC 3962 Rev D
Installation
Figure 2–21. Typical Field Wiring Diagram
NOTE: (READ ALL NOTES BEFORE WIRING SYSTEM)

1. DO NOT ALTER LENGTH OF CABLE SUPPLIED WITH LOAD
CELL.
2. DO NOT RUN SIGNAL WIRES IN SAME CONDUIT WITH
POWER LINE.
3. LOAD CELL TERMINATIONS FOR TENSION APPLICATION.

REC 3962 Rev D
Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter describes the operation of the Thermo Electron Series 10-
14 Belt Conveyor Scale.
Thermo Electron Corporation Operation 3-1

REC 4329 Rev A
Operation
General Your Thermo Electron Series 10-14 Belt Conveyor Scale is capable of very
accurate weighing, provided it is installed and maintained in complete
accordance with the instructions contained in this manual.
Accuracy
Thermo Electron Series 10-14 Belt Scale:
On factory approved installations, Thermo Electron warrants that the
total Precision Belt Scale will weigh and totalize with an error not to
exceed 1/4 of 1 percent of TEST LOAD at flow rates between 25 and
100 percent of scale system capacity. Normal installations can
accommodate a 50 percent overload without degradation of
performance.
TEST LOAD is defined as:
1. At least three (3) circuits or revolutions of the belt, and
2. At least 1000 counts on the Thermo Electron Integrator, and
3. At least ten (10) minutes running time.
These TEST LOAD conditions prevail regardless of the method of
testing; i.e., use of material calibration test, electronic test roller chain,
or static weight.
This performance warranty is conditioned upon:
1. Power being applied to the entire system for at least 4 hours prior to
initiation of the test,
2. The belt running for at least ½ hour prior to initiation of the test.
3. The entire system being installed, calibrated, operated, and
maintained in complete accordance with this instruction manual.
3-2 Operation Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 4329 Rev A
Chapter 4
Maintenance
This chapter provides information about service, repair, and replacement
parts for your Thermo product. It includes the telephone numbers for
various departments at Thermo, the procedure for ordering replacement
parts, a Return Material Authorization Form, and the parts list for the
product are also included in this chapter.
The maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your
service needs. If you should encounter a problem that requires technical
assistance, you may call Thermo Product Service at (800) 227-8891.
Thermo also provides on-site service technicians to assist customers
with installation, setup, initial calibration, customer training,
maintenance, and repair. Contact the Thermo Field Service department
at the number given below for current rates and scheduling.
Thermo has repair centers located at the plant in Minneapolis,
Minnesota. Products that need system checkout or repair can be returned
to the plant with the Return Material Authorization (RMA) Form.
Contact our Repair and Return department (800) 227-8891 to get an
RMA number to use on the form.
Note: Have your machine model number and serial number

available when you call. ▲
Main Switchboard (800) 227-8891

FAX (763) 783-2525
Service (800) 227-8891
Return Material Authorization & Repair (800) 227-8891
Thermo Electron Corporation Maintenance 4-1

REC 3962 Rev D
Replacement Parts
Or an
Check Points
Routine inspection of the following points should be conducted before
performing Maintenance Calibration.
1. Inspect for material wedged in weighbridge or excessive build-up
on weighbridge indicating conveyor belt overloads.
2. Be alert and watch for evidence of conveyor maintenance that has
occurred in the scale area since last calibration. Scale area is
defined as dimensional area between minus five approach scale
service idler and plus five retreat scale service idler. If
maintenance has been performed in this area then scale alignment
should be checked and corrected if necessary.
3. Measure weigh span on both sides of conveyor during calibration.
Weigh span dimension should never change.
4. Do not attempt calibration during adverse weather conditions such
as during high winds, rain, and snow. Calibrations should
correlate with average weather and operating conditions.
5. Most calibration errors can be traced to mechanical alignment,
housekeeping, and belt overloads. These problems tend to be
overlooked in an electro-mechanical belt scale. Expected
accuracy is proportional to maintenance.
6. Calibration should only be performed after the belt has been
running for at least 30 minutes. Optimum time is immediately
after it has been used.
Service and
Repair The maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your
service needs. If you should encounter a problem that requires technical
Information assistance, you may call Thermo Electron Product Service at 800-227-
8891.
Thermo Electron also provides on-site service technicians to assist
customers with installation, set up, initial calibration, customer training,
maintenance, and repair. Contact the Thermo Ramsey Field Service
department at the number given below for current rate schedules and
scheduling.
Thermo Electron has a repair center located at our plant in Minneapolis,
Minnesota. Products that need system checkout or repair can be
returned to the plant with the Return Material Authorization (RMA)
form found on page 5-2.
4-2 Replacement Parts Thermo Electron Corporation

REC 3962 Rev D
Maintenance
Contact our Repair and Returns department at 800-277-8891 to get an

RMA number to use on the form.
Note: Have your machine model number and serial number available
when you call.
Main Switchboard (763)783-2500
FAX (763)783-2525
Technical Assistance 800-227-8891
Field Service 800-227-8891
Return Material Authorization & Repair 800-227-8891
Frequent
Checkpoints Each installation should be checked frequently to determine when
calibration is required. It is recommended that zero be checked every
other day and that calibration be checked every week for several months
after installation. Observe the results and lengthen the period between
calibration checks, depending upon the accuracy desired.
1. Cleaning
Keep scale area clean of rocks, dust, and material build-up.
2. Lubrication
The weigh idlers should be greased once or twice yearly.
Overloading the weigh idlers with grease may change the tare
weight and place the scale out of calibration. Zero calibration is
necessary after greasing.
3. Belt Training
The belt must be trained to run true to the centerline of the idlers
in the area of the scale while running empty, as well as under
loaded conditions. Where this cannot be accomplished due to off-
center loading, the loading should be modified.
Where a belt does not train while empty but does train while
loaded, it will be necessary to train the belt over the scale area at
least during the calibration checks.
4. Belt Tension
It is important that conveyor conditions remain constant at all
times. Therefore, gravity-type take-ups are recommended on all
conveyors where belt scales are installed. Conveyors, which do
not have a constant tension device, will require calibration
whenever the belt tension changes and the take-up are readjusted.

REC 3962 Rev D
Replacement Parts
5. Belt Loading
Extreme loading conditions, which cause flow rate of material above the
range of the instrument, must be avoided. Belt loading should be
adjusted to stay within the instrument range. Belt loading equal to 80
percent of range is recommended.
Conversely, very low flow rates, with respect to full scale range, may
produce low accuracy
Where extreme high or low flow rates, as described above, persist, the
scale range should be changed.
6. Material Sticking to the Belt
Material may form a film on the belt, which is carried continually

around the belt and is never discharged. This condition is often
true when handling wet, fine material. Belt scrapers may correct
this condition.
If the film cannot be removed, the Tare will have to be adjusted. Any
change in the build-up of the film adhering to the belt will require
further adjustment
7. Skirt Boards and Covers
Skirt boards should never be placed closer to the weigh idlers than
ers are necessary in the weighing area, they must not place any
though the skirts are clear of the belt under "no load" conditions,
the boards and the belt when the conveyor is operating. Errors of
where such conditions exist. Note loadcell damage may occur due
Trouble-
shooting If your belt scale fails to operate correctly during or after performing set
up and calibration, it is suggested to perform the procedure again and if
the problem persists follow the troubleshooting procedures below.
Calibration Frequent calibration shifts should be isolated to zero shifts or span shifts.
Shifts.

REC 3962 Rev D
Maintenance
Zero Calibration
Zero shifts are normally associated with the conveying system. When a
Shifts zero shift occurs, the span will shift by a like number of TPH, this then
appears as a span shift.
Common causes of zero shifts:
1. Material build-up on the carriage/weighbridge.
2. Rocks lodged in the carriage/weighbridge.
3. Conveyor belt tracking.
4. Non-uniform conveyor training.
5. Conveyor belt belting stretch due to material temperature
variations.
6. Trouble in the electronic measuring components.
7. Severely overloaded load cell.
Span Calibration
Span shifts are normally associated with the electronic measuring of
Shifts components of the system, with one exception, which is conveyor belt
tension. A span shift is present if both points change by the same
percentage TPH.
Common causes of span shifts:
1. Change in conveyor belting tension.
2. Speed sensor roll build-up and/or slipping.
3. Conveyor scale alignment.
4. Severely overloaded load cell.
5. Trouble in electronic measuring components.
Field Wiring
1. Check for proper interconnection between components of the
system. All wiring must be as specified on the Field Wiring
drawing.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE A MEGGER FOR CHECKING FIELD
WIRING
2. Check all wiring and connections for continuity, shorts, and
grounds using an ohmmeter.
3. Loose connections, poor solder joints, shorted or broken wires and
unspecified grounds in wiring will cause erratic readings and
shifts in weight readings.
4. Check that grounding of all cable shields is made at only the
locations as specified on the Field Wiring drawing.

REC 3962 Rev D
Replacement Parts
Loadcell Check
by Resistance Thermo Electron uses precision strain gauge loadcells with 3 mV/volt
sensitivity. To verify its operation, use the following procedure.
1. Disconnect load cell wires from field terminals in exciter
digitizer.
2. Using ohmmeter, check resistance between signal wires. Should
be 350 ohms ± 5 ohms.
3. Using ohmmeter, check resistance between excitation wires .
Should be 400 ohms ± 10%.
4. Check continuity between shield and all wires. All leads should
be open (infinite) from shield.
Loadcell Check
Verify loadcell operation by using a DC voltmeter capable of reading
by Millivolt millivolts.
1. Complete resistance check.
2. Reconnect all four excitation wires. DO NOT reconnect red and
white signal wires.
3. Measure excitation voltage across excitation wires. Voltage
should be 10 VDC ± 5%.
4. Measure signal voltage across signal positive and signal negative
on each loadcell. Reading must be within 0-30 mVDC.
5. The millivolt output is a direct relationship to weight applied. As
weight is increased, output should increase.
6. When the weighbridge is properly balanced the output from each
loadcell should be the same within 1.0 mVDC.
7. If a zero shift is suspected reinstall the shipping locks and
measure all loadcell outputs. Normal reading is 0 mVDC. A
slight positive shift of 0.1 or 0.2 mVDC is okay but a negative
shift would indicate a failure.

REC 3962 Rev D
Chapter 5
Replacement Parts
This chapter gives information on how to order replacement parts for
your 10-14 Belt Scale.
Thermo Electron Corporation Replacement Parts 5-1

REC 3962 Rev D
Order
Information For faster service when ordering parts, fax or telephone Thermo
Electron Customer Service Department.
The recommended procedure for ordering parts is as follows:
1. Determine the broken or faulty part(s).
2. Locate the part(s) in the parts list given.
3. Find the part number(s) for the item(s) needed and determine the
quantity you require.
4. Write or telephone:
Thermo Electron
Customer Service Department
501 90th Ave. NW
Phone: 800-227-8891
Fax: (763) 783-2525
Normal Customer Service hours are 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.,

Central Time
5. With your order, list the following information:
Scale model
Purchase order number
Date required
Method of shipment preferred
List of parts, including part number, description and quantity
Your parts order will be handled as expeditiously as possible.

REC 3962 Rev D
Replacement Parts
EQUIPMENT PART NUMBER

Parts List
LOADCELL
100 lb. Load Cell 046914
1000 lb Load Cell 046917
100 lb. Installation Kit 050080
250-2500 lb. Installation Kit 050079

REC 3962 Rev D
501 90th Avenue N.W. Return Material Authorization
Minneapolis MN 800-227-8891 RMA -
(This RMA Number Must Be Marked On All Paperwork And On Outside Of Package)
Req’d. By:
Date: Return, Freight Prepaid To:
Customer Thermo Electron Corporation
Contact: 501 90th Avenue N.W.
Phone: ( ) Minneapolis, MN 55433
Area Code
Bill To Customer #: Ship To
Returned From: Return To:
Description Of Material Being Returned:
Describe Equipment Malfunction Or Defect, If Any; Symptoms:
Minimum Charge
Informed Customer of Inspection Charge Per Item
Service Requested:
Estimate P.O.
Repair & Return Required No.:
Original P.O. or Thermo
Return for Credit Order No.:
Warranty Repair or Replacement Serial No:
Return Warranty/Exchange Unit Shipped on Thermo Order No.:
Other:
Disposition/Comments: (Thermo Electron Internal Use Only)

REC 3962 Rev D
Replacement Parts
Phone/Fax Australia Italy

Contacts for +61 (0) 8 8150 5300 +39 02-959514-1
+61 (0) 8 8234 5882 fax +39 02-953200-15 fax
Bulk Products
Canada Netherlands
+1 (905) 888-8808 +31 (0) 33-454-9000
+1 (905) 888-8828 fax +31 (0) 33-454-9009 fax
Chile South Africa

+56 (0) 2-335-3388 +27 (0) 11-609-3101
+56 (0) 2-335-1590 fax +27 (0) 11-609-3110 fax
China Spain
+86 (0) 516-7793650 +34 91-657-3900
+86 (0) 516-7793652 fax +34 91-661-5572 fax
Germany United Kingdom

+49 (0) 208-824930 +44 (0) 1788-820300
+49 (0) 208-852310 fax +44 (0) 1788-820301 fax
India USA
+91 (0) 20-4011245 +1 (877) 290-7422
+91 (0) 20-26125739 fax +1 (763) 783-2525 fax

REC 3962 Rev D
**********

Intentionally
**********

REC 3962 Rev D
Appendix A
Drawings
Load Cell, 100 lb. Capacity C6295D-0058
Thermo Electron Corporation Replacement Parts A-1

REC 3962 Rev D
This page intentionally left blank

2. INST
I TALAACIÓ
ÓN Y
O RACIÓN
OPER N DE MIC
CRO
O-
TE
ECH 200
00

Micro-Tech 2000
Integrator Model
2301
Installation & Operation
Manual
REC-3924, Rev M P/N 050121
Revision History
Revision Number Date Revised ECO # Revision Specifics

Revision A Feb 1996 First Release
Revision B June 1996
Revision C March 1998
Revision D Nov 1998
Revision E May 1999
Revision F March 2000 41.00.03.05
Revision G Nov 2000 41.00.03.07
Revision H Sept 2007 1102 Edit Mounting and Installation
Revision J March 2009 Branding Update
Revision K January 2011 2174 Humidity note, phone numbers and graphics
Revision L December 2013 3412 41.00.03.16 Adding Zero Ready section,
Correcting footer REC#, corrected column header
in table A-8
Revision M January 2014 3435 Corrected normal voltage for the digitizer,
corrected operating temperature and changed
power consumption for integrator and digitizer; ref
UL recertification to 3rd edition
©2006 Thermo Fisher Scientific. All rights reserved.
This document is confidential and is the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific. It may not be copied or
reproduced in any way without the express written consent of Thermo Fisher Scientific. This document
also is an unpublished work of Thermo Fisher Scientific. Thermo Fisher Scientific intends to, and is
maintaining the work as confidential information. Thermo Fisher Scientific also may seek to protect this
work as an unpublished copyright. In the event of either inadvertent or deliberate publication, Thermo
Fisher Scientific intends to enforce its rights to this work under the copyright laws as a published work.
Those having access to this work may not copy, use, or disclose the information in this work unless
expressly authorized by Thermo Fisher Scientific.
Disclaimer
Though the information provided herein is believed to be accurate, be advised that the information
contained herein is not a guarantee for satisfactory results. Specifically, this information is neither a
warranty nor guarantee, expressed or implied, regarding performance, merchantability, fitness, or any
other matter with respect to the products, and recommendation for use of the product/process information
in conflict with any patent. Please note that Thermo Fisher Scientific reserves the right to change and/or
improve the product design and specifications without notice
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 1‐1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................................ 1‐1
Features ............................................................................................................................................................. 1‐4
Standard Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 1‐4
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 1‐5
Measuring .......................................................................................................................................................... 1‐5
Instantaneous Flow Rate Calculation .................................................................................................................................. 1‐6
Flow Totalization ............................................................................................................................................................... 1‐6
Zero and Span Automatic Calibrations ................................................................................................................................ 1‐7
Zero Tracking (AZT) .......................................................................................................................................................... 1‐7
Current Output Signals ...................................................................................................................................................... 1‐8
Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 1‐8
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 1‐9
OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1‐9
Communications ................................................................................................................................................. 1‐9
Load Out .......................................................................................................................................................... 1‐10
STORAGE AND HANDLING .......................................................................................................................................... 1‐11
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 1‐11
Model 2301 Integrator ........................................................................................................................................ 1‐11
2301-D Energizer Digitizer Hardware .................................................................................................................. 1‐14
Motherboard ..................................................................................................................................................... 1‐16
Optional Analog I/O Board B .............................................................................................................................. 1‐18
Optional Analog I/O Board A .............................................................................................................................. 1‐19
Communication Board A .................................................................................................................................... 1‐20
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O ................................................................................................................................... 1‐20
Profibus-DP ...................................................................................................................................................... 1‐20
DeviceNet ........................................................................................................................................................ 1‐20
Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................................... 1‐20
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................... 2‐1
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 2‐1
FIELD MOUNT INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................ 2‐1
Location ............................................................................................................................................................. 2‐2
Mounting ............................................................................................................................................................ 2‐2
Safety Precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 2‐3
Utility Connections (Incoming Power) .................................................................................................................... 2‐3
Wiring ................................................................................................................................................................ 2‐3
Connecting Incoming Power ............................................................................................................................................... 2‐4
Speed Sensor Termination ................................................................................................................................... 2‐5
PANEL MOUNT INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................... 2‐7
Location ............................................................................................................................................................. 2‐7
Mounting ............................................................................................................................................................ 2‐7
Safety Precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 2‐9
Utility Connections (Incoming Power) .................................................................................................................... 2‐9
Wiring ................................................................................................................................................................ 2‐9
Connecting Incoming Power ............................................................................................................................................. 2‐10
Speed Sensor Termination ................................................................................................................................. 2‐10
DIGITIZER INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................... 2‐12
Location ........................................................................................................................................................... 2‐12
Mounting .......................................................................................................................................................... 2‐12
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 2‐13
Utility Connections (Incoming Power) .................................................................................................................. 2‐14
Wiring .............................................................................................................................................................. 2‐14
Connecting Incoming Power ............................................................................................................................................. 2‐15
Speed Sensor Termination ................................................................................................................................. 2‐15
CONFIGURING THE INTEGRATOR ................................................................................................................................. 2‐17
Configuration Jumpers and Switches .................................................................................................................. 2‐17
AC Voltage Input Power Switches ..................................................................................................................................... 2‐17
Integrator/Digitizer COMM Link Jumpers ............................................................................................................. 2‐18
General Purpose Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 2‐19
Digital Outputs .................................................................................................................................................. 2‐19
Field Terminal Board (Field Mount Only) .............................................................................................................. 2‐20
Analog Input/Output .......................................................................................................................................... 2‐21
Configuration A ............................................................................................................................................................... 2‐21
Configuration B ............................................................................................................................................................... 2‐21
Communications Board ...................................................................................................................................... 2‐23
CONFIGURING THE DIGITIZER ..................................................................................................................................... 2‐24
Power Switches ................................................................................................................................................ 2‐25
DIP Switches .................................................................................................................................................... 2‐25
Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................................... 2‐26
Optional (OP) Jumpers ...................................................................................................................................... 2‐26
INITIAL SETUP PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................................................ 2‐27
Determining Installation Parameters .................................................................................................................... 2‐27
Programming the Integrator ................................................................................................................................ 2‐38
Completing the Calibration Procedure ................................................................................................................. 2‐58
Correcting a Calibration Procedure Failure .......................................................................................................... 2‐59
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION .................................................................................................................................... 3‐1
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 3‐1
FRONT PANEL ........................................................................................................................................................... 3‐2
Led Status Indicators ........................................................................................................................................... 3‐2
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................................... 3‐3
Display ............................................................................................................................................................... 3‐3
MENU DISPLAYS ........................................................................................................................................................ 3‐4
Making Hardware Changes .................................................................................................................................. 3‐5
ABOUT THE RUN MENU ............................................................................................................................................... 3‐6
Using the Main Run ............................................................................................................................................. 3‐7
Using Reset Total ................................................................................................................................................ 3‐7
About Material Calibration .................................................................................................................................... 3‐8
About Alarms ...................................................................................................................................................... 3‐8
USING THE PRINT KEY ................................................................................................................................................ 3‐8
USING THE TOTAL KEY .............................................................................................................................................. 3‐11
Reset Total Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 3‐11
Master Total Screen .......................................................................................................................................... 3‐11
Load Out Total Screen (Optional) ....................................................................................................................... 3‐11
Clearing Totals .................................................................................................................................................. 3‐12
USING THE START AND STOP KEYS ............................................................................................................................. 3‐12
PERFORMING CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 3‐12
Auto Zero ......................................................................................................................................................... 3‐12
Auto Zero Calibration Error .............................................................................................................................................. 3‐14
Manual Zero ..................................................................................................................................................... 3‐14
USING THE SPAN CALIBRATE SCREEN .......................................................................................................................... 3‐15
Auto Span ........................................................................................................................................................ 3‐16
Starting A Chain Calibration ............................................................................................................................................. 3‐16
Starting A Test Weights Calibration ................................................................................................................................... 3‐17
Executing the Span Calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 3‐18
Material Factor ................................................................................................................................................................ 3‐19
Recording the New Span ................................................................................................................................................. 3‐20
Ending an Auto-Span Procedure with Chains or Test Weights ............................................................................................. 3‐21
Ending an Auto-Span Procedure with R-Cal ....................................................................................................................... 3‐21
MANUAL SPAN ......................................................................................................................................................... 3‐22
PERFORMING A MATERIAL CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................................... 3‐22
CHANGING THE PROTECTION LEVEL ............................................................................................................................ 3‐26
Temporarily Changing the Protection Level .......................................................................................................... 3‐27
Change Passwords ......................................................................................................................................................... 3‐28
PERMANENT SETUP RECORD ..................................................................................................................................... 3‐31
PERMANENT FIELD RECORD ...................................................................................................................................... 3‐43
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................. 4‐1
CLEANING ................................................................................................................................................................ 4‐1
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................................................................... 4‐1
Initial Checklist .................................................................................................................................................... 4‐2
Using the Integrated Troubleshooting Features ...................................................................................................... 4‐2
Alarm Message ................................................................................................................................................... 4‐2
Integrator Cold Start ............................................................................................................................................ 4‐9
Internal Test Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 4‐9
Load Cell Excitation and Signal Voltage .............................................................................................................. 4‐11
Resetting Master Total Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 4‐11
Resetting if No Password ................................................................................................................................................. 4‐11
Resetting with an Active Password ................................................................................................................................... 4‐12
Removing a Forgotten Password ........................................................................................................................ 4‐13
LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT ................................................................................................................................ 4‐14
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PARTS ................................................................................. 5‐1
PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................... 5‐2
PHONE/FAX CONTACTS FOR THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC OFFICES ..................................................................................... 5‐3
DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE ................................................................................................................................ 5‐4
PARTS LIST .............................................................................................................................................................. 5‐4
APPENDIX A MENUS ................................................................................................................................. A‐1
ALL ABOUT THE MAIN MENU SCREENS ........................................................................................................................... A‐1
MAIN MENU 1 – CALIBRATION MENU .............................................................................................................................. A‐3
Zero Calibrate Screens ........................................................................................................................................ A‐3
Zero Cal Screen ................................................................................................................................................................ A‐3
Auto Zeroing Screen ......................................................................................................................................................... A‐3
Warning Belt Stopped Screen............................................................................................................................................. A‐4
Auto Zero Complete Screen ............................................................................................................................................... A‐4
Zero Changed Screen ....................................................................................................................................................... A‐4
Manual Zero Screen .......................................................................................................................................................... A‐5
Span Calibration Screens ..................................................................................................................................... A‐5
Auto Span R Cal Screen .................................................................................................................................................... A‐5
Auto Span Chain Screens .................................................................................................................................................. A‐6
Auto Span Weights Screen ................................................................................................................................................ A‐7
Auto Spanning Screen ....................................................................................................................................................... A‐8
Auto Span Complete Screen (Unfactor Calcon) .................................................................................................................... A‐8
R-Cal Material Factor Screens ............................................................................................................................................ A‐9
Auto Span Complete Screen .............................................................................................................................................. A‐9
Span # Changed Screen .................................................................................................................................................. A‐10
Span Unchanged Screen ................................................................................................................................................. A‐10
Remove Chains (or Weights) Screen ................................................................................................................................ A‐10
Manual Span Screen ....................................................................................................................................................... A‐11
Material Calibration Screens ............................................................................................................................... A‐11
Material Calibration Screens ............................................................................................................................................ A‐11
Mat’l Cal. Complete Screen .............................................................................................................................................. A‐12
Span # Changed Screen .................................................................................................................................................. A‐13
R-CAL Matl Factor Screens .............................................................................................................................................. A‐13
Mat’l Calibration Add Reference Screen ............................................................................................................................ A‐14
MAIN MENU 2 SETUP AND CONFIGURATION MENUS ........................................................................................................ A‐14
Display Screens ................................................................................................................................................ A‐15
Configure Basic Units of Measure Screen .......................................................................................................................... A‐15
Configure Totalization Units of Measure Screen ................................................................................................................. A‐15
Configure Units of Length Screen ..................................................................................................................................... A‐15
Configure Rate Units Screen ............................................................................................................................................ A‐16
Configure Load Cell Units Screen ..................................................................................................................................... A‐16
Define Language Screen ................................................................................................................................................. A‐16
Define Time and Date Format Screens .............................................................................................................................. A‐16
Configure RUN Display Line Screen.................................................................................................................................. A‐17
Set Damping Factors for Display Screens .......................................................................................................................... A‐17
Scale Data Screens ........................................................................................................................................... A‐18
Set Scale Capacity Screen ............................................................................................................................................... A‐18
Define Scale Division Screen ........................................................................................................................................... A‐18
Select the Weighbridge Model Screen ............................................................................................................................... A‐19
Detail Mechanical Parameters of the Frame Screens .......................................................................................................... A‐19
Define Dimensional Parameters Screens ........................................................................................................................... A‐22
Define Load Cells Screen ................................................................................................................................................ A‐22
Define Speed Input Screen .............................................................................................................................................. A‐24
Set the Dead Band Screen ............................................................................................................................................... A‐24
Weights and Measures Mode Screen ................................................................................................................................ A‐24
Calib Data Screens ........................................................................................................................................... A‐25
Define the Calibration Mode Screen .................................................................................................................................. A‐25
Detail the R-Cal Parameters Screen.................................................................................................................................. A‐25
Detail the Chains Parameters Screens .............................................................................................................................. A‐26
Detail the Test Weight Parameters Screen......................................................................................................................... A‐26
Calibration Interval Screens ............................................................................................................................................. A‐27
Material Factor Screens ................................................................................................................................................... A‐27
Calibration Test Duration Screens ..................................................................................................................................... A‐28
Acquire the Test Duration Screen ..................................................................................................................................... A‐28
Full Test Duration Acquisition Screen ................................................................................................................................ A‐28
Auto Count Belt Revolutions Screen ................................................................................................................................. A‐29
Partial Test Duration Acquisition Screens .......................................................................................................................... A‐30
Manual Entry of Test Duration Screens ............................................................................................................................. A‐31
Define Auto Zero Tracking Screens ................................................................................................................................... A‐33
Speed Capacity Screen ................................................................................................................................................... A‐35
Auto Zero Max Deviation Screen ...................................................................................................................................... A‐35
Zero Reference Screen ................................................................................................................................................... A‐36
Zero Ready .................................................................................................................................................................... A‐36
MAIN MENU 3 – SECURITY, DIAGNOSTICS AND TESTS ..................................................................................................... A‐37
Protection Level Screens ................................................................................................................................... A‐37
Temporarily Changing System Protection Screens ............................................................................................................. A‐38
Diagnostics Screens .......................................................................................................................................... A‐39
A/D Raw Data Screen ..................................................................................................................................................... A‐39
Readout Load Cell mV Screen ......................................................................................................................................... A‐39
Change Prescaler Screens .............................................................................................................................................. A‐40
Change Passwords Screens ............................................................................................................................................ A‐41
Display Software Version Screen ...................................................................................................................................... A‐42
Setup Date and Time Screens .......................................................................................................................................... A‐43
Check Hardware Configuration Screens ............................................................................................................................ A‐43
Digitizer COMM Setup Screen .......................................................................................................................................... A‐45
Test Screens .................................................................................................................................................... A‐45
Lamp Test Screen ........................................................................................................................................................... A‐45
Unit Self Test Screens ..................................................................................................................................................... A‐46
Test Digital Inputs Screen ................................................................................................................................................ A‐46
Test Digital Outputs Screens ............................................................................................................................................ A‐47
Test Current Outputs Screens .......................................................................................................................................... A‐48
Test Current Inputs Screen .............................................................................................................................................. A‐48
Test Communication A .................................................................................................................................................... A‐49
Test Communication B Screen ......................................................................................................................................... A‐49
Test Load Out or DIO Input Board Screen ......................................................................................................................... A‐49
Test DIO Output Board .................................................................................................................................................... A‐50
Test the CPU Serial Line .................................................................................................................................................. A‐50
Test Integrator/Digitizer Communication Link Screen .......................................................................................................... A‐50
Test Digitizer Switch Banks Screen ................................................................................................................................... A‐51
Test the Keyboard and Switches Screen ........................................................................................................................... A‐51
MAIN MENU 4 – DEFINING I/O AND ALARMS .................................................................................................................. A‐51
I/O Definition Screens ........................................................................................................................................ A‐51
Define Current Outputs Screens ....................................................................................................................................... A‐52
Define Analog Inputs Screen ............................................................................................................................................ A‐54
Moisture Compensation Input Screen ................................................................................................................................ A‐55
Inclination Compensation Input Screens ............................................................................................................................ A‐55
Define Digital Inputs Screens ........................................................................................................................................... A‐56
Define Digital Outputs Screens ......................................................................................................................................... A‐59
Define Remote Totalizer Output Screens ........................................................................................................................... A‐62
Clip Detector Option ........................................................................................................................................................ A‐63
Alarm Definition Screens .................................................................................................................................... A‐64
Define Rate Alarm Screens .............................................................................................................................................. A‐65
Define Load Alarm Screens .............................................................................................................................................. A‐66
Define Speed Alarm Screens ........................................................................................................................................... A‐67
Setup Alarm Modes Screen .............................................................................................................................................. A‐68
MAIN MENU 5 – SERIAL OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................ A‐68
Communication A Screens ................................................................................................................................. A‐69
Printer Screens ................................................................................................................................................. A‐73
Handshaking Screens ..................................................................................................................................................... A‐73
Periodical Printing Screens .............................................................................................................................................. A‐75
Print Format Screens ....................................................................................................................................................... A‐75
Printer Screen ................................................................................................................................................................ A‐82
MAIN MENU 6 – AUDIT TRAILS AND LINEARIZATION ......................................................................................................... A‐83
Audit Trail Screens ............................................................................................................................................ A‐83
Linearization ..................................................................................................................................................... A‐85
APPENDIX B WEIGHBRIDGE PHYSICAL PARAMETERS ................................................................................ B‐1
TYPICAL WEIGHBRIDGES ............................................................................................................................................. B‐2
RULES FOR ENTERING WEIGHBRIDGE PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................... B‐5
TABLES FOR THERMO SCIENTIFIC WEIGHBRIDGES ............................................................................................................ B‐5
APPENDIX C DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT ......................................................................................................... C‐1
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ C‐1
MOTHERBOARD DIGITAL I/O ......................................................................................................................................... C‐1
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................. C‐3
Board Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ C‐6
BCD INPUT OPTION ................................................................................................................................................... C‐8
APPENDIX D MISCELLANEOUS DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................. D‐1
LIST OF TABLES & FIGURES
Figure 1-1. Field Mount Integrator .................................................................................................................. 1-2

Figure 1-2. Panel Mount Integrator ................................................................................................................ 1-2
Figure 1-3. Exciter Digitizer ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
Table 1-1. Available Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................ 1-3
Table 1-2. Standard and Optional Features .................................................................................................. 1-4
Figure 1-4. Speed Sensor Input ................................................................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-5. AC and DC Input Module ........................................................................................................... 1-16
Figure 1-6. AC and DC Output Module ........................................................................................................ 1-17
Figure 1-7. High-Level Analog Input ............................................................................................................ 1-18
Figure 1-8. High-Level Analog Output ......................................................................................................... 1-19
Figure 2-1. Electrical & Mounting Guidelines for Field Mount Integrator Installation ................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. Field Wiring Diagram – Field Terminal Board............................................................................. 2-5
Figure 2-3. Field Wiring Diagram – Field Mount with Terminal Board.......................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-4. Electrical & Mounting Guidelines for Panel Mount Integrator Installation ................................. 2-8
Figure 2-5. Panel Mount Integrator clamp Bracket........................................................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-7. Electrical and Mounting Guidelines for the Digitizer................................................................. 2-13
Figure 2-8. Digitizer Field Wiring .................................................................................................................. 2-16
Table 2-1. SW1 and SW2 Settings .............................................................................................................. 2-17
Figure 2-9. Model 2301 Motherboard .......................................................................................................... 2-18
Table 2-2. COMM Link Board Jumper Settings ........................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-10. Integrator/Digitizer COMM Link Board A ................................................................................ 2-19
Figure 2-11. Field Terminal Entry Board ...................................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-12. Analog I/O Board – Depopulated 1 Output ............................................................................. 2-22
Figure 2-13. Analog I/O Board – Populated 2 Inputs / 2 Outputs ............................................................... 2-22
Table 2-3. Jumper Positions ......................................................................................................................... 2-23
Table 2-4. MDP for RS-485 Only ................................................................................................................. 2-23
Table 2-5. TRM for RS-485 Only.................................................................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-14. Digitizer Motherboard .............................................................................................................. 2-24
Table 2-6. SW3 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................................ 2-25
Table 2-7. SW4 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................................ 2-25
Table 2-8. A/D Status.................................................................................................................................... 2-26
Table 2-9. Optional Jumpers ........................................................................................................................ 2-26
Figure 2-15. Belt Scale Weighbridge Model 10-17-2 .................................................................................. 2-28
Table 2-10. Weighbridge Parameters & Instrument Information by Question and Scroll Screen ............. 2-29
Table 2-17. Pivot to Load Cell ...................................................................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-18. Number of Weigh Idlers on Scale Weighbridges - IDN .......................................................... 2-31
Figure 2-19. Pivot to 1st Idler (Model 10-20 Belt Scale) .............................................................................. 2-31
Figure 2-20. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler (Model 10-22 Belt Scale) .................................................................. 2-32
Figure 2-21. Pivot to 1st through 4th Idler (Model 10-17-4 Belt Scale) ........................................................ 2-32
Figure 2-22. Pivot to Test Weight Length .................................................................................................... 2-33
Figure 2-23. Pivot to Test Weight Height ..................................................................................................... 2-34
Figure 2-24. Pivot to Carriage Height........................................................................................................... 2-34
Figure 2-25. Roll to Carriage Height ............................................................................................................ 2-35
Table 2-11. Angle of Incline .......................................................................................................................... 2-36
Figure 2-26. Measuring Angle of the Incline ................................................................................................ 2-36
Figure 2-27. Integrator CPU Board .............................................................................................................. 2-38
Figure 3-1. Model 2301 Integrator Front Panel ............................................................................................. 3-2
Table 3-1. LED Status Indicators ................................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2. Printer Status ................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-3. Data Types .................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Table 3-4. Integrator Protection Levels ........................................................................................................ 3-26
Table 3-6. Permanent Field Record ............................................................................................................. 3-43
Table 3-7. Calibration Report – Permanent Record .................................................................................... 3-45
Table 4-1. Integrator Alarm List ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Table 5-1. MicroTech 2000 Model 2301 Integrator Parts List....................................................................... 5-4
Table 5-2. MicroTech 2000 Model 2301-D Digitizer Parts List ..................................................................... 5-6
Table A-1. Protection Level ......................................................................................................................... A-38
Table A-2. Board Description ...................................................................................................................... A-45
Table A-3. Selections Available for Physical Input ..................................................................................... A-57
Table A-4. Motherboard Inputs.................................................................................................................... A-57
Table A-5. Digital Input/Output Board Inputs (Installed Options)............................................................... A-58
Table A-6. Selections Available for Physical Output .................................................................................. A-60
Table A-7. Motherboard Outputs ................................................................................................................. A-61
Table A-8. Digital Input/Output Board Inputs (Installed Options)............................................................... A-61
Table A-9. Alarm Mode ................................................................................................................................ A-64
Table A-10. Communications Protocols...................................................................................................... A-70
Table B-1. Weighbridge Physical Parameters ...............................................................................................B-2
Figure B-1. Weighbridge Model 10-20-1 ........................................................................................................B-2
Figure B-2. Weighbridge Model 10-22 ...........................................................................................................B-3
Table B-2. Data Entry Rules ...........................................................................................................................B-5
Table B-3. Thermo Scientific Weighbridges ..................................................................................................B-6
Figure C-2. General Purpose Fault Output ................................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-3. Digital Input Board ...................................................................................................................... C-3
Figure C-4. Digital Output Board ................................................................................................................... C-4
Table C-1. DIO Board Power Supply Jumpers ............................................................................................. C-5
Table C-2. Wire Jumper Positions ................................................................................................................ C-5
Figure C-5. Digital Input/Outputs ................................................................................................................... C-7
Figure C-6. BCD Input Wiring ........................................................................................................................ C-8
Chapter 1 Introduction
This chapter introduces you to the Micro Tech™ 2000 Model 2301 Integrator, and
includes the following information:
 A description of the Integrator and Exciter Digitizer systems
 A list of features and available options
 General information about Integrator operational principles
 General system specifications
System The Field Mount Integrator (Figure 1-1) or Panel Mount Integrator (Figure 1-2) is a
micro-computer driven instrument used for deriving rate and quantity of flowing
Description material from signals representing the weight of a segment of moving material
(pounds/foot) and its velocity (feet/minute).
By processing these two input signals, the Integrator delivers visible and electrical
output representing:
 The rate of material movement
 The total amount of material that has passed the weighbridge
The Micro-Tech Model 2301-D Exciter Digitizer (Figure 1-3) supplies strain gauge load
cell excitation and converts the force signals from the load cells to an accurate, stable
digital output for use by the Integrator.
Thermo Fisher Scientific 1-1

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 1-1. Field Mount Integrator
Figure 1-2. Panel Mount Integrator
1-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 1-3. Exciter Digitizer
The Integrator has provisions for the following inputs and outputs (I/O) (Table 1-1):
Description Quantity
Programmable logical inputs 3
Programmable logical outputs 3
Fault output 1
Table 1-1. Available Inputs and Outputs

REC-3924 Rev M
The Integrator provides four options for remote indicating:
 Remote totalization
 Remote flow rate, belt loading or belt speed
 Communications
 Field bus
The Integrator also provides a variety of automatic and check functions for calibration
and maintenance. (For more information on system maintenance, see Chapter 4:
Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Information is exchanged between the Exciter Digitizer and the Integrator via a RS-
485 COMM link.
Features The Integrator includes the following standard and optional features (Table 1-2):
Standard Optional
Menu driven scroll entries / four line
Software options
display
LED status indicators (5) Audit trail
Serial communications with other
Visible and electrical outputs
devices
Field bus communications with other
Automatic zero and span calibration
devices
Auto zero tracking
Optocoupled digital inputs and outputs
Alarm and feature detection
Communication via RS232C, RS485
networking and multidrop, 20mA current
loop passive
Allen-Bradley remote I/O
Profibus-DP
Table 1-2. Standard and Optional Features
Standard The NTEP version includes the standard boards and output module plus the following
additional items:
Configuration
 A COM board for printing
 An output module for high-low flow rate alarms
Additional circuit board expansion slots are available. The following boards can be
inserted:

REC-3924 Rev M
 Single channel current output board
 Dual channel current output, analog input board
 16 digital inputs/4 digital outputs
 4 digital inputs/16 digital outputs
 Serial communication board
 Allen-Bradley remote I/O board
 PROFIBUS-DP board
 Ethernet
 DeviceNet
Functional The Integrator is designed for belt scales, and is capable of performing all the
necessary measuring functions.
Description
All of the standard functions are resident in the microprocessor software. Optional
functions are automatically enabled when the relevant hardware is installed, or after
the operator has selected the function using the keyboard. In all cases, there is no
need for special software.
The Integrator offers a simple means of configuration. Parameters are entered

through the keyboard, following the guidelines shown on the display.
Standard functions can be divided into the following main groups:
 “Measuring”
 “Monitoring”
 “Printing”
The following are optional functions:
 “Communications”
 “Load Out”
Measuring The Integrator / Exciter Digitizer can be directly connected to up to six 350-ohm load
cells, and receives the signal of a speed sensor in order to calculate belt speed, belt
loading and feed rate.
Rate is integrated in time to calculate the total amount of material conveyed by the
belt, and is displayed in three individual registers:
 Total
 Reset total
 Operator total
The Integrator can perform automatic zero and span calibrations. When the belt is
running and the rate is below a certain percentage, the Integrator can perform auto
REC-3924 Rev M
zero tracking to minimize the error of zero due to material and dust.
Analog (current) output signals can be generated to transmit rate, speed or belt
loading to other control devices.
Displayed variables and analog outputs can be smoothed via damping filters,
individually programmable.
Instantaneous Flow Rate The signal delivered by the load cells, which represents the weight per unit length of
Calculation the belt (lbs/ft), is multiplied by the signal delivered by the speed transmitter, which
represents the belt speed (ft/min). The result of this operation is the instantaneous
flow rate (lbs/ft x ft/min = lbs/min).
The instantaneous flow rate is then multiplied by a suitable constant to obtain the
value in the required engineering units (kg/h, ton/h, etc.).
An adjustable damping filter is provided separately for displayed rate and current
outputs.
Flow Totalization The total is accumulated by multiplying mass per unit length by incremental length and
totalizing the result in engineering units.
Three totalizing memories are provided:
 The first memory (Master total) cannot be reset. This assures that the data is
not lost because of an unwanted reset.
 The second and third memories (Reset and Operator total) can be reset by
the operator and are normally used for shift or daily totalization.

REC-3924 Rev M
Zero and Span Zero and span calibrations are based on belt length defined by a number of belt
Automatic Calibrations revolutions.
To calculate the exact number of revolutions, the instrument counts the pulses
delivered by the speed transmitter (one pulse represents a specific belt length). When
the required number of pulses is reached, the instrument ends the calibration test and
compares the actual totalized value to the theoretical value (0 for zero calibration),
and calculates the calibration constant.
The calibration constant is a calculated value that can be factored based on an actual
material test.
The following calibrations are available:
 Electronic Calibration (R-Cal) — Allows the operator to perform the calibration

without applying test weights or test chain on the weighbridge. The electronic
calibration checks all the circuitry, including the load cell, and is performed by
unbalancing the load cell bridge using a precision resistor. The calibration
constant is calculated on the basis of the load cell and the scale data.
 Test Weight Calibration — Requires the positioning of test weights on the

weighbridge.
 Chain Calibration — Requires the application of calibrated chains on the belt.

This method is the nearest to actual operating conditions.
 Material Test — Performed by running a known quantity of material on the

scale and weighing that quantity on a static scale of known accuracy.
Zero Tracking (AZT) Under a preset minimum flow rate when enabled, the instrument makes subsequent
automatic zero calibrations with the following sequence:
1. Waits for belt warm-up time if speed has dropped to zero (“Z” flashes for 5
seconds and then is steady for 5 seconds).
2. Waits for one-half of the time of the test duration (a solid “Z” displays).
3. Executes a zero test (the “Z” flashes).
4. Performs automatic zero for one test duration (correction limited to Auto Zero
step).
5. Continuously repeats the above zero calibration sequence as long as the feed
rate remains below the AZT preset value.

REC-3924 Rev M
Zero Tracking function is limited to a maximum value of “ZERO LIMIT” and
“Auto Zero max deviation” that are set in “%” in the SET UP SCROLL screen.
(See the section “Programming the Integrator” in Chapter 2: “Installation” for
additional information.)
If the new zero calculated by automatic zero tracking function exceeds either value,
an alarm is generated and the new zero is not installed. The AZT reference value for
zero is set every time an Auto Zero or Manual Zero is performed.
Current Output Signals The instrument is equipped with one current output signal (0-20/4-20 mA) that can be
upgraded to two* by adding one board. The choice of the signal type is made through
the keyboard. Each current output can be programmed by keyboard to deliver one of
the following signals:
 Flow rate
 Belt loading
 Belt speed
Each output has its own adjustable damping and programmable time or length delay.
NOTE: While there are three variables the analog output can be configured to
represent, the Model 2301 Integrator can only support two active outputs.
Monitoring The Integrator is equipped with an indication system. Indication can be in the form of:
 Status indications
 Process alarms
 Programming errors
 Equipment (hardware) failures
NOTE: Integrator internal diagnostics generate alarms in case of hardware failures or

programming errors.
Alarms are visible on the display and can be acknowledged and reset through
keyboard, digital input or serial line. Alarms can be delayed to avoid intervention in
case of short time peaks.
You can program each individual alarm to operate as a simple alarm, a shut down
function, or the alarm can be ignored.
Two LED's indicate the cumulative status of alarms and shut-down, and digital outputs
are also provided for the following:
 Hardware failure

REC-3924 Rev M
 Alarm cumulative
 Shut down cumulative
The Integrator also includes the following process alarms:
 High and low flow rate

 Speed
 Weight
Printing Periodical and under command prints are obtained by connecting a serial printer to an
optional communication board. Time and date are permanently stored in Integrator
memory and are updated even in case of power loss.
You can also print out the entire configuration of the instrument.
Options The Integrator supports optional communications and load out functions.
Communications You can configure the Integrator to use the following communication functions:
 Serial Communications — The communication protocol allows a remote

intelligent device to read and eventually write the contents of the registers.
During the communication activity, the Integrator always acts as a slave

device. It responds to a request from a master device on the line, but it never
attempts to send messages out.
One electrical interface may be selected via one communication port. Up to

three communication boards can be installed.
 Field Bus — An Allen-Bradley Remote I/O communication link or a

PROFIBUS-DP is typically used to transfer I/O images between a main PLC
and remote devices (such as remote I/O racks or rack adapters) or to transfer
(read and write) blocks of data with intelligent remote devices (such as node
adapters).
The Allen-Bradley Remote I/O is a typical master/slave communication link,

where the main PLC is the master or scanner and the remote devices are
slaves or adapters.
 Profibus-DP — PROFIBUS-DP is the performance optimized version

specifically dedicated to time critical communication between automation
systems and distributed peripherals. It is typically used to transfer I/O images
between a main PLC and remote devices (sensors, actuators, transmitters,
REC-3924 Rev M
etc.). In this case, it will be used to transfer (read and write) blocks of data.
PROFIBUS is a typical master/slave communication where the main PLC is
the master or scanner, and the Micro-Tech 2000’s are slaves. The connection
is EIA RS 485 through a 2-wire twinax Siemens cable.
 DeviceNet — The Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator is a bus-based microprocessor

instrument that can be optionally equipped with a Field Marshal
communication board. A DeviceNet-Modbus Gateway card is installed on the
Ramsey Field Marshal communications card. The Field Marshal interfaces
MODBUS slave protocol to the DeviceNet network. The Field Marshal card is
a COMM A style board and the setup is the same as COMM A.
Only one field Marshal card can be installed in a Micro-Tech. The Field
Marshal board can be installed in any available motherboard expansion slot.
After the board is installed and power has been restored, the instrument
automatically detects the new board and adds the communication setup
scrolls to the main Menu scrolls. The Micro-Tech refers to the COMM A board
installed in the lower numbered slot as COM 1, and the second board (if
installed) as COM 2.
Two COMM A boards may be installed; one can be set up for printing, the
other one can be a Field Marshal DeviceNet network card for connecting to a
PLC or other DeviceNet Master. The system cannot support two printers or
two communication lines DeviceNet & DF1 simultaneously.
The Field Marshal board contains a perpetual clock/calendar circuit with

battery backup. The battery is located on the motherboard and is the same
battery used for system memory backup. The system automatically detects
and uses the clock calendar circuit of the first board and ignores the second
COMM A board.
Time and date setup screens become visible after the COMM board is
installed.
The Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator COMM option meets the year 2000
requirements.
Load Out The Load Out option includes additional hardware designed to make the Integrator
control a batch sequence. Once the system has been set up, the operator enters the
load size and gives the start command. All functions are then controlled by the
Integrator.
If the load out option is installed, the START and STOP keys on the front panel are
operable.

REC-3924 Rev M
Storage and The Integrator and the Exciter Digitizer can be safely stored, with cover latches
secured and hole plugs installed, between -40E to +158º F (-40º to +70º C).
Handling
The units should be protected against moisture.
Specifications This section includes general and environmental specifications for the following:
 Integrator Model 2301

 Energizer Digitizer Model 2301
Model 2301 Integrator Enclosure - Field Mount

NEMA 4X, dust and watertight
Size 15 x 13 x 7 inches
Fiberglass reinforced polyester molded blue
Door window UVA acrylic UL#E64358
Stainless steel “Quick” type latch
Two position mounting feet
Steel chassis providing EMI/RFI shielding
Provision for 7 solid-state input/output modules (4 output, 3 input)
Power on/off switch (field terminal board option)
Enclosure - Panel Mount

Enlarged bezel for Field Mount and U.S. Panel Mount to allow “dust seal”
Size
DIN 43700 96 X 288 mm
Material
Chromated mild steel
Environmental
Indoor/Outdoor
Should be mounted as close to the load cells as possible without being exposed to
excessive heat, or moisture.
Altitude
Up to 6,561 feet (2000 M)
Storage Temperature
+40º to +158º F (-40º to +70º C)
Operating Temperature
+14º to +122º F (-10º to +50º C)
Humidity
Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31 degree C decreasing
linearly to 50% humidity at 40 degree C
Pollution Degree
2

REC-3924 Rev M
Power Requirements
Nominal Voltage
110/120/220/240 VAC, selectable
Nominal frequency
50/60 Hz
Operating range
Nominal voltage +10%, -15%
93.5 VAC to 121 VAC (110 VAC Nom.)
Operating Current
.50 / .45 / .25 / .23 Amps
Fusing
L1 side of line
1.0 Amp Slo-Blo 110/120 VAC, Type T
0.50 Amp Slo-Blo 220/240 VAC, Type T
Maximum non-destructive input voltage
150/300 VAC for 1 minute
Power Switch
On Field Mount, switches both L1 and L2.
Transient over voltage according to installation category
Over voltage Category II
AC Power Supply
EMI/RFI protection
110/120/220/240 VAC input selection by means of TWO switches (UL, CSA, VDE
approved) mounted internally
50/60 Hz transformer
DC Power Supply
Auxiliary Power Supply Output (Alarm Contacts, etc.)
Output voltage: +24 VDC +27/-21% (19.0/30.4) (unregulated)
Isolation: Yes 500 volts
Output ripple: 1.0 V peak to peak typical
Output current: 600 mA maximum
Short-circuit protection
Weight Input
EIA-485/4 wire link between Integrator and Digitizer
Modbus compatible software protocol
9600 baud rate
4,000 feet maximum distance
Speed Input
Speed Sensor (Figure 1-4)
Comparator based input with hysteresis
REC-3924 Rev M
Optically isolated
Built in current source for dry contact use
Powered by +24 V DIO supply or +20 V SPU supply
Type: Jumper selectable:
Voltage/current or contact closure type sensor
Compatible with all Thermo Scientific speed sensors
Frequency range:
Voltage/current type sensor: 0.25 to 2.0 kHz
Contact closure type sensor: 0.25 to 30 Hz
Low threshold: +1.0 VDC min
High threshold: +3.2 VDC max
Low or high pulse duration:
Voltage/current type sensor: 200 us minimum
Contact closure type sensor: 15 ms minimum
Hysteresis: 0.5 VDC minimum
Input impedance: 10 k ohm typical, 500 ohm minimum
Input source current: -2 mA nom. at 0 VDC
Maximum non-destructive input voltage: ±50 V peak, continuous
Cable length: 1 mile, using 18 AWG shielded cable, Thermo Scientific Series “60”
speed sensors
Figure 1-4. Speed Sensor Input

REC-3924 Rev M
2301-D Energizer Enclosure - Field, surface mount
Construction
Digitizer Hardware
14 gauge steel, conforms to NEMA Standard for Type 4, 12 and 13 watertight and
dust tight enclosure
Size
12 (W) x 10 (H) x 6 (D) inches
Hinge
Left hand
Conduit Entrance
Bottom right side
Environmental
Indoor/Outdoor
Should be mounted as close to the load cells as possible without being exposed to
excessive heat, or moisture
Altitude
Up to 6,561 feet (2000 M)
Storage Temperature
-40º to +158º F (-40º to +70º C)
Operating Temperature
+14º to +122º F (-10º to +50º C)
Humidity
Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31 degree C decreasing
linearly to 50% humidity at 40 degree C
Pollution Degree
2
Power Requirements
Normal Voltage
115/230 VAC, Selectable
Nominal Frequency
50/60 Hz
Operating Range
Nominal voltage +10% - 15%
Operating Current
.50 / .45 / .25 / .23 Amps
Fusing
L1 side of line
1.0 Amp Slo-Blo 115 VAC, Type T
0.50 Amp Slo-Blo 230 VAC, Type T
Maximum Non-Destructive Voltage
150/300 VAC for 1 minute
Power Switch
Switches both L1 and L2
Over Voltage
Category II

REC-3924 Rev M
Load Cell (Weight)
Input Circuits
Number: Up to six 350 ohm load cells in parallel. Cable distance 200 feet or less.
Sensitivity: 0.5 mV/V to 3.5 mV/V (keyboard selectable)
Input impedance: 1 M ohm minimum
Maximum usable signal: 114% of 3 mV/V
Isolation: Isolated
Maximum non destructive input voltage: ±6 V relative to ground
Transient/RFI protection: YES
Load cell cable shield: Connected to earth ground
Load cell excitation: 10 VDC
Excitation-sense circuitry
6 Wire System
Cable distance over 200 feet (not to exceed 3000 feet)
Nominal input voltage: ±5 VDC (10 volts)
Input impedance: 100 k ohm minimum
Jumper selectable: Local or remote sense
Load Cell A/D Converter

A/D converter
24 bits signal delta A/D more than 1,000,000 counts at 100% load cell capacity using
3 mV/V load cell.
Type
Ratio metric
Speed
10 conversions per second
Zero Thermal Drift
0.15 µV/EC
Span Thermal Drift
4 ppm/EC
Weight Data Output

Communication
Link: EIA-485/4 wire
Baud Rate: 9600
Distance: Up to 4,000 feet
Software Protocol: Modbus compatible
Over-range Capability
Percentage of full scale: 1 to 115% for either 2 mV or 3 mV load cells
Digital Inputs/Outputs
Up to four inputs or outputs, or any combination of four inputs/outputs.
Digital AC or DC Input Modules
LED status indicator
4000 Vrms input-to-output isolation
Output voltage drop: 0.4 volts at 50 mA
REC-3924 Rev M
Output current: 50 mA
Digital AC or DC Output Modules
Current Rating: At 45º C ambient 3A. At 70º C ambient 2A
4000 Vrms input-to-output isolation
Motherboard Digital Inputs

The Field Mount Integrator has provision on the field terminal board for three OPTO
22/Generation 4 modules. The programmable status inputs can be AC or DC (see
Figure 1-5).
The Panel Mount Integrator version only accepts a dry contact input. See Appendix
C: “Digital Input/Output” for specifications and a typical wiring diagram.
Figure 1-5. AC and DC Input Module

REC-3924 Rev M
Digital and Fault Outputs
The Field Mount Integrator has provision on the field terminal board for four OPTO
22/Generation 4 modules. Three are programmable and one is a dedicated fail-safe
fault output. All outputs can be AC or DC (see Figure 1-6).
The Panel Mount Integrator version outputs are 24 VDC open collector. See Appendix
C: “Digital Input/Output” for specifications and a typical wiring diagram.
Figure 1-6. AC and DC Output Module

REC-3924 Rev M
Optional Analog I/O High level inputs (2)
(Figure 1-7)
Board B
Type
Differential voltage input
(0-20 mA or 4-20 mA with internal resistor, jumper selectable)
Range
0-5 volt, or ±5 volt, programmable
Input impedance
1 M ohm nominal (differential)
Maximum usable input voltage
106% of full-scale
Non-isolated
Maximum non-destructive input voltage
12 V peak
Figure 1-7. High-Level Analog Input

REC-3924 Rev M
Current Outputs (2)
(Figure 1-8)
Optically isolated
Isolated power source
Voltage output by adding an internal dropping resistor.
Output range
User selectable 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, representing 0 to 100% variable
Resistive load
800 ohms maximum
Capacitive load
No limit
Figure 1-8. High-Level Analog Output
Optional Analog I/O Depopulated version of Analog I/O Board B

Board A
Current Output (1)
(Figure 1-8)
Output range
User selectable 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, representing 0 to 100% variable
Resistive load
800 ohms maximum loop
Capacitive load
No limit

REC-3924 Rev M
Communication Refer to Serial Communications manual (REC 3949) if this option is installed. (See
Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 in Chapter 2: “Installation”.)
Board A
Serial Interface
Type
Conforms to RS-232C, RS-485/422, and 20 mA standards
Supports 2 and 4 wire multi-drop in RS-485
20 mA loop is passive ONLY
Selection
One interface mode only
Interfacing
RS-485 supports 2-wire or 4-wire multi-drop networking
RS-232C provides support for modem
Data rate
300 to 19200, operator selectable from the keyboard
Data format
Asynchronous, bit-serial, selectable parity, data length, and stop bits
Optical isolation
250 Vrms maximum
Input voltage
±30 VDC max. (RS-232C), +15/-10 VDC maximum (RS-485)
Cable length
50 feet maximum (RS-232C)
4000 feet maximum (RS-485 and 20 mA)
Clock Calendar
Type
Dallas DS1285 with battery backup
provisions of clock/calendar with integrated battery
Allen-Bradley Refer to Allen-Bradley Remote I/O manual (REC 4012) if this option is installed.
Remote I/O
Profibus-DP Refer to Profibus-DP Manual (REC 4063) if this option is installed.
DeviceNet Refer to DeviceNet manual (REC 4150) if this option is installed.
Ethernet Refer to Ethernet manual (REC 4251) if this option is installed.

REC-3924 Rev M
Chapter 2 Installation
This chapter describes the Integrator and Exciter Digitizer installation procedure and
 Installation procedures for both the Field Mount and Panel Mount Integrator,
and the Exciter Digitizer
 Integrator and Digitizer configuration details, including procedures to assist

you in gathering information used during initial setup
 Initial setup procedures
Overview After installing the Integrator, you setup the instrument. The initial programming is a
machine directed procedure that prompts you to enter the required conveyor and belt
scale parameters. After all parameters have been entered, the instrument performs an
unassisted zero and span calibration.
Field Mount This section describes the installation procedures for the Field Mount Integrator and
Installation
 Acceptable mounting locations
 Mounting procedure
 Safety precautions and utility connections
 Critical wiring considerations and wiring procedure
 Speed sensor termination locations

REC-3924 Rev M
Location The Field Mount Integrator should be mounted in a control room environment and not
be exposed to excessive vibration, heat or moisture. The Integrator can be mounted
up to 4,000 feet from the scale (Figure 2-1).
Mounting Mount the Integrator to a rigid, flat, vertical surface using four mounting holes provided
on the back of the enclosure (Figure 2-1).
Care should be taken to insure the mounting surface is flat so as not to twist or warp
the fiberglass enclosure when tightening the mounting bolts.
Figure 2-1. Electrical & Mounting Guidelines for Field Mount Integrator
Installation

REC-3924 Rev M
Safety Precautions
CAUTION. Do not install, operate, or perform any maintenance procedures until you
have read the following safety precautions.
 Do not connect power to the electronics, nor turn on the unit until you have
read and understood this entire manual. The precautions and procedures
presented in this manual must be followed carefully in order to prevent
equipment damage and protect the operator from possible injury.
 Hands and clothing must be kept away from all moving or rotating parts.
 Incoming voltages must be checked with a voltmeter before being connected
to the electronics.
 Objects should never be placed or stored on the Integrator or Exciter Digitizer.
 All panels covering the electronics must be in place and tight before wash
down procedures. Damage to the electronics could result from water,
moisture, or contamination in the electronics housing.
Utility Connections
(Incoming Power)
CAUTION. Do not connect power until you have read and understood this entire
section. Improper connection may result in damage to your Integrator.
The following rules and cautions apply to connecting power to your Integrator:
 Verify that the input voltage is correct with an AC voltmeter before you
connect it to the Integrator.
 Earth ground must be provided to the Integrator. Do not use conduit to
provide this ground.
 A readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the fixed
wiring.
 Refer to the field wiring diagram (Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3) as a guide if you
do not have a specific wiring diagram for your system. Follow your local
electrical codes and regulations for minimum wire size and routing.
Wiring The following are critical wiring considerations:

 Insure power is off.
 Do not route load cell and signal cables in the same conduit with power
cables or any large source of electrical noise.
 Earth ground all enclosures and conduits. A ground connection between all
conduits is required.

REC-3924 Rev M
 Wiring should be long enough to allow the field terminal entry panel to swing
down for circuit board access.
 Connect the shields only where shown.
 Check that all wires are tight in their connections.

 Never use a “megger” to check the wiring.
 A readily accessible disconnect device (maximum 20 amps) shall be
incorporated in the field wiring. This disconnect should be in easy reach of the
operator and it must be marked as the disconnecting device for the
equipment.
 All conduits should enter the bottom of the enclosure. Do not run conduit
through the top or sides of the enclosure.
Connecting Incoming All units shipped from the factory are configured for 120 VAC. If another input
Power selection is desired, refer to “Determining Installation Parameters”.
To connect incoming power, follow these steps:
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2-1 and field wiring diagrams Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3.
1. Rotate the screw latch mounted on the lower left corner of the front chassis
counterclockwise.
2. Open the door.
3. Route incoming power wiring through a conduit hole at the bottom right of the
enclosure. Leave enough loose wiring so that if the field terminal board is
moved, there will be enough length. Typically, eight inches is sufficient.
4. Wire safety ground terminal located on the side of the chassis.
5. Wire HOT to H on TB7.
6. Wire NEUTRAL to N on TB7.
7. If additional I/O is required operation at line voltages, these wires should be
routed through a conduit hole on the bottom right of the enclosure. Leave
enough loose wiring so that if the field terminal board is moved, there will be
enough length. Typically, eight inches is sufficient.
8. All additional field wiring operation at voltages less than 30 V must be located
on the left bottom of the enclosure. Leave enough loose wiring so that if the
field terminal board is moved, there will be enough length. Typically, eight
inches is sufficient.
9. Close front chassis cover and rotate screw lock on lower left corner
counterclockwise until locked.
10. Verify door is locked.
REC-3924 Rev M
Speed Sensor The speed sensor can be terminated in the Integrator, or it can be terminated in the
Digitizer.
Termination
If the speed sensor is terminated in the Digitizer, the speed input signal is transmitted
to the Integrator via the Integrator/Digitizer COMM link.
Figure 2-2. Field Wiring Diagram – Field Terminal Board

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-3. Field Wiring Diagram – Field Mount with Terminal Board

REC-3924 Rev M
Panel Mount This section describes the installation procedures for the Panel Mount Integrator and
Installation
Location The panel mounted Integrator is suitable for mounting in a control panel. The control
panel should not be exposed to excessive heat, moisture or vibration. The front bezel,
when properly seated, forms a dust seal.
Follow these clearance guidelines:
Two (2) inch clearance around the top and bottom of the Integrator is required for
convection cooling.
Additional clearances may be required if equipment mounted directly below generate

excessive heat.
Clearance in the back is necessary for wiring access and fuse replacement.
Clearance on the side is necessary for inserting the chassis holding brackets from the
back after insertion of the Integrator.
Mounting To mount the unit, follow these steps:
NOTE: The large rubber band shipped with the unit can be used to hold the clamp
brackets in place during installation.
1. Provide a cutout in the panel. See Figure 2-4 for panel cutout, outline and
mounting dimensions.
2. Insert the Integrator after removing the holding brackets (Figure 2-5).
(Remove the clamp brackets and side chassis assembly through the front of
the cut-out.)
3. From the back, insert the holding brackets on both sides of the Integrator.
4. Tighten the holding brackets to support the Integrator and form the dust seal.
(Tighten threaded rods against the back of the panel until the unit is secure.)

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-4. Electrical & Mounting Guidelines for Panel Mount Integrator
Installation
Figure 2-5. Panel Mount Integrator clamp Bracket

REC-3924 Rev M
Safety Precautions

to the electronics.
Utility Connections
(Incoming Power)
 The following rules and cautions apply to connecting power to your Integrator:
connect it to the Integrator.
 Earth ground must be provided to the Integrator. Do not use conduit to

provide this ground.

incorporated in the field wiring. This disconnect device should be in easy
reach of the operator and it must be marked as the disconnecting device for
the equipment.
1. Insure power is off.
2. Do not route load cell and signal cables in the same conduit with power

REC-3924 Rev M
3. Wiring should be long enough, and routed to allow the chassis to be removed
from the front for servicing if necessary.
4. Connect the shields only where shown.
5. Check that all wires are tight in their connections.
6. Earth ground all enclosures and conduit.
7. Never use a “megger” to check the wiring.
8. A readily accessible disconnect device (maximum 20 amps) shall be

equipment.
Connecting Incoming All units shipped from the factory are configured for 120 VAC. If another input
Power selection is desired, refer to “Determining Installation Parameters”.
NOTE. Refer to Figure 2-4 and field wiring diagram Figure 2-6.
1. For input power, use 14 AWG stranded wire.
2. Wire safety ground terminal located on the right back side of the enclosure.
3. Wire the HOT to terminal labeled HOT.
4. Wire the NEUTRAL to the terminal labeled NEUTRAL.
Digitizer.
Termination
Verify speed sensor terminations prior to applying power. Connection of the DC

supply to the sensor outputs will damage the speed sensor.

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-6. Field Wiring Diagram – Panel Mount
REC-3924 Rev M
Digitizer This section describes the installation procedures for the Digitizer and includes the
following information:
Installation
Location The load cell Digitizer should be mounted as close to the load cells as possible
without being exposed to excessive vibration, heat or moisture. The ideal mounting
site would be on a reinforced section of the conveyor, next to the scale (Figure 2-7).
Some applications may require mounting the load cell Digitizer distant from the load
cells. In such cases, a special 6-wire load cell cable should be used, and a remote
load cell junction box is recommended for housing the load cell and remote excitation
sense connections. Consult the factory for cable and remote junction box
recommendations.
NOTE: Load cell extension must always use shielded 6-wire cable (Figure 2-8). Do
not extend the supplied load cell cables unless absolutely necessary. If extension is
necessary, the maximum allowable extension is 200 feet.
Mounting To mount the Digitizer, follow these steps:
1. Mount the load cell Digitizer on the conveyor adjacent to the load cell cables
(Figure 2-7). The pre-punched holes in the bottom of the enclosure are for
the load cell cables.
2. Additional holes must be made in the bottom of the enclosure to accept

power wires and any additional signal wires and conduit (follow local
electrical codes and regulations for wire size and routing).
NOTE: It is recommended that the chassis be removed from the enclosure to prevent
any damage during the hold punching process. Do not punch holes in the top or
sides for conduit entrance.

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-7. Electrical and Mounting Guidelines for the Digitizer
Safety Precautions
to the electronics.

REC-3924 Rev M
Utility Connections
(Incoming Power)
CAUTION. Do not connect power until you have read and understood this entire
section. Improper connection may result in damage to your Digitizer.
The following rules and cautions apply to connecting power to your Digitizer:
connect it to the Digitizer.
 Earth ground must be provided to the Digitizer. Do not use conduit to provide
this ground.
 A readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the field

wiring.
 Refer to the field wiring diagram (figure 2-8)) as a guide if you do not have a
specific wiring diagram for your system. Follow your local electrical codes and
regulations for minimum wire size and routing.
 Insure power is off.
 Do not route load cell and signal cables in the same conduit with power
 Earth ground all enclosures and conduit. A ground connection between all
conduits is required.
 Stranded, rather than solid, wire should be used. This wiring should be long
enough, and routed to allow the chassis to be removed from the front for
servicing.
 Connect the shields only where shown.
 Check that all wires are tight in their connectors. This is particularly important
for the load cell connections.
 Never use a “megger” to check the wiring.


REC-3924 Rev M
equipment.
Connecting Incoming All units shipped from the factory are in 115 VAC position. If 230 VAC is required,
Power select SW1 to 230 VAC.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2-7 and field wiring diagram Figure 2-8.
1. Use 14 AWG stranded wire.

2. Wire safety ground terminal located on the upper right of the chassis.
3. Wire the HOT to TB1 terminal labeled HOT.
4. Wire the NEUTRAL to TB1 terminal labeled NEUTRAL.
Digitizer.
Termination

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-8. Digitizer Field Wiring

REC-3924 Rev M
Configuring the The Integrator is one of a family of products that is supported by a common hardware
platform. Configuration of the hardware platform and additional circuit boards enable
Integrator the hardware platform to be used for several discrete instruments.
Wire jumpers are installed at the factory for the instrument ordered, and should not
have to be reconfigured in the field.
This section describes the switches and removable jumpers, as well as their default
positions, and includes the following information:
 AC voltage input power selection settings
 Integrator / Digitizer COMM link settings
 Settings for general purpose digital inputs and outputs
 Field terminal board settings
 Analog input and output configuration
 Communications board jumper settings
Configuration This section includes settings for jumpers and switches, and includes the following
information:
Jumpers and
Switches
AC Voltage Input Power AC voltage input power selection SW1 and SW2 are located on the right center
Switches section of the motherboard (Figure 2-9).
AC Input Voltage Fuse F1 (SB) SW1 Setting SW2 Setting

Default 110 1.0 A 110 110/220
120 1.0 A 110 120/240
220 0.5 A 220 110/220
240 0.5 A 220 120/240
Table 2-1. SW1 and SW2 Settings
To set the AC voltage input power selection, follow these steps:
1. Set SW1 for nominal 110 VAC or 220 VAC.

2. Set SW2 close to the actual input voltage. For example:
Input Voltage = 117 VAC

SW1 = 110
SW2 = 120/240

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-9. Model 2301 Motherboard
Integrator/Digitizer The COMM link board is located in the number 6 card slot on the Integrator
motherboard (Figure 2-9). Presumably, jumpers have been set at the factory (Figure
COMM Link Jumpers
2-10).
Jumpers
Mode OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6
RS-485 “B” “A” “B” “B” “A” “A” Default
Table 2-2. COMM Link Board Jumper Settings

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-10. Integrator/Digitizer COMM Link Board A
General Purpose There are provisions for three status input optional OPTO22 plug-in modules on the
field terminal board. The programmable inputs can be configured as normally open or
Digital Inputs
normally closed. External AC or DC power for input logic is required.
The programmable input choices are:
 External Alarm 1
 Print
 Belt Running
 Reset Total
 Reset Alarm
 Auto Zero
 Remote Auto Zero
 Clip Detector
 Batch Start Command
 Batch Stop Command
 Batch Start-Up Command
Any three inputs can be selected. An optional AC or DC OPTO22 module is required

for each input.
Digital Outputs Provisions for four programmable output optional OPTO22 plug-in modules are
located on the field terminal board. The digital outputs have the following
characteristics:

REC-3924 Rev M
 Three of the digital outputs are programmable. They may be configured as
normally open or normally closed.
 The fourth digital output is permanently assigned as Integrator fault. The fault
output is normally closed, and cannot be reconfigured or used as a
programmable output.
 External AC or DC power is required for all external devices wired to the

output modules.
 One OPTO22 AC output module is included for remote totalization.
The programmable output choices are:
 Alarm Cumulative
 Shutdown Cumulative
 Ready
 High Load
 Low Load
 High Rate
 Low Rate
 High Speed
 Low Speed
 Totalization Pulse (Remote Counter)
 Batch Preset Reach
 Batch End
 Print Ready
 Load WTS (Weights)
 Out of Range
 Deviation Alarms
Field Terminal Board The field terminal board is available on the field mount version only. It is not available
on the panel mount version. An optional solid-state module rack is required to
(Field Mount Only)
interface with the panel mount version when solid-state modules are required.
NOTE. You must choose between wiring dry contact inputs and open collector outputs
direct or through the solid-state relay module options. The two options cannot be
mixed (Figure 2-11).

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-11. Field Terminal Entry Board
Analog Input/Output The optional analog input/output board is available in two configurations.
Configuration A has one current output (Figure 2-12). Configuration B has two analog
inputs and two current outputs (Figure 2-13). The analog inputs are normally
configured for current with a 250 ohm resistor installed across each input. For use with
a 0-5 VDC input, shunts W3 (input #1) and W4 (input #2) must be cut.
The Integrator can support up to four current outputs. Four outputs require two analog
boards (configuration B).
Configuration A One user-definable 0-20/4-20 or 20-4/20-0 mA output. Outputs can be one of the
following:
 Rate
 Speed
 Load
Configuration B Two +/-5 VDC differential inputs and two user-definable, 0-20/4-20 or 20-4/20-0 mA,
outputs (optional) (Figure 2-13).
Inputs can be:
 Incline compensation
 Moisture compensation
An output can be one of the following:
 Rate
 Speed
 Load

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-12. Analog I/O Board – Depopulated 1 Output
Figure 2-13. Analog I/O Board – Populated 2 Inputs / 2 Outputs

REC-3924 Rev M
Communications The communication protocol allows a remote intelligent device to read, and eventually
write, the contents of the registers.
Board
During the communication activity, the instrument always acts as a slave, meaning it
responds to a request from a master device on the line, but it never attempts to send
messages out.
The instrument reads the message and looks for the address, which is contained in an
address byte in the query package. If the address contained in the message matches
the address specified in the instrument set up data, the message is processed. If the
addresses do not match, the message is ignored.
The clock/calendar is located on the communication board. If the AC power is lost, or

if the instrument is powered off, a battery located on the motherboard provides power
to retain RAM data and maintain operation of the clock/calendar.
One electrical interface can be selected and accessed through one communication
port. Up to three communication boards, including the Exciter Digitizer and Integrator
COMM link, can be installed.
Table 2-3 through Table 2-5 summarize the jumper positions required for selection of
each electrical interface mode (Figure 2-10).

RS-232 A A A A A B
RS-485 B A B B A A Default
20 mA B B A A A C
Table 2-3. Jumper Positions
OP5
A Normal
B Multi-Drop
Table 2-4. MDP for RS-485 Only
OP6
A Terminated
B Not Terminated
Table 2-5. TRM for RS-485 Only

REC-3924 Rev M
Configuring the The Exciter Digitizer supplies excitation voltage to the load cells and converts the
analog load cell signal to digital. Load cell sensing is normally internal, but can be
Digitizer external if the Digitizer is not located at the scale.
Communication between the Integrator and the Digitizer is via four wire RS-485 mode.
This section describe the default hardware configuration (Figure 2-14) and includes
the following information:
 Power switch description and settings

 Dip switch settings
 Status indicators
 Optional jumpers
Figure 2-14. Digitizer Motherboard

REC-3924 Rev M
Power Switches SW1 voltage selector:
 Left = 115 VAC (Default)
 Right = 230 VAC
 SW2 line power ON/OFF
DIP Switches Switch setting:

 0 = closed = on
 1 = open = off
SW3 DIP switch, SLAVE ADDRESS

Bits 1-8 Slave Device ID (bit 1 is least significant)
1 open (Default)
2-8 closed
Table 2-6. SW3 DIP Switch Settings
SW4 DIP switch, Configuration Byte

bits
Serial Baud Rate:
2,1
00 = 9,600 (Default)
01 = 19,200
10 = 38,400
11 = 600 baud for 10-150 emulation mode
bits
Serial Parity
4,3
00 = no parity (Default)
01 = odd parity
10 = even parity
11 = reversed
bits
Broadcast Mode:
6,5
00 = disabled (Default)
01 = data through STATUS
10 = data through INPUT HISTORY
11 = data through SPD
bit 7 RS-485 bus type

0 = 4 wire receive enabled continuously Default
1 = 2-wire receive disabled during transmit
bit 8 Spare
Table 2-7. SW4 DIP Switch Settings

REC-3924 Rev M
Broadcast mode is a special mechanism for transferring Digitizer data at periodic
intervals without a corresponding ModBus inquiry message.
NOTE. Broadcast mode can optionally provide a message format that emulates the
Micro-Master Exciter digitizer model 10-150 serial data output format.
Status Indicators Status indicators provide a visual indication of the Digitizer operation.
 LED #1 ON indicates load cell excitation is normal.

 LED #2 monitors the A/D status.
Operation State
Normal A/D operation 5 Hz steady blink rate
A/D over-range 2 blinks, followed by 1 second pause
A/D under-range 1 blink, followed by 1 second pause
Table 2-8. A/D Status
Optional (OP) Hardware options can be selected with the jumpers in Table 2-9.
Jumpers
Jumper Description
OP 1 through OP 3 Not Used
OP 4 RS-485 Termination Resistor
 A = In (Default)
 B = Out
OP 5 Speed Sensor Input #2
 A = Greater than 29 Hz, Thermo Scientific
Model 60-xx or 60-xxx speed sensors (default)
 B = Less than 29 Hz
OP 6 Speed Sensor Input #1
 A = Greater than 29 Hz, Thermo Scientific
Model 60-xx or 60-xxx speed sensors (default)
 B = Less than 29 Hz
OP 7 Load Cell Sense
 A = Local (internal) (default)
 B = Remote (external)
OP 8 Load Cell Sense
 A = Local (internal) (default)
 B = Remote (external)
Table 2-9. Optional Jumpers

REC-3924 Rev M
Initial Setup Following mechanical and electrical installation, you must program field data that is
specific to your application into the Integrator memory before you can use the
Procedure instrument.
NOTE. The setup procedures in this section should be completed before you attempt
to calibrate the belt scale. (See “Performing calibration Functions” in Chapter 3:
“Operation”.)
This section provides procedures to assist you in the setup process, and includes the
 How to determine install parameters

 Initial programming procedures
Determining Before turning on the conveyor belt or applying power to the belt scale system,
complete the following statements (Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16). Refer to your
Installation
System Data Sheet in the front of your belt feeder manual.
Parameters
1. Record scale capacity.
Determine the scale's capacity in tons per hour and record the capacity
below. (Example: 400.0)
__________ (Tons Per Hour)
2. Record the belt scale code number.
Determine the feeder belt scale's code number from the System Data Sheet
located in front of the belt feeder controller manual or see Appendix B:
“Weighbridge Physical Parameters”. Record the code number below. Enter
zero (0) for any weighbridge not found in the table.
For example, code number 49 is a belt scale model 14-14, 4 idler.
__________ (Belt Scale Code Number)
When you enter the code number, a list of default parameters for the
selected weighbridge is entered. During initial programming, the Integrator
calculates a calibration constant for R Cal based on these default values. If
test weights or test chains are used, their weight values are entered in the
Cal Data Scroll after initial programming is completed.
During initial programming, you can view all the weighbridge default values

REC-3924 Rev M
by selecting DETAIL after entering the belt scale code number and then
scrolling down. You can also change a parameter at this time, if necessary.
NOTE. If you enter zero (0) for the belt Scale Code Number, or select DETAIL during
initial programming, you must follow Steps 3 through 14 to make and enter all
applicable measurements.
Figure 2-15. Belt Scale Weighbridge Model 10-17-2
Figure 2-16. Belt Scale Weighbridge Model 10-17-4

REC-3924 Rev M
Step Number Scroll Screen* Instrument Information Parameter
3a. 3a. PIVOT TO LOAD CELL (LA)
3b. 3b. IDLERS NUMBER (IDN)
3c. 3c. PIVOT TO 1E IDLER (LB1)
3d. 3d. PIVOT TO 2E IDLER (LB2)
3d. 3e. PIVOT TO 3E IDLER (LB3)
3d. 3f. PIVOT TO 4E IDLER (LB4)
3d. 3g. PIVOT TO 5E IDLER (LB5)
3d. 3h. PIVOT TO 6E IDLER (LB6)
4. 4. PIVOT TO TEST WEIGHT LENGTH (LC)
5. 5. PIVOT TO TEST WEIGHT HEIGHT (LE)
6. 6. PIVOT TO CARRIAGE HEIGHT (LF)
7. 7. CARRY ROLL TO CARRIAGE HEIGHT (LG)
8. 9. IDLER SPACING (LD)
9. 10. CONVEYOR’S ANGLE (2)
* Scroll screens are shown in the section “Programming the Integrator”
Table 2-10. Weighbridge Parameters & Instrument Information by Question

and Scroll Screen

REC-3924 Rev M
3. Record the belt scale weighbridge dimensions.
NOTE. Refer to Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16 and other referenced figures for
measurements.
a. record the pivot to load cell distance (LA).
NOTE. For Model 10-14 weighbridge, skip to 3a. record Step 3b, and then skip to
Steps 8 through 14.
As indicated on Figure 2-17, measure the distance from the pivot

center line to the load cell center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)
inch. Record the distance below. (Example: 32.00)
__________” (Pivot to Load Cell Distance)
Table 2-17. Pivot to Load Cell
b. Enter the number of weigh idlers on the

scale weighbridges (IDN) (Figure 2-18).
__________ (Number of Weigh Idlers)

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-18. Number of Weigh Idlers on Scale Weighbridges - IDN
c. Record the pivot to 1st idler (Weigh Idler)

distance (LB1).
Measure the distance from the pivot center line to the weigh idler's
center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch.(Figure 2-19). Record the
distance below. (Example: 24.00)
__________” (Pivot to Weigh Idler Distance)
Figure 2-19. Pivot to 1st Idler (Model 10-20 Belt Scale)

REC-3924 Rev M
d. Record the pivot to 2nd weigh idler distance
(optional).
Measure the distance from the pivot center line to the second weigh
idler's center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-20,
Model 10-17-2 is similar). Record the distance below. (Example:
24.00)
__________” (Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler Distance)
Figure 2-20. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler (Model 10-22 Belt Scale)
NOTE. During programming, you can enter up to six (6) weigh idlers on a single
weighbridge. Repeat Step 3d to measure and record distance information for each
additional weigh idler.
e. Record the pivot to 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th idler

distance (Weigh Idler).
Measure the distance from the pivot center line to the weigh idler's
center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-21). Record the
__________” (Pivot to Weigh Idler Distance)
Figure 2-21. Pivot to 1st through 4th Idler (Model 10-17-4 Belt Scale)

REC-3924 Rev M
NOTE. Complete Steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 only if test weights are used for calibration.
4. Record the pivot to test weight length distance (LC).
Measure the distance from the center line of the pivot to the actual point of
test weight contact to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-22). Record the
distance below.
(Example: 4.75)
__________” (Pivot to Test Weight Length Distance)
Figure 2-22. Pivot to Test Weight Length
5. Record the pivot to test weight height distance (LE).
Measure the distance from the center line of the pivot to the actual point of
test weight contact to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-23). Record the
distance below.
(Example: 0.00)
__________” (Pivot to Test Weight Height Distance)

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure 2-23. Pivot to Test Weight Height
6. Record the pivot to carriage height distance (LF)
Measure the distance from the center line of the pivot to the top of the
carriage rails to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-24). Record the
__________” (Pivot to Carriage Height Distance)
Figure 2-24. Pivot to Carriage Height

REC-3924 Rev M
7. Record the roll to carriage height distance (LG).
Measure the distance from the top of the carriage rails to the top of the weigh
idler carry roll where the belt makes contact on trough idlers (flat idlers
measure to the center line of the grease fitting) to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)
inch (Figure 2-25). Record the distance below. (Example: 6.50)
__________” (Roll to Carriage Height Distance)
Figure 2-25. Roll to Carriage Height
8. Record the idler spacing scale area distance (LD).
a. Measure the distances between the center lines

of all idlers from the plus 1 (+1) to the minus 1
(-1) idler on both sides of the conveyor (left
and right).
b. Add all the measurements together.
c. Divide the total from Step 8b by the number

of measurements to determine the average
distance.
__________” (Idler Spacing)
NOTE. If the distances measured are not all equal within 0.032 (1/32) inch, the scale
is not properly installed. Refer to the belt scale installation manual provided.
9. Record the conveyor’s angle of incline.
Measure the conveyor's angle of incline to the nearest 0.1 degrees (Figure 2-
26) by following these steps:
REC-3924 Rev M
a. Choose a convenient distance (AB) and measure
it in inches.
b. Hang a plumb line from B.
c. Measure the horizontal distance from A to
plumb line in inches (AC).
d. Divide AC by AB to get COSØ.
e. If angle of incline in degrees is known, use
the following table.
AngleØ COSØ AngleØ COSØ AngleØ COSØ

0 1.0000 6 .9945 12 .9781
1 .9998 7 .9925 13 .9744
2 .9994 8 .9903 14 .9703
3 .9986 9 .9877 15 .9659
4 .9976 10 .9848 16 .9613
5 .9962 11 .9816 17 .9563
Table 2-11. Angle of Incline
f. Record the degree of angle below. (Example: 16.0)
__________ degrees (Angle of Conveyor Incline)
Figure 2-26. Measuring Angle of the Incline

REC-3924 Rev M
10. Record the number of load cells
Enter the number of load cells. (Example: 1)
__________ (Number of Load Cells)
11. Record the load cell capacity.
From the belt scale data sheet located in the front of its manual, determine
the load cell size in pounds. Record the weight below. (Example: 250.0)
__________ pounds (Load Cell Weight)
12. Record the load cell sensitivity.
From the load cell name plate, determine the load cell sensitivity in mV/V.
Record the sensitivity below. (Example 3.000 mV/V)
__________ (Load Cell Sensitivity)
13. Record the load cell resistance.
Measure the signal (output) resistance of each load cell with a digital VOM.
Record the resistance below. (Example: 350.000)
__________ (Load Cell Resistance)
14. Record the conveyor belt length.
Using a long tape measure, measure the length of one complete belt
revolution. Measure to the nearest 0.1 foot. Record the length below.
(Example: 1000.0)
__________ feet (Conveyor Belt Length)
15. Record the R-CAL resistance.
Record which R-CAL resistors are installed in the Digitizer (Figure 2-14).
R-CAL 1 (value) __________ (49.9 kS)
R68 (value) __________ (165.0 kS)
NOTE. If both resistors are installed, the R-Cal value will be the parallel resistance
(38313 ohm).

REC-3924 Rev M
Programming the When power is first applied to the Integrator, the system steps the operator through
menus and options that bring the system to a weighing state. Soft keys, numeric keys
Integrator
and the scroll control keys are used to select choices. The RUN and MENU control
keys are inactive during this procedure.
At the end of this procedure, the belt scale is calibrated. The alarm light flashes
during the programming procedure and clears when calibration is complete.
To program the Integrator, follow these steps:
NOTE. Inside the Integrator’s front panel are two voltage selection slide switches
(Figure 2-27). Ensure they are in the correct position (either 110/120 or 220/240
VAC) before applying power. (See “Digitizer Installation”.)
A00710
Figure 2-27. Integrator CPU Board

REC-3924 Rev M
1. Turn the belt scale conveyor belt on.
NOTE. Run the weigh feeder empty during setup and calibration.
2. Begin programming the Integrator.
The programming mode begins the first time power is applied, or after a
forced cold start (memory clear). Enter the information requested by the
instructional screens before moving to the next screen.
The programming mode begins with the following instructional screens.
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language
key to continue to
ESP USA
NOTE. If the MEMORY ERASED screen does not appear when power is first applied
for initial calibration, a cold start is required. (See the section “Integrator Cold Start” in
Chapter 4: “Maintenance and Troubleshooting”.)
a. Press the desired language.
The Integrator is a dual language instrument. USA is always the first

language. The standard configuration provides Spanish (ESP) as
the second language. Other languages, such as German (GER), are
available upon request. (Please consult the factory for details.)
Initial scale setup

and calibration.
press down SCROLL
b. Press the DOWN SCROLL key.
Press key under HELP

for more information “HELP” is flashing
HELP
c. Press the HELP soft key.

REC-3924 Rev M
d. Press the MORE key to advance the system tothe next screen.
Pressing the RETURN key returns you to the previous screen.
Use down SCROLL key

to advance through
the menus.
MORE RETURN
e. Press the DOWN scroll key.

Pressing MORE or RETURN reverts to the
Previous screen in this series.
3. Select the units of measure.
a. Press the SCROLL DOWN key to accept the default unit (ENGLISH)
or press the CHOICES soft key to scroll selections.
b. Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
c. Scroll down.
- DISPLAY SCROLL 1 –
Measure units
> English <
CHOICE ENTER
Default ENGLISH
ENGLISH All units are in English
METRIC All units are in metric
MIXED Units may be a combination of English or
metric
NOTE. If the measure units are changed from English to metric (or vice versa) after
the scale is calibrated, the span number will change but the calibration will remain the
same.
4. Select the units to be used to totalization.

REC-3924 Rev M
a. Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or press the
CHOICES soft key to scroll selections.
c. Scroll down.
- DISPLAY SCROLL 2 -
Totalization Units
> Tons <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH Default Tons

Selections Tons, LTons, Pounds
If METRIC Default Tonnes
Selections Tonnes, kg
If MIXED Default Tons
Selections Tons, LTons, kg, Pounds, Tones
5. Select the units used for parameters expressed in length. Selections are only
available if MIXED units are in use.
a. Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or the
c. Scroll down.
- DISPLAY SCROLL 3 –
Length Units
> feet <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH Default Feet

If METRIC Default Meters
If MIXED Default Feet
Selections Feet, Meters
6. Select the units used to display rate.

REC-3924 Rev M
c. Scroll down.
Rate Units
> TPH <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH Default Tph

Selections Tph, LTph, Lb/mn, T/mn, LT/mn,
Percent %, Lb/h
If METRIC Default Kg/h
Selections t/h, kg/m, t/m, Percent %, kg/h
If MIXED Default Tph
Selections Tph, LTph, kg/m, t/m, Lb/m, T/mn,
Lt/mn, Percent %, kg/h, t/h, Lb/h
7. Select the units used for entering the load cell capacity.
In this case, the use of English or metric units is always allowed, even if
MIXED is not specified.
c. Scroll down.
Load cell Units
> Pounds <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH or Default Pounds

MIXED

REC-3924 Rev M
If METRIC Default Kilograms
Selections Lbs, kg
8. Enter the maximum rate at which the scale is allowed to work. This is the
scale capacity.
NOTE. This entry also defined the default number of decimal places that are used for
displaying rate.
a. Enter the number, using the numeric keys.

b. Press ENTER to confirm for entry.
c. Scroll down.
- SC DATA SCROLL 1 -
Max. scale capacity
500.0 Tph
ENTER
Default: 500.0
Min: 1
Max: 200000
9. Select the scale division.
When you enter the Scale Capacity (in Step 8), the number of decimal
places is also defined. For example, if you enter 500.0, the Scale Divisions
parameter is set to 0.1, as shown in the example scroll below. If required,
you can alter the Scale Division to any of the available options.
a. Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default divisions, or the
c. Scroll down.
Scale division
> 0.1 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 0.1

REC-3924 Rev M
Selections: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 0.01,
0.02, 0.05, 0.001, 0.002, 0.005
10. Select the weighbridge model.
When you enter the code number of your Thermo Scientific scale, the
Integrator automatically calculates system parameters, such as the number
of load sells and the number of weigh idlers. This entry is also used for
internal calibration calculations.
The default model number for the Integrator is 49, which corresponds to belt
scale model 10-14 four idler spaced at 48 inches.
 Press ENTER to accept the displayed selection from the database listed in
Appendix B: “Weighbridge Physical Parameters”. If ENTER is used, the
scrolls from 3A to 3I are not displayed. Skip to Step 12.
 Press DETAIL if you want to force scrolls 3A to 3O (Step 11) to be displayed

even if ENTER was used.
 Enter 0 if you want to define the weighbridge not using the database. This
should only be done for special weighbridges that are not part of the
standard set of Thermo Scientific scales. Entering 0 forces the scrolls 3A to
3O (Step 11) to be displayed.
Belt scale code #
> 49 <
ENTER DETAIL
Default: 49
Min: 0
Max: 500
11. Select the mechanical parameters of the frame.
The following screens are only displayed if you pressed OTHER or DETAIL
in Step 10. Refer to Figure 2-15.
a. Use the numeric keys to enter the distance from pivot to load cell
(parameter LA) and then press ENTER. (See “Determining
Installation Parameters”.) The distance should be measured to
within 0.032 (1/32) inch (1 mm).
b. If the weighbridge does not have a pivot, enter zero (0).

REC-3924 Rev M
- SC DATA SCROLL 3A -
Pivot to load cell
distance: 000.00 In
ENTER
If ENGLISH or MIXED If METRIC

Default 32 in Default 1000mm
Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
Max 150.0 Max 3800mm
c. Enter the number of weigh idlers affixed to the scale weighbridge.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3B -
# of weigh idlers
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 6
d. Use the numeric keys to enter the distance between the pivot center
line and the first weigh idler center line (parameter LB1). Enter the
distance within 0.032 inch (1 mm). See “Determining Installation
Parameters”.
If the weighbridge does not have a pivot, enter zero (0).
- SC DATA SCROLL 3C -
Pivot to 1st idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER

Default 24 in Default 800mm
Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
Max 100.0 Max 2500mm
e. If the number of weigh idlers entered in scroll 3B is more than one,

REC-3924 Rev M
additional screens display. For each additional screen, use the
numeric keys to enter the distance between the pivot center line and
the specified weight idler center line. Enter the distance within 0.032
(1/32) inch (1 mm). See “Determining Installation Parameters”.
Scroll 3D displays if the number of weigh idlers is greater than or

equal to two.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3D -
Pivot to 2nd idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER
Scroll 3E displays if the number of weigh idlers is greater than or

equal to three.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3E -
Pivot to 3rd idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER
Scroll 3F displays if the number of weigh idlers is greater than or

equal to four.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3F -
Pivot to 4th idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER
Scroll 3G displays if the number of weigh idlers is greater than or

equal to five.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3G -
Pivot to 5th idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Scroll 3H displays if the number of weigh idlers is greater than or
equal to 6.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3H -
Pivot to 6th idler
distance 000.00 in.
ENTER
The following defaults and limits apply to Scroll 3D through 3H.

Default 0.00 in Default 0mm
Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
Max 100.00 in Max 2500mm
NOTE. All measurements must be within 0.032 inch or 1 mm. You must enter all
measurements from “Determining Installation Parameters”. Enter the distance with
the numeric keys and press ENTER.
f. Use the numeric keys to enter the pivot to test-weight height

(parameter LE). See “Determining Installation Parameters”.
NOTE. Scrolls 3I, 3L, 3M and 3N only apply if test weights are provided for
calibration.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3I -
Pivot to test-weight
height 000.00 in
ENTER ±

Min -20.00 in Min -500.0mm
Max +20.00 in Max +500.0mm
g. Use the numeric keys to enter the pivot to test-weight length

REC-3924 Rev M
(parameter LC). See “Determining Installation Parameters”.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3L -
length 000.00 in
ENTER

Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
h. Use the numeric keys to enter the pivot to carriage height

(parameter LF). See “Determining Installation Parameters”.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3M -
Pivot to carriage
height 000.00 in
ENTER

Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
i. Use the numeric keys to enter the carry roll to carriage height
(parameter LG). Measure to the center line of the weight idler carry
roll on troughing idlers, and to the top of the carry roll on flat belts.
See “Determining Installation Parameters”.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3N -
Roll to carriage
height 000.00 in
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Min 0.00 in Min 0mm
j. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of load cells of your
weighbridge.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3O -
# of load cells
0
ENTER
Default: 1
Min 1
Max 6
12. Define the dimensional parameters of the application.
a. Use the numeric keys to enter the idler spacing in the scale area
(parameter LD), and then press ENTER. See “Determining
Installation Parameters”. Measure to within 0.032 (1/32) inch (1
mm).
For better accuracy, average the distance between the idlers across
the scale on both sides.
Idler spacing
36.00 in
ENTER

Min 2.00 in Min 50mm
b. Use the numeric key to enter the angle of inclination of the belt
conveyor.
NOTE. If an inclination compensator is connected to the scale, enable the automatic
angle detection in I/O definition (Main Menu 4) and calibrate the incline compensator,
after the preliminary set up has been completed.

REC-3924 Rev M
Conveyor’s angle
0.0 Degrees
ENTER ±
Default: 0.0
Min -25.00º
Max +25.00º
13. Define the load cells.
a. Use the numeric keys to enter the load cell capacity as it appears on
the label placed on the load cell.
Load cell capacity
250 lbs
ENTER

Default 250.00 lbs Default 100 kg
Min 1 lbs Min 1 kg
Max 1500 lbs Max 5000 kg
b. The sensitivity was set when you entered the belt scale code (model
number). If you selected OTHER (entered zero), use the numeric
keys to enter the load cell sensitivity in mV/V, as marked on the label
of the load cell.
Thermo Scientific load cells are normally 1.800 or 3.000 mV/V.
Load cell #1 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Scroll 9B displays if the number of load cells is two or more.

REC-3924 Rev M
Load cell #2 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Scroll 9C displays if the number of load cells is three or more.
Load cell #3 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Scroll 9D displays if the number of load cells is four or more.
Load cell #4 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Scroll 9E displays if the number of load cells is five or more.
Load cell #5 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Scroll 9F displays if the number of load cells is six.
Load cell #6 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
The same defaults and limits apply to Scrolls 9A through 9F.
Default 350 ohms

Min 10 ohms
Max 2000 ohms

REC-3924 Rev M
14. Define the speed input.
The field wiring from the speed sensor can enter the Integrator (single) or the
Digitizer (remote). The default is SINGLE REMOTE (the speed sensor enters
the Digitizer). Select SINGLE if the speed sensor enters the Integrator.
(Figure 2-8)
In some cases, dual speed sensors are required to satisfy the local weights
and measures requirement. The Integrator averages the two inputs and
alarms if either input changes. In dual mode, the scale does not operate if
one input is faulty. Select DUAL (local) or DUAL REMOTE if two speed
sensors are used.
Simulation allows operation without a speed sensor. When simulated speed
is selected, a conveyor running input is required (Figure 2-8).
NOTE. If speed is selected as the third line display, the line will be blank in RUN
mode when simulated speed is selected.
a. Press the ENTER soft key to accept the speed input, or the
c. Scroll down.
Speed input
> single <
CHOICE ENTER
Default SINGLE REMOTE

Selections SINGLE
DUAL
SIMULATED
SINGLE REM
DUAL REMOTE
15. Define the calibration test duration.
Zero and Span calibrations are more accurate if executed on an entire belt
revolution, or a multiple of an entire belt revolution.
a. Select ACQUIRE to acquire the test duration. This is the
recommended selection.
To manually enter the calibration test duration, select MANUAL, and
refer to Step 18.

REC-3924 Rev M
- CAL DATA SCROLL 11 -
Establish test
duration
ACQUIRE MANUAL
b. Choose the belt length for the test duration by selecting FULL or
PARTIAL.
 FULL is the recommended selection. Use a 100 foot tape to

measure to the nearest 0.1 foot. Reference a fixed point (an idler) on
the conveyor when counting belt revolutions. (See “Determining
Installation Parameters” for the recorded conveyor belt length.)
Continue with Step 16.
 Select PARTIAL (belt length measurement) to acquire test duration

without the entire belt length measurement. Skip to Step 17.
CAUTION. This option should only be used when belt length exceeds 1000 feet.
ACQUIRE TEST DUR

Choose belt length
measurement method
FULL PARTIAL
16. Acquire the test duration using the full belt length.
This screen displays if you selected FULL in Step 15.
a. Enter the length of one belt revolution, as recorded in “Determining

Installation Parameters”. Measure the belt length to the nearest 0.1
feet.
The system automatically moves to the next instructional screen.
Enter length of one

belt revolution
Length 1000.0 ft
ENTER ABORT

REC-3924 Rev M
Default 1000.0 ft Default 100.0 m
Min 1.0 ft Min 0.5 m
Max 10000.0 ft Max 3000 m
b. Press START when the mark passes the reference point. The
system automatically moves to the next instructional screen. (Press
ABORT to return the screen to Cal Data Scroll 11.)
NOTE. The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this
function. If not, the prescaler will be improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
c. Press COUNT each time the mark passes the reference point until
minimum load test conditions are met. (Refer to the Belt Scale
Installation manual for minimum test load requirements.) The Zero
Cal light illuminates, indicating zero calibration is in progress.
When the last revolution passes the mark, press COUNT and then
press DONE.
(Press ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen.)
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 sec 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
d. When duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and
time display. Press CONTINUE, and skip to Step 19.
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE

REC-3924 Rev M
NOTE. During the acquire test duration step, the Integrator performed an unassisted
zero calibration and installed the new zero.
17. Acquire the test duration using a partial belt length.
This screen displays if you selected PARTIAL in Step 15.
a. Use the numeric keys to enter the length between two marks on the
belt.
b. Press ENTER. The system automatically moves to the following

screen. (Press ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen.)
Enter length between

two marks on belt.
Length: 200.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

Max 10000.0 ft Max 3000 m
c. Press START when the mark passes the reference point. The
system automatically moves to the next instructional screen.
NOTE. The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this
function. If not, the prescaler is improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
d. Press COUNT each time a mark passes the reference point until
both marks have passed, and then press DONE. The Zero Cal light
illuminates, indicating zero calibration in progress.

REC-3924 Rev M
Press COUNT each
time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
e. When duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and
time display. Press CONTINUE, and skip to Step 19.
TEST DURATION
length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
NOTE. During the acquire test duration step, the Integrator performed an unassisted
zero calibration and installed the new zero.
18. Manually enter the test duration.
This screen displays if you pressed MANUAL in Step 15.
This procedure allows you to enter the parameters that would otherwise be
automatically generated by the acquire test duration modes. This menu is
generally used when the operator cannot see the belt while standing at the
front panel.
a. Start the belt. The system prompts you to run the belt at its
maximum speed.
b. When the belt is at maximum speed, press CONTINUE.
Start belt. Press

CONTINUE when belt
is at maximum speed.
ABORT CONTINUE
c. Use the numeric keys to enter the length of one belt revolution.

REC-3924 Rev M
ENTER length of one
belt revolution.
Length – 000.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

Max 10000.0 ft Max 10000.0 m
d. Use the numeric keys to enter the number of belt revolutions to be

timed. (Press ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen.)
ENTER the number of

belt revolutions to
be timed 000 revs
ENTER ABORT
Default 1
Min 1
Max 100
e. Use the numeric keys to enter the time per revolution. (Press
ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen.)
ENTER the time for

revolutions to pass
reference 000 sec
ENTER ABORT
Default 30 sec
Min 1 sec
Max 16200 sec
f. Press ENTER. The system times the belt travel according to the
parameters you just entered. The Zero Cal light illuminates,
indicating zero calibration is in progress.
Press ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen.)

REC-3924 Rev M
Timing belt travel
000 sec
ABORT
g. When the test duration test is finished, the new values for length of
belt and time display. Press CONTINUE.
TEST DURATION
Length = 000.0 ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
NOTE. During the manual acquire test duration, the Integrator performed an
unassisted zero calibration and installed the new zero.
19. Perform automatic unassisted calibration of the scale.
After the test duration has been determined, and the scale zeroed, the
Integrator performs an unassisted calibration of the scale. The scale is
calibrated using the parameters just entered. When the calibration is
complete, the electronic calibration resistor (R-CAL) is used to check the
integrity of the load cell.
During this process, the following screen displays:
CALIBRATION
IN
PROGRESS
Completing the When the calibration procedure is complete, the alarm light stops flashing and
the ready light illuminates. The following message displays:
Calibration
Procedure
SCALE CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start
or MENU for scrolls
The field data entered during this procedure enabled the Integrator to perform
REC-3924 Rev M
an unassisted zero balance and span calibration. Assuming no mistakes were
made, the scale is calibrated and is ready for use at this time.
NOTE. The span number was calculated from the data that was entered during
this programming procedure. This span number is based on a perfect
mechanical alignment of the scale and its adjacent idlers. Therefore, verify this
by performing a material calibration, or by performing a span calibration
procedure. (See “Performing Calibration Functions” in Chapter 3: “Operation”.)
Correcting a If the load cell is not connected, or if a failure is detected, the following message
displays:
Calibration
Procedure Failure
SCALE NOT CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start
or MENU for scrolls
To correct the calibration procedure failure, follow these steps:
1. Before you attempt another calibration, you must correct the problem that
is causing the calibration to be aborted. The information that you entered
previously is still in memory and should not have to be reentered.
2. After the problem is corrected, press MENU. Main Menu 1 should appear.
If it does not, continue to press MENU until Main Menu 1 appears.
3. Conduct a zero calibration and a span calibration. (See the section

“Performing Calibration Functions” in Chapter 3: “Operation”.) The scale is
now calibrated using R-CAL as the simulated load.
4. When the calibration procedure is complete, the alarm light stops flashing
and the ready light illuminates.
5. Press RUN to start or MENU for scrolls.
SCALE CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start
or MENU for scrolls

REC-3924 Rev M
Chapter 3 Operation
This chapter provides initial operating procedures for the Integrator and Exciter
Digitizer, and includes the following information:
 A description of the front panel LED status indicators, keyboard and display
 An overview of the Integrator menus
 Using the Run menu
 Function key descriptions
 Performing calibrations
 Changing the protection level
 Recording system configuration and calibration settings
NOTE. All menus are listed in Appendix A for your convenience.
Overview Your Thermo Scientific Belt Scale System is capable of accurate weighing, provided it
is installed, calibrated, operated, and maintained in complete accordance with the
instructions contained in this manual, along with your scale frame installation manual.
The Integrator is a microcomputer based instrument that accepts and conditions

speed and weight signals, and provides visual and electrical outputs for total weight
and rate of flow. A stable 10 volt DC excitation voltage capable of exciting up to six
strain gauge load cells is produced by the Integrator. Sense lead terminations are also
provided for six wire load cell cable.
Auto Zero (AZ) Track enables the belt scale system to automatically zero itself during
extended periods when the conveyor belt is running empty. Auto Zero Track is menu
selectable. The letter “Z” appears on the second line of the display, indicating that the
Auto Zero Track option is enabled.

REC-3924 Rev M
Life expectancy of the RAM support battery is approximately ten years, if power is not
applied. Under normal operation where power is on continuously, life expectancy will
be much longer.
Errors may occur during initial calibration and their reason must be corrected during
initial calibration. During normal operation, an error would most likely indicate a failure
in the system or improper operation.
Front Panel The front panel (Figure 3-1) contains the necessary status indicators and keys to
enable the operator to perform calibrations and all required operations, after the
feeder controller has been configured. (See the section “Initial Setup Procedure” in
Chapter 2: “Installation”.)
Figure 3-1. Model 2301 Integrator Front Panel
Led Status The five red status indicators show the status of the Integrator Figure 3-1).
Indicators
Status Indicator Description
ZERO CAL A zero calibration is in process.
SPAN CAL A span calibration is I process.
ALARM An alarm is pending.
BATCH A batch or load out is running.
READY The instrument is powered on, no alarm conditions
exist and no calibrations are running.
Table 3-1. LED Status Indicators

REC-3924 Rev M
Keyboard The following keys are available to the operator (Figure 3-1):
 RUN — Access the Run menu. Returns the Integrator to run mode. (See
“About the Run Menu” for additional information.)
 MENU — Access the Integrator menus. (See the “Menu Displays” section for
 SCROLL (Up and Down Arrows) — Scroll up or down in the selected menu.
 Soft keys — Select the function displayed directly above the key. Also moves
the cursor left and right when editing text or numbers.
 Alpha/Numeric 1 through 0 — Enter numbers and letters. (Similar to

telephone keys.)
 Decimal point — Enters a decimal point.
 CLR — Remove an incorrect entry (before pressing ENTER soft key).
 TOTAL — Displays totals, including:
 Master total
 Reset total
 Operator total
 Operator and reset totals can be reset. (See “Reset Total Screen” for
 PRINT — Starts printout. (Printing requires the COMM option. See “Printer
Screens” for details.)
 START — Starts a load out. (If an operation is interrupted, START restarts the
load out.)
 STOP — Interrupts load out. (If the operation is already interrupted, STOP
aborts the load out.)
NOTE. The START and STOP keys are only active with the Load Out option.
Display The four line display indicates actual running information or displays menu entry
information.

REC-3924 Rev M
Menu Displays The Integrator is a menu driven machine that allows the operator to access all setup,
test and calibration parameters.
 To access Main Menu screens 1 through 6 at any time, press the MENU key
until the desired screen appears.
 Select menu scrolls by pressing the soft key directly below the desired scroll,
and then use the up and down SCROLL keys.
 Optional menu scrolls are only available if the specific option has been
installed.
NOTE. If the Integrator is password protected, the appropriate password must be

entered prior to making changes or performing routine calibration. Menus can be
viewed without entering a password, but no entries are allowed unless the password
is entered.
The following screens are activated by the MENU key.
- MAIN MENU 1 - Perform zero or span calibration, or

Press MENU for more material calculations.
ZERO SPAN MAT’L
CAL CAL CAL
- MAIN MENU 2 - Display scale or calibration data.

Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
DISPLAY DATA DATA
- MAIN MENU 3 - Perform diagnostics and tests.

Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST

REC-3924 Rev M
- MAIN MENU 4 - View or modify I/O and alarm
Press MENU for more definitions.
I/O ALARMS LOAD
DEF. DEFIN. OUT
- MAIN MENU 5 - * Can be AB I/O or Pro DP

Press MENU for more
COMM A COMM B PRINT
*
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
Making Hardware When the Integrator is powered on after initial programming, the Run Menu appears,
unless the hardware configuration has been changed.
Changes
0000000 TONS
Z 00000 Tph
PRINT TOTALS
If the hardware configuration detected at power on differs from the one recorded in
memory, the following screen appears. This only happens if a circuit board has been
added or removed during power off, or if a board has failed.
- SLOT # n CHANGED
Acquire new
configuration?
YES NO

REC-3924 Rev M
The screen disappears after 10 seconds if the question is not answered. The
Integrator assumes the answer is NO. The HW CONFIG. CHANGED alarm is on and
cannot be reset. The above screen appears each time power is cycled.
To respond to the detected change in hardware configuration, follow these steps:
1. If a board has been removed or added, and this is a permanent change in
configuration, answer YES. Otherwise, skip to Step 2.
a. If a board was removed and not replaced, the Integrator cancels the
setup data for the board that was removed from memory. No
additional operator action is required.
If the board is added again, the setup data for the board must be
entered again.
b. If a board was added, the Integrator acquires the new hardware

configuration. The setup data for the new board must be entered.
NOTE. If an I/O board was removed or added, check the setup configuration in the I/O
Definition menu scroll. I/O assignments change when the number of I/O boards
change. (See “I/O Definition Screens” in Appendix A: “Menus”.)
2. If the reason for the message is not known, or if the change in configuration is
temporary and the operator does not want to lose the original setup, answer
NO.
The HW CONFIG CHANGED alarm remains on.
a. If a board was removed, the Integrator resumes operation, retaining
the setup data for the board that was removed. All other boards
continue working normally. No change occurs in the I/O definition,
and no additional operator action is required.
b. If a board was added, the Integrator resumes normal operation

without recognizing the new board. No additional operator action is
required.
About the Run When the Integrator is normally powered on after initial programming, the main Run
menu appears. This menu can also be accessed at any time by pressing the run key
Menu on the front panel.
The Run menu consists of two operations:
 Main Run
 Reset Total
Use the up and down SCROLL keys to scroll the menus.

REC-3924 Rev M
Using the Main Run The first line always displays the master total, which is the number of tons totalized by
the scale since installation. This number cannot be cleared.
00000000 TONS
Z 000000 Tph
The second line always displays the rate.
 If a “Z” appears on the left side, the Auto Zero Tracking optional function is
enabled and the scale is unloaded.
 If the belt has stopped (zero speed) and the belt warm-up feature has been
selected, the “Z” flashes for five seconds and then remains on steady for five
seconds until the delay time expires.
 The “Z” is not flashing during the first half test duration, while the Integrator is
checking that the belt is really unloaded.
 Then, during a full test duration, the “Z” is flashing, indicating that the
Integrator is averaging the signal from the load cell to accurately rezero the
scale. The load must stay below the AZT max deviation setpoint during the
cycle, otherwise auto zero is aborted.
The third line is blank by default, but it can be programmed in the Display Menu to
show one of the following:
 Belt speed
 Belt loading
 Date and time (if optional COMM board is installed)
Using Reset Total The Reset Total menu is similar to the Run menu.
1. Press the down arrow SCROLL key for access.
RESET 00000000 TONS

Z 0000.00 Tph
RESET

REC-3924 Rev M
2. Press RESET. The following screen appears.
Do you wish to clear

RESET total?
YES NO
3. Press YES to clear the total. (Press NO to skip clearing. The total information
is retained.)
About Material During a material calibration procedure, the word MAT’L flashes in the left soft key
position if the status scale reference weight is unknown. When the reference weight is
Calibration
known, press the MAT’L soft key to resume and complete the material calibration
procedure.
About Alarms The message ALARM appears in the right soft key if an alarm is pending. The alarm
LED also flashes.
 Press the ALARM soft key to display the following menu.
ALARM NEW
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
RESET NEXT
Using the Print If the optional COMM board is installed, the PRINT key enables the printer to print
data.
Key
To print a report, follow these steps:
1. Press the PRINT key to display the Printer Scroll screen.
- PRINTER SCROLL - Password: Not Required

COM #1 no data
Start print TOTALS
PRINT RETURN COM

REC-3924 Rev M
 The second line shows the status of the printer
(Table 3-2).
Status Description
NO DATA Indicates that the printer is idle. No data is being
sent to the printer.
IS RUNNING The system is sending data to the printer.
Table 3-2. Printer Status
 The third line indicates what type of data will be printed if the PRINT key is
pressed (Table 3-3). The Up and Down keys select between the following
data types:
Data Type Description

TOTALS Print totals.
BATCH Print load out information. (Only if load out
option is active.)
SETUP Print the setup data for the instrument.
TRAILS Print audit trail data. (Only if audit trail option is
active.)
Table 3-3. Data Types
2. (Optional) Press the COM key to select the printer, in case more than one is
installed.
3. Press the PRINT key to start printing.
Here are some examples of data that can be printed.
Print TOTALS:
TOTALS REPORT
DATE: 11-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

RESET TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
OPERATOR TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
RATE: 0.00 Tph

REC-3924 Rev M
Print BATCH:
BATCH REPORT
DATE: 11-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a
BATCH NR: 0
SET PT: 0.00 Tons
TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
Print ALARM:
11-10-1998 8:14a
Clock Fail
Print SETUP:
INSTRUMENT SETUP
The system prints out all data and setups.
4. If the data type to be printed is TRAILS, the Print Audit Trails screen appears.
5. Enter the number of records that you want to print. The Integrator will output
the value of the last “N” audit trail records, beginning with the last (most
recent) entry.
For example, to print the last 50 audit trail records,

enter 50.
The following is an example of an audit trail report.
TRAIL RECORD NR 1
DATE 11-10-1998 TIME 11:59p
VARIABLE scale cap
NEW 400.0
OLD 500.0
TRAIL RECORD NR 2
DATE 11-10-1998 TIME 11:31p
VARIABLE span
NEW 250000
OLD 300000
TRAIL RECORD NR 3
DATE 11-10-1998 TIME 11:25p
REC-3924 Rev M
VARIABLE div (e)
NEW 0.05
OLD 0.1
Using the Total Press the TOTAL key to access menus that contain detailed information for Master,
Reset and Operator Total tons counters. Use the up and down SCROLL keys to scroll
Key through the screens.
The following rules apply:

 The Master total cannot be reset.
 The Reset total can be reset at will without a password.
 The Operator total can be reset at will, but requires a password.
Reset Total Screen The Reset Total screen allows the operator to clear the Reset Total.
RESET TOTAL
SINCE 00-00-0000
00000000 Tons
RESET
NOTE. The second line (SINCE ...) only appears if the optional COMM board is
installed. It indicates the last date when the Reset total was cleared.
To clear the Reset total, press the RESET key. No password is required for this action.
Master Total Screen The Master Total screen is similar to the Reset Total screen, but the RESET key is not
available. The Master total cannot be cleared.
MASTER TOTAL
SINCE 00-00-0000
00000000 Tons
Load Out Total If the optional Load Out board is installed, a Load Out Total screen can also be
displayed. (See Appendix D: “Miscellaneous Documents”.)
Screen (Optional)

REC-3924 Rev M
Clearing Totals To clear a Reset or Load Out total, follow these steps:
1. Access the appropriate Reset Total or Load Out Total menu screen.
2. Press RESET. The following screen appears:
Do you wish to clear xxxx is the type of total to be

xxxxxx total? cleared
YES NO (RESET or OPERATOR)
3. Press YES to clear the total. (Press NO to skip clearing and leave the total
unchanged.)
Using the Start The START and STOP keys are only enabled if the Load Out option is installed.
and Stop Keys

Performing Main Menu 1 provides access to the following calibration functions:
Calibration  Zero calibration

Functions  Span calibration
 Material calibration
To access a calibration function menu, follow these steps:
1. Press the MENU key until the Menu 1 screen appears.
2. Press the soft key directly below the desired calibration menu.
Auto Zero The belt must be running during Auto Zero. A complete zeroing procedure requires at
least one full revolution of the belt to be averaged.
To perform an Auto Zero, follow these steps:
1. Press the soft key below ZERO CAL on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Zero
Cal screen appears.
- ZERO CAL -
run belt empty, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL

REC-3924 Rev M
2. Press START.
The READY indicator goes out, the ZERO CAL indicator is illuminated, and
the following screen appears.
- AUTO ZEROING -
Time remaining XXXX
Rate: XXX.XX Tph
Tot XXXX.XX Tons
During Auto Zero, resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal. The
screen shows the following information:
 The number of seconds remaining in the process (Time remaining line).

This number is based on the current speed, and corresponds to the
time remaining for completing the test.
 The rate is the current flow rate.
 The last line (Tot) is the accumulated weight during the zero test.
3. When the system reaches zero, the Auto Zero Complete screen appears.
The percentage of error (second line) is related to full scale capacity.
 Press ADV to show accumulated weight in place of the percentage of

error.
 Press YES to change the zero number. Continue with Step 4.
 Press NO to return to Main Menu 1 without changing the zero number.
- AUTO ZERO COMPLETE -

Errors XXX.XX%
Change Zero?
YES NO ADV
NOTE. If Auto Zero track is enabled, ADV displays AZ Dev, the accumulated A/D
counts during previous Auto Zero Track tests. Press ADV again to display the
accumulated Auto Zero track percentage change (total AZ%) since the initial zero test
or a zero reference was established.

REC-3924 Rev M
4. The auto zero is complete, and the Zero # Changed screen appears.
 Press RUN to return to the Run menu. This reactivates the READY
status.
 Press MENU to repeat the Auto Zero calibration.
 Press ADV to display rate, accumulated weight or percentage error
information in place of the old zero number.
- ZERO # CHANGED -
Old zero # XXXXX
New zero # XXXXX
RUN MENU ADV
Auto Zero Calibration If the belt is not running at the moment the test is started, or if it is stopped during the
Error test, a message appears that indicates that the Auto Zero procedure has been
aborted.
- WARNING Belt stopped -

Calibration aborted.
EXIT
Manual Zero The manual zero procedure shows the zero constant and allows direct entry of the
zero number. The manual zero procedures requires the user to enter a password.
To perform a manual zero, follow these steps:
1. Press the soft key below ZERO CAL on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Zero
Cal screen appears.
- ZERO CAL -
Run belt empty, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
2. Press MANUAL. The Manual Zero screen appears.

REC-3924 Rev M
- MANUAL ZERO -
Rate: XXX.XX Tph
Zero # XXXXX
ENTER EXIT ADV
3. Enter the new rate and zero number.
Default 40000
Min 0
Max 120000
4. Press ENTER to confirm the new zero number, or press ADV to scroll
between zero and AZT.
The ADV key is only available if the Auto Zero Tracking option is enabled.
The AZT function accurately tracks the zero of the scale by calculating an
additional zero constant. The portion of zero due to AZT is not incorporated in
the zero constant, but is shown separately.
- MANUAL ZERO -
AZT # ±000000
AZT % ±000000
ENTER EXIT ADV
When AZT displays, the ENTER key incorporates the AZT number into the
zero constant, so the AZT number that is displayed and the percentage
change to zero.
Using the Span Span calibration supports three simulated load calibration options:
Calibrate Screen  R-CAL

 Test weights
 Test chains
Test weights or test chains require additional hardware and handling equipment.
NOTE. The operator can select the method to be used for routine calibration. This
selection is made from the MAIN MENU 2, CAL DATA screen.
You can perform the following types of span calibrations:

REC-3924 Rev M
 Auto Span
 Manual Span
Auto Span To perform an Auto Span, follow these steps:
1. Press the soft key below SPAN CAL on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Auto
Span screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN R Cal -

press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
2. Press START. There is no totalization for three seconds, until the weight
signal has stabilized.
The READY indicator goes out, the SPAN CAL indicator is illuminated, and
the following screen appears.
AUTO SPANNING
Time remaining XXXX
Rate XXX.X Tph
Tot XXXXXX Tons
NOTE. Press the EXIT soft key, or the MENU control key to return to the MAIN MENU
1.
3. Execute the span calibration. See “Executing the Span Calibration” section.
Starting A Chain To start a chain calibration procedure, follow these steps:

Calibration
1. Stop the conveyor belt.
2. Apply chains on the conveyor belt.
3. Press the SPAN CAL soft key on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Auto Span
Chain screen appears.

REC-3924 Rev M
- AUTO SPAN Chain -
Press START to begin
chain calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
4. Press START to disengage the master tons counter. The following Auto Span
Chain screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain - Password: Operator

Apply chain, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
NOTE. Press the EXIT soft key or the MENU control key to return to the MAIN MENU
1 screen.
5. Press START. The following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

Run belt, then
press START.
START EXIT
6. Restart the conveyor belt and insure chain placement is proper.
7. Press START. The READY indicator goes out, and the SPAN CAL indicator
illuminates.
8. Execute the span calibration. See “Executing the Span Calibration” for details.
Starting A Test Weights To start a test weights calibration procedure, follow these steps:
Calibration
1. Stop the conveyor belt.
2. Apply test weights (if necessary).
3. Press the SPAN CAL soft key on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Auto Span
Weights screen appears.

REC-3924 Rev M
- AUTO SPAN Weights -
weight calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
4. Press START to disengage the master tons counter. The following Auto Span
Weights screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Weights - Password: Operator

Apply weights, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
NOTE. Press the EXIT soft key to return to the MAIN MENU 1 screen.
5. Apply weights, and then press START. The following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Weights - Password: Operator

Run belt, then
press START.
START EXIT
6. Restart the conveyor belt if it is not running.
7. Press START. The READY indicator goes out, and the SPAN CAL indicator
illuminates.
8. Execute the span calibration. See “Executing the Span Calibration” for
details.
Executing the Span Whichever method has been used to start automatic span calibration, after START is
Calibration pressed, the following screen appears.
NOTE. Entry point when REPEAT is pressed (see below).
AUTO SPANNING
Time remaining XXXX
Rate XXX.X Tph
Tot XXXXXX Tons

REC-3924 Rev M
No action is required from the operator at this stage. The test will complete
automatically.
During Auto Span, the resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal. The time
remaining (shown in the second line of the screen) is calculated on the current speed,
and it is based on the test duration.
If the belt is stopped during the test, a message appears, indicating that the procedure
is suspended.
Material Factor This part of the procedure is only executed if a material calibration is done before, and
the current simulated load method has no material factor installed.
NOTE. If a calibration with material has not been run before, or a manual span entry is
done, or if this is not the first time the current simulated load method is used, this
section does not apply. Go to the section “Recording the New Span” on in this
chapter.
It is very important to understand that when this procedure is executed, the system
does not alter the span. The span is assumed to be correct because it was obtained
from a test with material. The system acquires the Material Factor for the current
calibration method instead. This means that the Integrator knows, in the future, how to
use this method for correctly changing the system's span.
When the Auto-Span completes, the Auto Span Complete screen appears. The word
COMPLETE flashes.
AUTP SPAN COMPLETE

Error ±00.00%
Unfactored Calcon
EXIT FACTOR REPEAT
To perform the Material Factor, follow these steps:
1. Press FACTOR to perform the Material Factor. The following screen appears:
R-CAL Matl FACTOR Can be R-CAL, WTS or

New factor: XXX.XX% CHAINS
Change factor?
YES NO ADV

REC-3924 Rev M
NOTE. If you press EXIT, the system acknowledges that the Material Factor is not
used. The system does not ask for a material factor any more for this calibration
method until a manual span entry is done. By pressing EXIT, the operator tells the
system that material factors is not desired, but wants to use the test results for
changing the span number. After pressing EXIT, continue with the section “Recording
the New Span” . If REPEAT is pressed, return to the section “Executing the Span
Calibration”.
2. Make the desired factor change.
 Press ADV to advance to Old Factor and again to New Factor.

 Press NO to set the material factor to 1.00, and then go to the
“Recording the New Span” section.
 Press YES to change the factor. The following screen appears.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR Can be R-CAL, WTS or

Old factor: XX.XX% CHAINS
New factor: XX.XX%
RUN MENU REPEAT
3. Press a soft key to take the appropriate action.
 The REPEAT key returns the operator to the section “Executing the
Span Calibration”.
 Press RUN or MENU to end the procedure. After this point is

reached, the system does not proceed to the next section.
Recording the New The system calculates the new span based on the result of the test performed with the
Span simulated method.
When the Auto Span Complete screen appears, press YES to change the span.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE COMPLETE is flashing

Error ±XX.XX %
Change span?
YES NO ADV

REC-3924 Rev M
NOTE. Press ADV to advance to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Material Factor and
then back to Error %. If the Material Factor is INVALID (never acquired before), it is
not displayed.
The following screen appears.
SPAN # CHANGED
Old span # XXXXXX
New span # XXXXXX
RUN REPEAT ADV
Press NO if you do not want to change the span. The following screen appears. The
old and new spans are shown equally, because there was no change to the span.
SPAN UNCHANGED
Old span # 000000
New span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
NOTE. Press ADV to advance from Error % to Accumulated Weight, CalCon, Old
Span and Material Factor (only if not INVALID). REPEAT returns to “Executing the
Span Calibration” and calibration restarts.
Ending an Auto-Span Ending an Auto-Span Procedure with Chains or Test Weights

Procedure with Chains When running Auto-Span with chains or weights, the following screen appears after
or Test Weights pressing RUN.
Remove chains (or weights)

before returning to
normal operation!!
RUN MENU
Press RUN to resume totalization and move to the RUN screen.
Ending an Auto-Span When running Auto-Span with R-Cal, the R-Cal relay is de-energized and the display
Procedure with R-Cal is locked for three seconds after pressing RUN.

REC-3924 Rev M
Manual Span If the span constant is known, the manual span procedure allows the operator to make
a direct change of span.
To perform a manual span, follow these steps:
1. Press the soft key below SPAN CAL on the Main Menu 1 screen. The Auto
Span screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN R-Cal -

press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
2. Press MANUAL. The Manual Span screen appears.
- MANUAL SPAN -
Rate XXX.X Tph
Span # XXXXXXX
ENTER EXIT RUN
NOTE. Press EXIT to return to the Main Menu 1.
3. Enter the new rate and span number.
Default 300000
Min 31250
Max 2812501
Entering the Manual Span sets the material factors to INVALID (if any). The automatic
span tests must to be run again after a manual span entry has been performed, in
order to acquire the material factors.
Performing a Material calibration is a machine directed procedure for calibrating the belt scale using
actual material.
Material
Calibration Pre-weighed or post weighed material, having been weighed to a known accuracy on
a static scale, passes across the belt scale. This procedure automatically adjusts the
Integrator span (and factors all simulated test CalCons, if the operator prefers).

REC-3924 Rev M
To perform a material calibration procedure, follow these steps:
1. To start the test, press the MAT’L CAL soft key and the down arrow. The
following screen appears.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
press START.
START MENU
2. Run the belt for at least one minute, or one belt revolution before proceeding.
3. Press START. There is no more totalization, and the master weigh totalizer is
disengaged.
The following screen appears:
Run quantity of
material over scale.
CONTINUE
4. Press CONTINUE to go to the next screen and follow the test procedure. The
following screen appears:
XXXXX.X Tons
XXXX.X Tph
Press DONE to end
DONE ABORT
5. Wait until all material has passed over the scale, and then press DONE.
(Press ABORT to force the program back to the top of the menu.)
NOTE. During the material calibration procedure, the resolution of total tons counted is
ten time higher than normal.
6. At the end of the test, the system asks the operator whether the (actual)
weight of the material is already known.

REC-3924 Rev M
XXXX.XX Tons
ref. weight known?
YES NO
 Press NO if the reference (actual) weight will not be known for some time
and the conveying systems need to be returned to a normal running state.
MAT’L will be flashing, to remind the operator that the material test is
incomplete.
 Press YES (or press the MAT’L key after pressing NO) to complete the
material test. The following screen appears.
XXXXX.XX Tons
Enter reference
weight XX.X Tons
ENTER ABORT
7. Enter the actual material weight, and then press ENTER to confirm.
The weight must be entered in the same units for which the Integrator is set
up. For example, convert pounds to the nearest hundredth (0.01) of a ton and
enter this number if the Integrator is set up for tenths (0.1) of a ton
increments. Material calibration is running at ten times normal.
If you press ABORT, the information acquired during the test is lost and the
system returns to the Main Menu 1 screen.
8. Update the span constant. After the amount of material has been entered, the
following screen appears.
MAT’L CAL COMPLETE COMPLETE is flashing

Error 000.00%
Change span?
YES NO ADV
 Press ADV to change from Error% to Actual Difference of Total.
 Press NO to move to “Add reference weight to total.”

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press YES to change the span. The scale is calibrated to the actual material
test, and the following screen appears, confirming that the new span constant
was installed.
SPAN # CHANGED
New span # XXXXXX
Old span # XXXXXX
RUN MENU FACTOR
9. Press FACTOR to display the following screen.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
Automatic correction
to Material Factors
R-CAL WTS CHAIN
The screen only shows the calibration methods that have already been used.
It is not possible to calculate a material factor if a simulated test was not run
before the material test.
NOTE. If none of the three calibration methods have been performed, the FACTOR
soft key is not available in the previous menu.
10. Press R-CAL, WTS or CHAIN to display the following screen.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

Old factor: XX.XX%
New factor: XX.XX%
RUN MENU FACTOR
 Press ADV to advance to the Old factor and again to the New factor.
 Press YES if this specific simulated method of calibration has already been
used and the related material factor will be recorded. This allows the system
to execute accurate calibrations in the future with this simulated method.
 Press NO if the acquired material factor is not desired. You are returned to
Step 9.

REC-3924 Rev M
11. After pressing YES, the following screen appears.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
Add reference
weight to totals
YES NO
12. Press YES to add the amount of material used for the test to the Master,
Reset and Operator totals.
If you press NO, the information is lost.
NOTE. Moisture compensation is inhibited during material calibration. This is done to

make the check of the totalized quantity easier. The static scale provides the weight of
the material including moisture. The weight of the water is removed immediately
before adding to total at the end of the procedure, so that the Master, Reset and
Operator totals are still correct.
Changing the The Integrator has three protection levels:

 None
Protection Level  Limited
 Protected
The protection levels and the passwords are defined using the scheme in Table 3-4.
Protection Level Password Status

None Service The system is totally
unprotected. All data can be
read or changed.
Limited Operator Operator functions and data
are unprotected. All setup
and calibration data are
protected, except zero
calibrate.
Protected Not Required The system is totally
protected. Process data can
be read, but no change is
allowed.
Table 3-4. Integrator Protection Levels

REC-3924 Rev M
 A service password is required to access the None protection level.
 An operator or a service password is required to access the Limited protection
level.
- PROTECTION LEVEL -
> NONE <
NONE LTD PROT
To set the protection level, follow these steps:

1. Access the Main Menu 3.
2. Press the PROT soft key to access the Protection Level screen.
3. Select the desired protection level.
 Press the NONE soft key to access the None protection level. If the current
protection level is not already None, the service password is required.
 Press the LTD soft key to access the Limited protection level.
o If the system is in protection level None, the change is immediate.

o If the system is in protection level Protected, the service or operator
password is required.
 Press the PROT soft key to access the protected level. No password is
required.
Temporarily The protection level can be temporarily changed by entering a password “on the fly”
during normal operation. When the protection level is changed using this on line
Changing the
procedure, the system automatically returns to protected status if no keyboard entries
Protection Level are made within 60 seconds.
1. When the operator tries to enter a variable or select a function that is

password protected and the password is installed, the following screen
appears.
- SYSTEM PROTECTED -
PLEASE ENTER
PASSWORD
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
2. Enter either the operator or the service password.
 If access is allowed, the change is complete.
 If you enter the operator password and the variable or function requires the
service password, access is denied and the following screen appears.
PLEASE ENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD
RETURN
3. Enter the service password.
 If access is allowed, the change is complete.
 If you fail to enter the correct password, the following screen appears.
INVALID PASSWORD
ACCESS DENIED
RETURN
4. Press RETURN to return the program to the previous function.
Change Passwords The password can be changed by entering a new one. You can enter up to eight
characters (numeric keys entries). The entered numbers are not echoed on the
screen.
NOTE. It is strongly suggested to write down the password and preserve a copy in a
safe place. If the password is forgotten, see the section “Removing a Forgotten
Password” to remove a forgotten password.
To change the password, follow these steps:
1. Access the Main Menu 3.
2. Press the DIAG soft key and access the Diagnostic Scroll 4 screen.

REC-3924 Rev M
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 4 - Password: Service
ENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
3. Enter a new service password and press ENTER.
Press ENTER without entering a password to remove the current password.
4. Confirm the password.
This prevents losing access control due to a typing mistake while entering
passwords.
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 4 -
REENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
 If the password entered the second time matches the first, the following
message confirms the entry.
NEW PASSWORD
ACQUIRED
RETURN
 If the two passwords do not match, the system does not accept the new
password and the following failure message appears.
INVALID PASSWORD
RETURN
5. Enter a new operator password on Diagnostic Scroll 5.

REC-3924 Rev M
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 5 - Password: Operator
ENTER OPERATOR
PASSWORD ********
MENU ENTER
6. Press ENTER.
7. Reenter the operator password and press ENTER.

REC-3924 Rev M
Permanent Setup Use the form in this section to record your Integrator configuration, based on the setup
screen entries.
Record
MAIN MENU 1
ZERO SCROLL
Zero #
SPAN SCROLL
Span #
MAIN MENU 2
DISPLAY SCROLL
1. Measure Units
2. Totalization Units
3. Length Units
4. Rate Units
5. Loadcell Units
6. Language
7. Time
8. Date
9. Run Display, Line 3
10. Damping Display Rate
11. Damping Display Load
12. Damping Display Speed
SCALE DATA SCROLL
1. Max. Scale Capacity
2. Scale Divisions

REC-3924 Rev M
3. Belt Scale Code #
3A. Pivot to Load Cell
3B. Number of Weigh Idlers
3C. Pivot to 1st Idler
3D. Pivot to 2nd Idler
3E. Pivot to 3rd Idler
3F. Pivot to 4th Idler
3G. Pivot to 5th Idler
3H. Pivot to 6th Idler
3I. Pivot to Test Weight Height
3L. Pivot to Test Weight Length
3M. Pivot to Carriage Height
3N. Roll to Carriage Height
3O. Number of Load Cells
4. Idler Spacing
5. Conveyor’s Angle Degrees
6. Load Cell Capacity
7. Load Cell Sensitivity
9A. Load Cell #1 Resistance
9B. Load Cell #2 Resistance
9C. Load Cell #3 Resistance
9D. Load Cell #4 Resistance
9E. Load Cell #5 Resistance

REC-3924 Rev M
9F. Load Cell #6 Resistance
10. Speed Input
11. Zero Dead Band Range
12. Weights & Measures Mode
CALIBRATION DATA SCROLL
1. Calibration Mode
2. R-Cal: Resistance (Ohms)
3. R-Cal: Cal-Constant
4. Chain: Weight (Lbs/Ft)
5. Chain: Cal-Constant
6. Total Test Weights (Lbs)
7. Weight: Cal-Constant
8. Calibration Interval Days
9. Calibration Date
10. R-Cal: Mat’l Factor
Chain: Mat’l Factor
Weight: Mat’l Factor
11. Number of Test Durations
12. Test Duration Full Partial Manual
Belt Length
Number of Revolutions
Test Time
13. Auto Zero Tracking Yes No

REC-3924 Rev M
13A. Auto Zero Tracking Range
13B. Auto Zero Tracking Step
13C. Auto Zero Tracking Max. Dev.
13D. Auto Zero Tracking Warm

Time
14. Max. Speed Capacity
15. Auto Zero Max. Dev.
16. Zero Reference
MAIN MENU 3
PROTECTION SCROLL
1. Protection Level None Ltd Prot
DIAGNOSTICS SCROLL
1. A/D Gross
A/D Net
2. Weight on Load Cell
2A. Load Cell Output Zero
2B. Load Cell Output Span
3. Prescale
Pulses/Minute
3A. Test Duration Total Pulses
3B. Test Duration Total Length
4. Service Password
5. Operator Password

REC-3924 Rev M
6A. Integrator Software Version
6B. Digitizer Software Version
9. Board Type Slot #1
15. Digitizer Comm. Setup Baud
Bits
Parity
MAIN MENU 4
I/O DEFINE SCROLL
1. Current Output #1 Define
Current Output #2 Define
1A. Current Output #1 Range mA
Current Output #2 Range mA
1B. Current Output #1 Delay sec
Current Output #2 Delay sec
1C. Current Output #1 Damping sec
Current Output #2 Damping sec
2. Analog Input #1 Definition
2A. Moisture Input Calibrate %

REC-3924 Rev M
Volts
2B. Moisture Input Calibrate %
Volts
3. Analog Input #2 Definition
3A. Conveyor Low Position Degrees
3B. Conveyor High Position Degrees
4. Digital Input Define Physical Input Status
External Alarm #1
External Alarm #2
External Alarm #3
Print
Belt Running
Reset Total
Reset Alarm
Auto Zero
Clip Detector
5. Digital Output Define Physical Output Status
Alarms
Shutdown
Ready
High Load
Low Load

REC-3924 Rev M
High Rate
Low Rate
High Speed
Low Speed
Totalizer
Print Ready
Dev. Alarms
Out of Range
Load WTS
6. Remote Counter Division
7. Remote Counter Pulse Width
8. Clip Detector Mode
8A. Clip Detector Length
ALARMS SCROLL
1. Rate Alarm Yes No
1A. Low Rate Set % Sec
1B. High Rate Set % Sec
2. Load Alarm Yes No
2A. Low Load Set % Sec
2B. High Load Set % Sec
3. Speed Alarm Yes No
3A. Low Speed Set % Sec
3B. High Speed Set % Sec

REC-3924 Rev M
4. Load Speed Set % Sec
4A. Belt Slip Set % Sec
5. Alarm Set As Alarm Shutdown None
#1 Clock Fail
#2 Load Cell Fail
#3 RAM Fail
#4 ROM Fail
#5 Speed Sensor Error
#6 High Load
#7 Low Load
#8 High Rate
#9 Low Rate
#10 High Speed
#11 Low Speed
#12 Warm Start
#13 Cold Start
#14 P.D. Calibrate
#15 Calibrate Time
#16 Ext. Alarm #1
#17 Ext. Alarm #2
#18 Ext. Alarm #3
#19 Overflow Totalizer
#20 AZT Limit

REC-3924 Rev M
#21 Batch Deviation
#22 BCD Error
#23 28 HW Conf. Change
#29 Math Error
#30 Printer Error
#31 COMM Error
#32 Allen-Bradley R I/O Error
#33 PROFIBUS-DP Error
#34 Auto Zero Limit
#35 AZT Step Limit
#40 Digitizer COMM Error
#41 Digitizer Fault
#42 Digitizer Power Fail
LOAD OUT SCROLL
1. Preset Weight
2. Pre Act Correction
2A. Pre Act Value
2B. Pre Act Range
2C. Pre Act Length
3. Start Delay
4. Coasting Time
5. Batch Deviation
6. Print Batch

REC-3924 Rev M
7. Position Batch Number X= Y=
8. Position Batch Quant. X= Y=
9. Position Batch Total X= Y=
MAIN MENU 5
COMM A SCROLL
1. Baud Rate Port #1
2. Parity Port #1
3. Stop Bits Port #1
4. Word Length Port #1
5. Protocol Port #1
5A. Clear to Send #1
6. Address Port #1
7. Access Prot Port #1
9. Parity Port #2
12. Protocol Port #2
13. Address Port #2
PRINT SCROLL
1. Handshaking

REC-3924 Rev M
2. End of Line
3. Delay End of Line
4. Form Feed
5. Print Interval
6. Print Time #1
7. Print Alarms
8. Totals Report Format
9A. Number of Strings
9B. Contents String #1
9C. Position String #1
9D. Contents String #2
9E. Position String #2
9F. Contents String #3
9G. Position String #3
9H. Position Oper. Total
9I. Position Reset Total
9J. Position Master Total
9K. Position Date
9L. Position Time
9M. Position Rate
9N. Position Avg. Rate
9P. Position Running

REC-3924 Rev M
MAIN MENU 6
AUDIT TRAIL SCROLL
1. Audit Trails Yes No
LINEARIZATION SCROLL
1. Linearization Yes No
Factor Load
LIN #1
LIN #2
LIN #3
LIN #4
LIN #5

REC-3924 Rev M
Permanent Field Use the forms in this section to record your Integrator field configuration, including
calibration settings.
Record
Conveyor Number:
Date:
1. Scale Capacity: (Tons Per Hour)
2. Belt Scale Code Number:
3. Belt Scale Weighbridge Dimensions:

a. Pivot to Load Cell Distance (Inches)
b. Number of Weigh Idlers:
c. Pivot to Weigh Idler Distance (Inches)
1st 4th
nd
2 5th
3rd 6th
d. Pivot to Test Weight Height (Inches)

e. Pivot to Test Weight Length (Inches)
f. Pivot to Carriage Height (Inches)
g. Carry Roll to Carriage Height (Inches)
4. Number of Load Cells:
5. Idler Spacing (Inches)
6. Conveyor’s Angle of Incline: (Degrees)
7. Load Cell Capacity: (Pounds)
8. Conveyor Belt Length: (Feet)
Table 3-6. Permanent Field Record

REC-3924 Rev M
REC-3924 Rev M
CALIBRATION REPORT – PERMANENT RECORD Conveyor:
Date
By
Scale Capacity
Belt Length
Test Length
Test Time
Calib. Constant
R-Cal
Static
Chain
Calibration Mode
Zero -- As Found
-- As Left
Span -- As Found
-- As Left
Table 3-7. Calibration Report – Permanent Record

REC-3924 Rev M
Chapter 4 Maintenance &
Troubleshooting
Your Integrator Model 2301 system is capable of efficient and reliable operation when
it is properly set up and maintained.
This chapter provides information to assist you in maintaining and servicing the
system. It includes sections on:
 Cleaning
 Troubleshooting
NOTE. Follow all warnings, cautions, precautions, and advice in this section to keep
your system in top operating condition.
The set up and maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your
service needs. However, if you run into problems requiring technical assistance,
please call your service representative. Field service representatives are fully trained
and available from regional offices.
Cleaning The Integrator is a solid-state device, and as such, should require very little
maintenance. The front panel can be wiped clean with a damp cloth, and if necessary,
a mild detergent. Never use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display window.
As a preventative measure, check that all wires, plugs, and integrated circuits are tight
in their connectors. Keep the enclosure door tightly closed to prevent dirt infiltration.
Troubleshooting More often than not, a quick visual inspection leads to the source of trouble. If a
problem does develop, check the following before proceeding to more specific
troubleshooting procedures.
REC-3924 Rev M
Initial Checklist 1. Check power.
a. Check that the two line voltage selector switches are set to the
correct line voltage. (See “Configuration Jumpers and Switches” in
Chapter 2: “Installation”).
b. Check the fuses.
c. Verify that the power switch is ON, and that power is supplied to the
unit.
2. Check connections.
a. Check that all terminations are secure.
b. Check that the display module and keyboard connectors are firmly
seated in their connectors.
c. Check that the remote counter and the optional input/output modules
are secure in their sockets.
d. Check that all jumpers are in their correct positions.
Using the Integrated This unit has built-in troubleshooting capabilities. A number of possible problems are
automatically detected and screen messages are displayed. (See the section
Troubleshooting
“Diagnostics Screens” in Appendix A: “Menus”.)
Features
This section describes the integrated troubleshooting features, and includes the
 Alarm message and list of alarm codes

 Performing an Integrator cold start
 Performing an internal test procedure
 Working with load cell excitation and signal voltage
 Resetting the Master Total
 Removing a forgotten password
 Lithium battery replacement
Alarm Message The ALARM message is assigned to the right hand soft key when an alarm is
pending. The ALARM message and its LED flash at the same time.
The following screen appears when the right hand soft key is pressed.

REC-3924 Rev M
ALARM NEW
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
RESET NEXT
 The keyword “NEW” indicates an alarm that has not been

acknowledged.
 When the operator presses the RESET key to clear the alarm,
the alarm disappears if the reason that caused the alarm to
occur does not exist anymore. If the alarm is still pending, the
screen displays the keyword “ACK” instead of NEW.
 The string “XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX” represents the

alarm conditions. (See the section “Alarm List”.)
 If the optional COMM board is installed, the third line shows

the date and time.
 Use the NEXT key to scroll between the pending alarms.

REC-3924 Rev M
Table 4-1. Integrator Alarm List
Number Alarm Condition Description Troubleshooting Actions

The system has detected a failure  Check the COMM board to
on the clock calendar circuit. This see if it is properly
1 Clock Fails alarm only occurs if the optional inserted.
COMM board is installed.
 Replace the COMM board.
The system has detected an error  Check the load cell
2 Load Cell Fails on the load cell signal. connections.
 Check the load cells.
The system has detected an error
on the RAM checksum during the
3 RAM Fail internal periodical test. The RAM Replace the CPU board.
(random access memory) is used
to store variables and set up data.
The system has detected an error
on the ROM checksum during the
4 ROM Fail internal periodical test. The ROM Replace the CPU board.
(read-only memory) is used to
store the program.
This message can only appear if
the DUAL speed mode is
selected. The system has
5 Speed Sensor detected a difference between the Check the speed sensors.
speeds of the two sensors,
greater than the difference
specified in the ALARM menu.
The belt load has been detected
to be higher than the maximum
6 High Load
belt loading entered in the ALARM
SET UP MENU.
The belt load has been detected
to be lower than the minimum belt
7 Low Load
loading entered in the ALARM
SET UP MENU.
The rate has been detected to be
higher than the maximum rate
8 High Rate
entered in the ALARM SET UP
MENU.
The rate has been detected to be
lower than the minimum rate
9 Low Rate
MENU.

REC-3924 Rev M
The speed has been detected to
be higher than the maximum
10 High Speed
speed entered in the ALARM SET
UP MENU.
The speed has been detected to
be lower than the minimum speed
11 Low Speed
MENU.
The system has detected a power
loss condition, or power was
12 Warm Start
removed for an undefined period
of time.
The system has detected the loss
of the set up data after power was
removed. The instrument needs to
be set up and calibrated.
The message COLD START never
appears on the screen, because a Replace either the mother
13 Cold Start cold start condition forces the board or the battery.
execution of a start up procedure,
and the alarm is cleared after the
set up is complete. However, the
alarm LED and the digital output
will show an alarm during initial
calibration.
If the system is powered off while
Power Down During a calibration sequence is in
14 Check calibration.
Calibrate progress, the scale may not be
properly calibrated.
If a calibration check time period
is entered and the time expires,
this alarm occurs. The purpose is
15 Calib Time to remind the operator that the Check calibration.
calibration has not been checked
for a considerably long period of
time.
Digital inputs can be programmed
to detect external alarm
conditions, such as emergency
Check external alarm number
16 Ext Alarm 1 switches, maximum level
1.
switches, or other situations. This
alarm is associated with the first
external alarm (number 1).

REC-3924 Rev M
This alarm is associated with the Check external alarm
17 Ext Alarm 2
second external alarm (number 2). number 2.
This alarm is associated with the third Check external alarm
18 Ext Alarm 3
external alarm (number 3). number 3.
This message indicates that the
output pulse generator for the remote
mechanical totalizer has reached an  Check the rate.
overflow condition. The rate may be
19 Overflow Tot  Check and eventually
too high or the pulse divider has been
increate the pulse
set too small.
divider.
This message also appears if the
Master Total rolls over.
The Auto Zero Tracking function has
reached the maximum limit of tare  Check and clean the
20 AZT Limit that is allowed to be automatically scale.
cleared. The scale may be dirty or  Perform an auto zero.
misaligned.
This alarm is only visible if the
optional Load Out board is installed.  Check the parameters of
21 Batch Deviation It is generated when a batch is run the load out.
and the error detected at the end of  Adjust the preact value.
the batch is higher than specified.
This message is only displayed if the
optional BCD output board is
Check the size of the
installed. If the variable to be
22 BCD Error variables and the BCD data
converted in the BCD format has
setup.
more than four digits, the alarm is
generated.
This message appears when a new
board is installed, or an old board is
23 thru 28 HW Conf. Changed removed. (See the section
“Diagnostics Screens” in Appendix A:
“Menus”.) (normal power on)
A divide by zero or overflow error is
encountered during internal
29 Math Error calculations. This message indicates Check setup data.
some abnormal dimensional
parameter is entered in setup.
This message is displayed if the  Verify that the printer is
system has data to print and the turned on.
30 Printer Error
printer is disconnected or the paper
feed is empty.  Add paper to the printer.

REC-3924 Rev M
This message is only displayed if the  Check the COMM line
optional COMM board is installed. It connections.
31 Communication Error indicates that a time out or handshake
error is detected during a data transfer  Check the COMM line
on the COMM line. setup data.
This message is displayed if

communication is interrupted. The
Allen-Bradley Remote
32 green LED on the A-B RI/O board will
I/O COMM Error
be flashing. The alarm does not come
on if communication has never started.
This message is only displayed if the
optional PROFIBUS board is installed.
The following two conditions activate
the alarm:
If the Siemens SPC3 controller
installed on the PROFIBUS interface
PROFIBUS-DP COMM
33 board does not recognize any
Error
successful data transfer within the
watch dog timer interval.
If the received data contains errors
(value overlaps limits, register number
does not exist, group number does not
exist).
This message appears when the
change made in zero after an Auto
Zero test is greater the Auto Zero Max
Deviation setting. This alarm will be
34 AUTO ZERO Limit logged as an audit trail record. The
alarm can be acknowledged, but will
not clear until a new auto zero returns
the zero value back to within limit, or a
new zero reference is entered.
If Auto Zero Track needs to correct
more than the assigned step value,
only the step value is zeroed and this
35 AZT Step Limit
alarm is activated. The alarm will self
clear when an AUTO ZERO TRACK
completes within the step limit.
36 thru 39 Not assigned.
This message appears if three
40 Digit. COMM Error consecutive communications between
the Integrator and the Digitizer fail.

REC-3924 Rev M
This message appears when a fail
condition is activated by the Digitizer.
“XXXX” is one of the following fail codes:
0001 — Power failure has occurred.
0002 — NVRAM data corrupted.
0004 — Internal hardware fault.
0008 — A/D overrange.
0010 — A/D underrange.
Digit. Fault: 0020 — Speed #1 overrange.
41
XXXX 0040 — Speed #2 overrange.
0080 — Electronics warm-up in
progress.
0100-0800 — Unused.
1000 — CPU watchdog timeout
occurred.
2000 — A/D halted.
4000 — Loss of power integrity.
8000 — Software fault detected.,
A power loss condition has been
42 Digit. Power Fail
detected in the Digitizer

REC-3924 Rev M
Integrator Cold Start In the event that the software becomes corrupted, it may be necessary to cold start
the Integrator. When you perform a cold start, you have the option of installing the
factory default constants or simply returning the Integrator to its previous running
state.
To perform a cold start, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold in at the same time the LEFT HAND ARROW key
and the CLEAR key until the following screen appears:
Install Factory
Defaults?
NO YES
2. Install factory defaults, or restore the Integrator to its previously running

state.
 Press NO to returns the Integrator to RUN mode.

 Press YES to reset the Integrator to factory default constants. The following
screen appears.
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language

key to continue to
ESP USA
When the above screen appears, all field entry data has been replaced by the factory
default constants. See “Initial Setup Procedure” in Chapter 2: “Installation”.
NOTE. If the software corruption was catastrophic, and the memory would not erase
in the above step, do the following:
Press and hold in the LEFT HARD ARROW key and the CLEAR key. While holding in
both keys, cycle line power. In the event the Memory Erased screen does not
appear, consult the factory.
Internal Test To perform an internal test procedure, follow these steps:

Procedure
REC-3924 Rev M
1. Press START on the screen (located in Main Menu 3) to enact self-test of
the internal microprocessor.
- TEST SCROLL 2 -
Password: Service
Internal test of
microprocessor
START
2. After pressing START, the following screens appear in sequence.
- TEST SCROLL 2A -
Testing ROM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2B -
Testing RAM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2C -
Only if Audit Trail is
Testing E2PROM installed.
Test PASSED
 The message “Test PASSED” appears if the test runs correctly.
 If a problem is detected, then the message “Test FAILED” appears, and the
soft key CONTINUE is shown. Press the CONTINUE key to continue with the
next test.
If the internal test has failed, call Thermo Fisher Scientific’s Customer
Service Department.

REC-3924 Rev M
Load Cell Excitation The four load cells are connected in parallel at the digitizer. Measuring any one signal
output when all cells are connected is the summed parallel output of all four cells.
and Signal Voltage
Disconnect all plus (red) and minus (white) signal wires before measuring the signal
output of an individual load cell.
All load cell signal measurements are made at the digitizer. To measure load cell
excitation and signal voltage, follow these steps:
1. Measure excitation voltage across TB4 terminal 1 positive and 2 negative.

This should be 10 VDC +/- 5%.
 If this is correct, skip to Step 5.

 If this is not correct, continue with Step 2.
2. If the excitation voltage is incorrect, disconnect all plus (green) and minus
(black) excitation wires and remeasure across TB4 terminal 1 positive and 2
negative.
 A correct reading indicates a load cell problem.

 An incorrect reading indicates a power supply problems.
3. Measure the resistance across the excitation leads of each load cell. The
reading should be between 380-450 ohms.
4. Measure the resistance across the signal leads of each load cell. The
reading should be between 350 + or - 3 ohms.
5. Measure DC millivolt signal across the signal leads of all four load cells, plus
(red) and minus (white). The reading should be within 0 - 30 millivolts DC (3
mV/V load cell).
The millivolt output is in direct relation to weight applied. As weight is increased,

output should increase. The individual readings of all load cells should be within + or
- 1 mV of each other.
Resetting Master To reset the Master Total, or to reset the remote counter overflow, follow one of
these procedures:
Total Procedure
 “Resetting if No Password”
 “Resetting with an Active Password”
Resetting if No Password If no password is installed, follow these steps:
1. Select Main Menu 3.
2. Press the DIAG soft key, and scroll down to the Service Password screen.

REC-3924 Rev M
3. Type in a password (for example: 123) and press ENTER.
4. Re-enter the password and press ENTER.
6. Press the PROT scroll and the press the PROT soft key.
7. Press the NONE soft key.
8. Type in password 7832500 and press ENTER. The protection level should
be RAMSEY.
9. Press the TOTAL key on the touch panel. If needed, scroll up or down to
reach the Master Total screen.
10. Press the RESET soft key and answer YES to Reset Master Total.
11. Select Main Menu 3, press the DIAG soft key, and scroll down to Service
Password.
12. Press ENTER twice, erasing the password entered in

Step 3.
13. Press the RUN key to return to normal operation.
Resetting with an Active If a password is already active, follow these steps:

Password
2. Press the PROT scroll and then press the PROT soft key.
be RAMSEY.
5. Press the TOTAL key on the touch panel. If needed, scroll up or down to
reach the MASTER TOTAL screen.
6. Press the RESET soft key and answer YES to Reset Master Total.
8. Press the PROT scroll and choose the password level desired.
REC-3924 Rev M
Removing a To remove a forgotten password, follow these steps.
Forgotten Password
2. Press the Protect scroll and press the PROT soft key.
be RAMSEY.
5. Press NONE.
7. Press the DIAG soft key and scroll down to Service Password.
8. Press ENTER twice. The display should respond with New Password
Acquired.
9. Scroll down to Operator Password, and press ENTER twice. The display
should respond with New Password Acquired.
10. Select Main Menu 3. The PROT soft key should not appear, indicating all
passwords have been erased.
If PROT should appear, repeat Steps 1 through 9.
11. See the section “Changing the Protection Level” in Chapter 3: “Operation” for
more information about entering new passwords.

REC-3924 Rev M
Lithium Battery The Integrator volatile memory backup battery can be replaced without
any special tools.
Replacement
WARNING. DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
INCORRECTLY REPLACED.
Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by Thermo

Fisher Scientific. Dispose of the used battery according to
manufactures instruction on battery or return to Thermo Fisher
Scientific. (See the section “Disposal of Hazardous Waste” in Chapter
5: “Service, Repair and Replacement Parts”.)
To replace the battery, follow these steps:
1. Record all configuration, setup and calibration data before

removing battery. All information is lost when the battery is
removed.
2. Turn the Integrator power off at the mains.
3. Remove the battery from its compression socket. (See Figure

2-9 for battery location.)
4. Observe the polarity markings on the battery socket base

before inserting the new battery.
 Battery Type = Lithium, 3 V, 1.2 AH, 2/3 A.

 Thermo Scientific Part Number 037188.
5. Insert battery.
6. Restore power to the instrument.
7. Cold start the Integrator. See the section “Integrator Cold

Start”.
8. Re-enter all data recorded in Step 1.

REC-3924 Rev M
Chapter 5 Service,
Repair and
Replacement Parts
This chapter provides information about service, repair, and replacement parts for your
Thermo Scientific product. It includes the telephone numbers for various departments
at Thermo Fisher Scientific, the procedure for ordering replacement parts, a Return
Material Authorization Form (REC-F-175) a Foreign Customer Repair Authorization
Form, and any parts lists are also included in this chapter.
The maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your service needs. If
you should encounter a problem that requires technical assistance, you may call
Thermo Fisher Scientific Product Service at (800) 445-3503.
Thermo Fisher Scientific also provides on-site service technicians to assist customers
with installation, setup, initial calibration, customer training, maintenance, and repair.
Contact the Thermo Fisher Scientific Field Service department at the number below
for rates and scheduling.
Thermo Fisher Scientific has repair centers located at the plant in Minneapolis,
Minnesota. Products that need system checkout or repair can be returned to the plant
with the Return Material Authorization (RMA) form or the Foreign Customer Repair
Authorization form. Contact our Repair and Return department (800) 445-3503 to
obtain the RMA form and a number to use on it.
NOTE. Have your machine model number and serial number available when you call.
Main Switchboard: (800) 445-3503

FAX: (763) 783-2525
Service: (800) 445-3503

REC-3924 Rev M
Return Material Authorization & Repair: (800) 445-3503
24 x 7 phone support
Or any local Thermo Scientific office.
Parts Ordering For the fastest service when ordering parts, telephone or FAX the Thermo Scientific
Parts Department at the numbers given below. Your regional field service
Information representative can also assist you with parts orders.
The recommended procedure for ordering parts is:
1. Determine the broken or faulty part.
2. Locate the part in the Parts List.
3. Find the part number(s) for the item(s) you need.
4. Before you contact Thermo Scientific for your parts, make sure you have the
• Machine model and serial number

• Purchase Order number
• Date Required
• Preferred shipping method
• Part number(s), description, and quantity needed.
Telephone or FAX:
Thermo Scientific
501 90th Ave. NW
FAX: (763) 783-2525
Phone: (800) 445-3503
Return Material Authorization and Repair: (800) 445-3503
E-mail:
Service.W&I.mpls@thermofisher.com
Parts.W&I.mpls@thermofisher.com

REC-3924 Rev M
Phone/Fax Australia
+61 (0) 8 8208-8200 South Africa
Contacts for +61 (0) 8 8234-3772 fax +27 (0) 11-776-0000
Thermo Fisher service.auadl@thermofisher.com +27 (0) 11-822-3982 fax
sales@thermo.co.za
Scientific Offices Brazil
+55-11-2367-2192 Spain
+55-11-2367-2192 fax +34 91-484-5965
+34 91-484-3597 fax
Canada commercial.pid.esmad@thermofisher.com
(See United States)
United States & Canada
Chile +1 (800) 445-3503
+56 (2) 2378 5080 +1 (763) 783-2525 fax
+56 (2) 2370 1082 fax service.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
ventas.Bulk.LA@thermofisher.com parts.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
sales.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
China - Beijing
+86 10-8419-3588
+86 10-8419-3580 fax
Germany
+49 (0) 208-824930
+49 (0) 208-852310 fax
service.oberhausen@thermofisher.com
sales.oberhausen@thermofisher.com
India - Mumbai
+91-22-4157-8800
+91-22-4157-8801 fax
sales.process.in@thermofisher.com
Italy
+39 02-950590.1 main
+39 02-950590.55 sales
+39 02-953200.15 fax
sales.mi.ramsey.it@thermofisher.com
Mexico
+52 55 1253-9411
+52 55 5300-0876 fax
email.mxnau.sales@thermofisher.com

REC-3924 Rev M
Disposal of Disposal of lithium batteries and soldered printed circuit boards must be in
accordance with your local Hazardous Waste Policy.
Hazardous Waste
As an alternative product supplied by Thermo Scientific may be returned freight pre-
paid, for disposal. Contact the Repair Department for a Return Material Authorization
Number before shipping any product for disposal.
Parts List This section includes a parts list for the Integrator (Table 5-1) and for the Digitizer
(Table 5-2).
Table 5-1. MicroTech 2000 Model 2301 Integrator Parts List
Equipment Part Number

Chassis Assembly, Panel Mount 049600
Chassis Assembly, Field Mount 050103
PCBA, Motherboard 051327
PCBA, Analog Output (1 out) 071637
PCBA, Analog Output (2 in / 2 out) 071636
PCBA, DIO (4 in / 16 out) 046841
PCBA, DIO (16 in / 4 out) 046844
PCBA, Comm “A” Select one only 046853
RS232C
RS-485, std. (point to point)
RS-485, std. Setup for Digitizer Comm Link
RS-485, multi-drop
20 mA (digital) current loop

REC-3924 Rev M
PCBA, LED Assembly 046847
PCBA, Display Assembly 046860
PCBA, Touch Panel Model 2301 048672
PCBA, Field Terminal Entry 049606
PCBA, Load Out DIO (4 in / 16 out) 049475
PCBA, Load Out DIO (16 in / 4 out) 049476
PCBA, PROFIBUS-DP 056713
Fuse, Slo-Blo, .5 Amp (F1 220V)(Type T) 001366
Fuse, Slo-Blo, 1.0 Amp (F1 110V)(Type T) 002443
Fuse, Fast-Blo, 4.0 Amp (FT Board)(Type T) 037287
Battery, Lithium, 3.0 V, 1.2 AH, 2/3 A. 037188
PROM, U1, MT-2000, Audit Trail 050500
Transformer, Power 046863
Module, Power Input 180-240 VAC 047646
Module, Power Input 10-32 VDC 048162
Module, Power Output 24-240 VAC 046814
Module, Power Output 5-60 VDC 046815

REC-3924 Rev M
Table 5-2. MicroTech 2000 Model 2301-D Digitizer Parts List

Chassis Assembly 050598
PCBA, Motherboard, 2301-D 048440
Fuse, Slo-Blo, .5 Amp (F1 230 V)(Type T) 001366
Fuse, Slo-Blo, 1.0 Amp (F1 110V)(Type T) 002443
Module, Power Input 10-32 VDC 044551
Module, Power Output 24-240 VAC 037289
Module, Power Output 5-60 VDC 039669
Module, Power Output (DRY-read Relay) 044552

REC-3924 Rev M
Appendix A Menus
This appendix contains listings of all of the Integrator menus. This appendix is for
reference, and includes the following information:
About Main Menu Screens
Main Menu 1, and the calibration menus
Main Menu 2, and the setup and configuration menus
Main Menu 3, and the security, diagnostic and test menus
Main Menu 4, and the I/O definition and alarms menus
Main Menu 5, and the serial options menus
Main Menu 6, and the audit trail and linearization menus
All About the The Integrator is a menu driven machine that allows the operator to access all setup,
test and calibration parameters. Main Menu screens 1 through 6 can be accessed at
Main Menu anytime by pressing the MENU key until the desired menu screen appears. Menu
Screens scrolls can be selected by pressing the soft key directly below the desired scroll, and
then using the Up/Down scroll key.
If the Integrator is password protected, the appropriate password must be entered

prior to making changes or performing routine calibration. Menus can be viewed
without entering a password, but no entries are allowed unless the password is
entered.
Optional scrolls are only available if the available option has been installed.
The following screens are activated by the MENU key.
Thermo Fisher Scientific A-1

REC-3924 Rev M
- MAIN MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MAT’L
CAL CAL CAL
- MAIN MENU 2 -
Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
DISPLAY DATA DATA
- MAIN MENU 3 -
Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST
- MAIN MENU 4 -
Press MENU for more
I/0 ALARMS LOAD
DEF DEFIN. OUT
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more * Can be AB I/O or Pro DP
COMM A COMM B PRINT
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
A-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3924 Rev M
Main Menu 1 – Main Menu 1 contains the calibration menu. Menu 1 is selected by pressing the MENU
key until Main Menu 1 appears. The calibration scrolls are selected by pressing the
Calibration Menu soft keys directly below the desired scroll.
- MAIN MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MAT’L
CAL CAL CAL
Zero Calibrate Press the soft key below ZERO CAL on Main Menu 1 to access the Auto Zero
process. The zeroing process is implemented as a machine directed procedure. (See
Screens
“Auto Zero”).
Zero Cal Screen The Zero Cal screen starts the zeroing process.
- ZERO CAL -
press START
START EXIT MANUAL
 Press START to begin the automatic zeroing process.
 Press the EXIT soft key to return to Main Menu 1.
 Press MANUAL to run the manual zeroing process. (See “Manual Zero”.)
 Press RUN to return to the Run Menu.
Auto Zeroing Screen The Auto Zeroing screen automatically appears after you press START on the Zero
Cal screen.
AUTO ZEROING
Time remaining XXXX
Rate: XXX.X Tph
Tot XXXXXX Tons

REC-3924 Rev M
Warning Belt Stopped If the belt is not running when the Auto Zero procedure starts, or if it is stopped during
Screen the test, a message appears indicating that the procedure has been aborted.
WARNING Belt stopped

Calibration aborted
EXIT
Press EXIT to return to Main Menu 1.
Auto Zero Complete When zero is reached, the system automatically displays the Auto Zero Complete
Screen screen.
AUTO ZERO COMPLETE

Error ±XXX.XX % Complete is flashing
Change zero?
YES NO ADV
 The percentage of error (Error %) relates to full scale capacity.
 Press ADV to change the display from Error % to Accumulated Weight.
 If Auto Zero Track is enabled, press ADV to displays AZ Dev (the

accumulated A/D counts during previous Auto Zero Track tests).
 Press ADV again to display the accumulated Auto Zero Track percentage
change (total AZ%) since the initial zero test, or since a zero reference was
established.
 Press NO to return to Main Menu 1 without changing the zero number.
 Press YES to change the zero number.
Zero Changed Screen This screen displays when zero is changed.
ZERO @ CHANGED
New zero # XXXXX
Old zero # XXXXX
RUN MENU ADV

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press ADV to change the display from Old zero # to Rate, to Accumulated
Weight and to Error %.
 Press MENU to repeat the Auto Zero calibration.
 Press RUN to return to the Run Menu.
Manual Zero Screen The Manual Zero screen shows the zero constant and allows direct entry of known
values.
- MANUAL ZERO -
Rate XXX.X Tph Password: Operator
Zero # XXXXX
ENTER EXIT ADV
 Press ENTER to confirm the new number.
 Press ADV to scroll between Zero and AZT.
 The ADV key is only available if the Auto Zero Tracking option is enabled. The
AZT function accurately tracks the zero of the scale by calculating an
additional zero constant. The portion of zero due to AZT is not incorporated in
the zero constant, but is shown separately.
- MANUAL ZERO -
AZT # ±000000 Password: Operator
AZT # ±000000
ENTER EXIT ADV
 When the AZT is displayed, the ENTER key incorporates the AZT number
into the Zero constant, so the displayed AZT number and percentage
changes to zero.
Span Calibration Press the soft key below SPAN CAL on Main Menu 1 to access the Auto Span
process. (See the section “Using the Span Calibrate Screen” for procedure details).
Screens
Auto Span R Cal Screen The Auto Span R Cal screen starts an Auto Span procedure using the R-Cal
simulated load calibration option.

REC-3924 Rev M
- AUTO SPAN R CAL -
press START
START EXIT MANUAL
 Press START to initiate the R-Cal Auto Span calibration. (See “Auto Span”.)
 Press the EXIT soft key or MENU control key to return to the Main Menu 1.
 Press MANUAL to perform a manual Auto Span procedure. (See “Manual

Span”.)
Auto Span Chain If you apply chains to the conveyor belt and press the SPAN CAL soft key, the Auto
Screens Span Chain screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

chain calibration
START EXIT MANUAL
 Press START to disengage the Master Tons counter.
 Press EXIT to return to the Main Menu 1 screen.
 Press MANUAL to perform a manual Auto Span procedure.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

Apply chain, then Password: Operator
press START
START EXIT MANUAL
 Press START to continue the Auto Span with chains procedure.

REC-3924 Rev M
- AUTO SPAN Chain -
Run belt, then
press START
START EXIT
 Restart the conveyor belt, insure chain placement is correct, and then press
START to continue with the Auto Span with chains procedure.
Auto Span Weights If you apply test weights to the conveyor belt and press the SPAN CAL soft key, the
Screen Auto Span Weights screen appears.

weight calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
 Press START to disengage the Master Tons counter.

Apply weights, then Password: Operator
press START
START EXIT MANUAL
 Apply the weights and then press START to continue with the Auto Span with
weights procedure.

REC-3924 Rev M
- AUTOP SPAN Weights -
Run belt, then Password: Operator
press START
START EXIT
Restart the conveyor belt and press START to continue with the Auto Span with
weights procedure.
Press EXIT to return to the Main Menu 1.
Auto Spanning Screen The Auto Spanning screen appears during the Auto Span procedure. No operator
action is required.
- AUTO SPANNING -
Time remaining XXXX
Rate XXX.X Tph
Tot XXXXXX Tons
 The Time remaining (line 2) is calculated based on the current speed and test
duration. During Auto Span, the resolution of the total is ten times higher than
normal.
 If the belt is stopped during the test, a message appears, indicating the
procedure has been suspended.
Auto Span Complete The Auto Span Complete screen appears when the Auto Span procedure is finished.
Screen (Unfactor Calcon)
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

ERROR ±00.00% Complete is flashing
Unfactored Calcon
EXIT FACTOR REPEAT
 Press EXIT to acknowledge that the Material Factor is not used.

 Press FACTOR to set the Material Factor. (See the section “R-Cal Matl Factor
Screens”.)
 Press REPEAT to restart the auto-span calibration.

REC-3924 Rev M
R-Cal Material Factor The R-Cal Matl Factor screen allows the operator to change the material factor.
Screens
R-CAL Mat’l FACTOR

New factor: XXX.XX% Can be R-Cal or Wts or Chains
Change factor?
YES NO ADV
 Press YES to change the material factor.

 Press NO to set the material factor to 1.00.
 Press ADV to advance to Old factor and then again to New factor.
R-CAL Mat’l FACTOR

Old factor: XX.XX% Can be R-Cal or Wts or Chains
New factor: XX.XX%
RUN MENU REPEAT
 Press RUN or MENU to end the procedure. (At this point, the system does not
automatically proceed to the next section.)
 Press REPEAT to restart the auto-span calibration.
Auto Span Complete The Auto Span Complete screen appears when the system has completed the test
Screen performed with the simulated method, including any material factor calculations.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

Error ±XX.XX% Complete is flashing
Change span?
YES NO ADV
 Press YES to change the span. (See section “Span # Changed Screen”.)
 Press NO to leave the span unchanged.
 Press ADV to change from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Material
Factor, and then back to Error %. If the material factor is INVALID (never
acquired before), it is not displayed.

REC-3924 Rev M
Span # Changed Screen The Span # Changed screen appears when the system changes the span number.
SPAN # CHANGED
Old span #: XXXXXX
New span #: XXXXXX
RUN REPEAT ADV
 Press RUN to return to the RUN menu.

 Press REPEAT to restart the auto-span calibration. (See section “Auto
Spanning Screen”.)
 Press ADV to advance from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old
Span, and Material Factor (only if not INVALID).
Span Unchanged Screen The Span Unchanged screen appears after an auto-span calibration completes, but
the operator does not change the span number.
SPAN UNCHANGED
Old span #: XXXXXX
New span #: XXXXXX
RUN REPEAT ADV
 Press RUN to return to the RUN menu.

 Press REPEAT to restart the auto-span calibration. (See section “Auto
Spanning Screen”.)
 Press ADV to advance from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old
Span and Material Factor.
Remove Chains (or The Remove Chains (or Weights) screen appears after completing an auto-span
Weights) Screen procedure with chains or weights, regardless of whether the auto-span number is
changed or not.
This screen is a reminder to the operator to remove the test chains or weights before
returning to normal operations.
Remove chains (or weights)

before returning to
normal operation!!
RUN MENU

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press RUN to resume totalization and return to the Run menu.
 Press MENU to return to the Main Menu 1.
Manual Span Screen If the span constant is knows, the Manual Span screen allows the operator to make a
direct change of span.
- MANUAL SPAN -
Rate XXX.X Tph Password: Operator
Span # XXXXXXX
ENTER EXIT RUN
 Press ENTER to accept the new span.

 Press the EXIT key to return to the Main Menu 1.
 Press RUN to return to the Run menu.
Material Calibration Press the soft key below MAT’L CAL on Main Menu 1 to access the Material
Calibration process. (See the section “Performing a Material Calibration” for procedure
Screens
details).
Material Calibration The Mat’l Calibration screen starts the material calibration process. This is a machine-
Screens directed procedure. Informational screens instruct the user to take certain actions
throughout the process.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
press START.
START MENU
 Press START to begin the material calibration process.

 Press MENU to return to the Main Menu 1 without running the material
calibration process.
The next screen instructs the user to run a quantity of material over the scale.
Run quantity of
material over scale.
CONTINUE

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press CONTINUE to move to the next screen and continue the test
procedure.
XXXXX.X Tons
XXXX.X Tph
Press DONE to end
DONE ABORT
 After all material has passed over the scale, press DONE to continue the test
procedure.
 Press ABORT to return to the top of the menu.
0000.00 Tons
Ref. weight known?
YES NO
 Press YES to continue, if the actual weight of the material is already known.
 Press NO to return the system to run mode, even though the weight is not
known. MAT’L will be flashing, to remind the operator that the material
calibration is not complete.
XXXXX.XX Tons
Enter reference
weight XX. Tons
ENTER ABORT
 Enter the actual material weight and then press ENTER to confirm.
 Press ABORT to return to the Main Menu 1 screen. All information acquired
during the test is lost.
Mat’l Cal. Complete The Mat’l Cal. Complete screen appears after the test is complete and the operator
Screen has entered the actual material weight.

REC-3924 Rev M
MAT’L CAL. COMPLETE
Error XXX.XX% Complete is flashing
Change span?
YES NO ADV
 Press YES to change the span constant.

 Press NO to move to the “Mat’l Calibration Add Reference Screen”.
 Press ADV to display the Actual Difference of Total in place of the Error %.
Span # Changed Screen The Span # Changed screen indicates that the new span constant was installed. At
this point, the scale is calibrated to the actual material test.
SPAN # CHANGED
New span #: 000000
Old span #: 000000
RUN MENU FACTOR
 Press RUN to return the instrument to run mode.

 Press MENU to return to the Main Menu 1 screen.
 Press FACTOR to allow an automatic correction to the span. The FACTOR
soft key only appears if a simulated test was run before a material test.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
Automatic correction
to Material Factors
R-CAL WTS CHAIN
 Press R-CAL to use the results of the simulated test using the R-CAL method.
 Press WTS to use the results of the simulated test using weights.
 Press CHAIN to use the results of the simulated test using chains.
NOTE. The availability of the R-CAL, WTS and CHAIN soft keys is based on the types
of simulated calibration methods that have already been used.
R-CAL Matl Factor The R-Cal Matl Factor screen allows the operator to change the factor.
Screens
REC-3924 Rev M
R-CAL Matl FACTOR
New factor XXX.XX% Can be R-Cal, Wts,
Change factor? or Chains
YES NO ADV
 Press YES to record the related material factor and continue to the next
screen.
 Press NO to return to the Span # Changed screen. (See the section “Span #
Changed Screen”.) If you do not want to acquire the material factor.
 Press ADV to display the Old factor and then to display the New factor again.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

Old factor: XX.XX% Can be R-Cal, Wts,
New factor: XX.XX% or Chains
RUN MENU FACTOR
 Press RUN or MENU to continue.

 Press FACTOR to repeat all simulated tests previously run.
Mat’l Calibration Add The Mat’l Calibration Add Reference screen is used to add the amount of material
Reference Screen used for the test to the Master, Reset and Operator’s totals and complete the material
calibration process.
MAT’L CALIBRATION
Add reference
weight to totals
YES NO
 Press YES to update the totals and end the material calibration process.
 Press NO to return to Main Menu 1. The material calibration information is
lost.
Main Menu 2
Setup and Main Menu 2 contains the setup and configuration menus.
Configuration
REC-3924 Rev M
Menus
- MAIN MENU 2 -
Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
DISPLAY DATA DATA
 Press the DISPLAY soft key to select the units of measure for the instrument
display.
 Press the SCALE DATA soft key to configure mechanical and capacity scale
parameters.
 Press the CALIB DATA soft key to configure scale calibration parameters.
Display Screens The Display screens allow the operator to choose units of measure used for entry and
display purposes. For all Display screens 1 through 9:
 Press the CHOICE soft key to scroll the available selections.

 Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default unit.
Configure Basic Units of Choose the basic units of measure from the Display Scroll 1 screen.
Measure Screen
Measure units Password: Service
>ENGLISH<
CHOICE ENTER
Configure Totalization Choose the units of measure for totalization from the Display Scroll 2 screen.
Units of Measure Screen
Totalization Units Password: Service
>Tons<
CHOICE ENTER
Configure Units of Choose the units of length from the Display Scroll 3 screen.
Length Screen

REC-3924 Rev M
Length Units Password: Service
>Feet<
CHOICE ENTER
Configure Rate Units Choose the rate unit from the Display Scroll 4 screen.
Screen
Rate Units Password: Service
>TPH<
CHOICE ENTER
Configure Load Cell Choose the units used for entering load cell capacity from the Display Scroll 5 screen.
Units Screen
Load Cell Units Password: Service
>Pounds<
CHOICE ENTER
Define Language Screen Define the language used for the Integrator display menus from the Display Scroll 6
screen.
Language Password: Service
>USA<
CHOICE ENTER
Define Time and Date Define the format for displaying and printing time information. This screen only applies
Format Screens if the COMM board is installed.
Time
>am/pm<
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Define the format for display and printing date information. This screen only applies if
the COMM board is installed.
- DISPL:AY SCROLL 8 -
Date
>MM-DD-YYYY<
CHOICE ENTER
Configure RUN Display Configure line 3 of the Run menu on the Display Scroll 9 screen. This line can display
Line Screen on of the following:
 Belt Loading
 Speed
 Date and time (if the COMM board is installed)
 No display (default selection)
Run display line 3 Password: Operator
>No display<
CHOICE ENTER
Set Damping Factors for Set the damping factors for the display on the Display Scroll 10 screen.
Display Screens
When displayed on the screen, process variables can be damped by a programmable
factor, to filter out variations that can be introduced by mechanical vibrations.
To tune a damping filter, enter the number of seconds corresponding to the desired
time constant. For example, if 10 seconds is entered, the process variable reaches the
stability after a step change in 10 seconds.
This damping factor only affects the display, not the current output variable, which has
a separate damping factor (selectable in Main Menu 4, I/O Define).
Damping display RATE Password: Operator
Damping = 0 sec
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Default 10 seconds
Min 0 seconds
Max 400 seconds
Press ENTER to confirm the default damping rate, or the rate entered.
If line 3 of the Run display is set to Belt Loading (see “Configure RUN Display Line
Screen”), choose the damping rate for the display from Display Scroll 11 screen.
Damping Display LOAD Password: Operator
Damping = 0 sec
ENTER
If line 3 of the Run display is set to Speed (see “Configure RUN Display Line Screen”),
choose the damping rate for the display from the Display Scroll 12 screen.
Damping displ SPEED
Damping = 0 sec
ENTER
Scale Data Screens The Scale Data screens allow the operator to configure scale capacity and other
physical scale parameters. For additional information on the physical parameters of
the instrument, see Appendix B: “Weighbridge Physical Parameters”.
Set Scale Capacity Set the scale capacity on the SC Data Scroll 1 screen.
Screen
Max. scale capacity Password: Service
500.0 Tph
ENTER
Define Scale Division Define the number of decimal places (scale division) from the SC Data Scroll 2
Screen screen.

REC-3924 Rev M
Scale division Password: Service
>0.1<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE soft key to scroll through the selections.

 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the scale division selection.
Select the Weighbridge Enter the code number of your Thermo Scientific scale on the SC Data Scroll 3
Model Screen screen.
Belt scale code # Password: Service
>49<
ENTER DETAIL
 Press ENTER to accept the displayed selection and set the default
mechanical parameters for that scale.
 Press DETAIL to accept the displayed selection, but you want to manually
enter the mechanical parameters for the Integrator.
 Enter 0 if you want to define the weighbridge manually, and not use the
database. This should only be done for special weighbridges that are not
being part of the standard set of Thermo Scientific scales.
Detail Mechanical See Appendix B: “Weighbridge Physical Parameters” for additional information about
Parameters of the Frame weighbridge specifications.
Screens
Enter the distance from the pivot to the load cell on the SC Data Scroll 3A screen.
Pivot to load cell Password: Service
distance: 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the number of weigh idlers affixed to the scale weighbridge on SC Data Scroll
3B screen.

REC-3924 Rev M
# of weigh idlers Password: Service
1
ENTER
Enter the distance from the pivot to the first weigh idler on SC Data Scroll 3C screen.
Pivot to idler
1st Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the distance from the pivot to the second weigh idler on SC Data Scroll 3D
screen.
Pivot to 2nd idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the distance from the pivot to the third weigh idler on SC Data Scroll 3E screen.
Pivot to 3rd idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the distance from the pivot to the fourth weigh idler on SC Data Scroll 3F
screen.
Pivot to 4th idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Enter the distance from the pivot to the fifth weigh idler on the SC Data Scroll 3G
screen.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3G -
Pivot to5th idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the distance from the pivot to the sixth weigh idler on the SC Data Scroll 3H
screen.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3H -
Pivot to6th idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the pivot to test weight height on SC Data Scroll 3I.
Pivot to test-weight Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER ±
Enter the pivot to test weight length on SC Data Scroll 3L screen.
Pivot to test-weight Password: Service
length 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the pivot to carriage height on the SC Data Scroll 3M screen.
Pivot to carriage Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Enter the carry roll to carriage height on the SC Data Scroll 3N screen.
Roll to carriage Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER
Enter the number of load cells of your weighbridge on SC Data Scroll 3O screen.
# of load cells Password: Service
0
ENTER
Define Dimensional Enter the distance between idlers across the scale on both sides on SC Data Scroll 4
Parameters Screens screen.
Idler spacing Password: Service
36.00 In
ENTER
Enter the angle of inclination of the belt conveyor on the SC Data Scroll 5 screen.
Conveyor’s angle Password: Service
0.0 Degrees
ENTER ±
Define Load Cells Screen Enter the load cell capacity as it appears on the label placed on the load cell on SC
Data Scroll 6 screen.
Load cell capacity Password: Service
250 Lbs
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Enter the load cell sensitivity in mV/V as marked on the label of the load cell on the
SC Data Scroll 7 screen.
Load cell sens. Password: Service
3.00 mV/V
ENTER
Enter the load cell resistance for the first cell on the SC Data Scroll 9A screen.
Load cell #1 res Password: Service
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
Enter the load cell resistance for the second cell on the SC Data Scroll 9B screen.
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
Enter the load cell resistance for the third cell on the SC Data Scroll 9C screen.
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
Enter the load cell resistance for the fourth cell on the SC Data Scroll 9D screen.
350.00 Ohms
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Enter the load cell resistance for the fifth cell on the SC Data Scroll 9E screen.
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
Enter the load cell resistance for the sixth cell on the SC Data Scroll 9F screen.
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
Define Speed Input Select the speed input on the SC Data Scroll screen.
Screen
Speed input
>single<
CHOICE ENTER
Set the Dead Band Set the dead band on the SC Data Scroll 10 screen. The dead band is a percentage
Screen of the scale capacity (rate) in which the rate (if any) is ignored, and a zero rate is
forced. Totalization is also frozen when rate is below dead band.
Zero Dead-Band range Password: Service
0%
ENTER
Weights and Measures Set parameters to conform with the selected approval agency.
Mode Screen
W & M mode Password: Service
>NONE<
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press the CHOICE soft key to scroll through the available settings (NONE,
NTEP, or OIML).
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the selected setting.
Calib Data Screens The Cal Data screens allow the operator to enter or set parameters that relate to the
calibration of the scale.
Define the Calibration Select the simulated method of automatic calibration to be used by the Integrator on
Mode Screen the Cal Data Scroll 1 screen. The selected method is the only one displayed in the
calibration section of Main Menu 1.

Calibration mode: Password: Service
>R-CAL<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE soft key to scroll through the available settings.
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm your choice.
Detail the R-Cal Enter the resistance (in ohms) of the R-CAL resistor installed in the Integrator on Cal
Parameters Screen Data Scroll 2 screen.

R-CAL select. Password: Service
Res 000000 ohms
ENTER
The system calculates the CalCon (calibration constant) based on the mechanical and
electrical parameters entered in Scale Data. The Cal Data Scroll 3 screen is for
reference only.

R-CAL constant
00.00
MENU RUN

REC-3924 Rev M
Detail the Chains Enter the weight per foot or meter of the chains that are used for calibration on the Cal
Parameters Screens Data Scroll 4 screen.

Chain select Password: Service
weight 00.000 Lb/Ft
ENTER
electrical parameters entered in Scale Data. SC Data Scroll 5 screen is for reference
only.
CHAIN CAL constant Password: Service
00.00
MENU RUN
Detail the Test Weight Enter the weight of the test weights that are used for the calibration on the SC Data
Parameters Screen Scroll 6 screen.
Total test weight on Password: Service
scale 20.000 Lbs.
ENTER
electrical parameters entered in Scale Data. SC Data Scroll 7 screen is for reference
only.

WEIGHT CAL constant
00.00
MENU RUN

REC-3924 Rev M
Calibration Interval  Enter the calibration interval on Cal Data Scroll 8 screen. If an optional COMM
Screens board is installed, the system will use this interval to determine when to
prompt the operator that the next calibration is due.
 If a non zero value is entered, an alarm appears after the time is elapsed. The
alarm can only be cleared after a calibration check is executed.

Calibration interval Password: Operator
365 Days
ENTER
Cal Data Scroll 9 displays the date of the last calibration and the expected date of the
next one, based on the entry in the previous screen.

Calibration date
Last: MM-DD-YYYY
Next: MM-DD-YYYY
Material Factor Screens Enter the material factor on the Cal Data Scroll 10 screen. The material factor is a
percentage that is used to correct the CalCon to the real value. Enter 0 to set the
material factor INVALID.

Material FACTOR Password: Service
00.00% R-Cal
ENTER ± NEXT
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the material factor setting.
 Press the NEXT soft key to scroll between the material factor for R-Cal,
Weights and Chains. If they have not been measured, the display shows
INVALID.

REC-3924 Rev M
Calibration Test Duration Start the test duration setting process on Cal Data Scroll 11 screen. Zero and Span
Screens calibrations are more accurate if executed on an entire belt revolution or multiple of it.

Establish test
duration
ACQ MANUAL
 Press the ACQ soft key to acquire the automatically acquire the test duration.
 Press the MANUAL soft key to manually set the test duration.
Acquire the Test Choose the belt length on the Acquire Test Dur screen.
Duration Screen
ACQUIRE TEST DUR

Choose belt length
measurement method.
FULL PARTIAL
 Press the FULL soft key to use the entire belt length. Use a 100 foot tape to
measure the belt length to the nearest 0.1 foot. Reference a fixed point (an
idler) on the conveyor when counting belt revolutions.
 Press the PARTIAL soft key to enable the operator to acquire test duration
without the entire belt length measurement. (See the section “Partial Test
Duration Acquisition Screens”.)
Full Test Duration If FULL is pressed, enter the length of one belt revolution (to the nearest 0.1 foot).
Acquisition Screen
Enter length of one

belt revolution. Password: Service
Length 1000.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the setting.

 Press the ABORT soft key to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen. (See the
section “Calibration Test Duration Screens”.)
After the length of the belt has been entered, the system automatically moves to the
REC-3924 Rev M
following screen which prompts the operator to press START when the mark passes
the reference point.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
 Press the START soft key when the mark passes the reference point to
continue the procedure.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
 Press COUNT each time the mark passes the reference point until minimum
test load conditions are met.
 Press COUNT followed by DONE when the last revolution passes the mark
When test duration is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are displayed
on the Test Duration screen.
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
Press CONTINUE to continue to the next screen.
Auto Count Belt If a clip detector is installed and the clip detector mode in I/O Definition is set to
Revolutions Screen AUTO, the system automatically counts belt revolutions without the need for pressing
the COUNT key.
The following screens display:

REC-3924 Rev M
Start belt. Wait
until 1st mark
passes reference.
ABORT
When the mark passes, the system automatically moves to the next instructional
screen. The system counts each time a mark passes the reference point until the
operator presses the DONE key.
Press the ABORT soft key to terminate the process.
Press DONE when

ready.
0000 secs 000 revs
ABORT DONE
Partial Test Duration If PARTIAL is pressed on the Acquire Test Dur screen, the operator is asked to enter
Acquisition Screens the length between two marks on the belt.

two marks on belt.
Length: 200.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

 Press the ABORT soft key to return the screen to Cal Data Scroll 11. (See the
After the length of the belt has been entered, the system automatically moves to the
following screen which prompts the operator to press START when the mark passes
the reference point.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press the START soft key when the mark passes the reference point and
move to the next instructional screen.
 Press ABORT to return to the Cal Data Scroll 11 screen. (See the section
“Calibration Test Duration Screens”.)
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
 Press COUNT each time a mark passes the reference point until both marks
have passed. Then press DONE.
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
When test duration is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are
displayed. Press CONTINUE to move to the next screen.
Manual Entry of Test If MANUAL is pressed, the system prompts the operator to run the belt at its maximum
Duration Screens speed.
Start belt. Press

CONTINUE when belt Password: Service
is at maximum speed.
ABORT CONTINUE
 Press CONTINUE to move to the next screen.

The operator is prompted to enter the length of one belt revolution.

REC-3924 Rev M
ENTER length of one
belt revolution. Password: Operator
Length 000.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

Enter the number of belt revolutions to be timed.
Enter the number of

belt revolutions to
be timed 000 revs
ENTER ABORT

Enter the time per revolution.
ENTER the time for

revolutions to pass
reference 000 sec
ENTER ABORT
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the setting. The system times the belt
travel according to the parameters entered.
Timing belt travel

000 sec
ABORT
When test duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and time appear.
Press CONTINUE.

REC-3924 Rev M
TEST DURATION
Length = 000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
Define Auto Zero A periodic auto zero procedure can be automatically executed by the system if the
Tracking Screens Auto Zero Tracking option is set to YES on the Cal Data Scroll 12 screen.
If YES is selected, Auto Zero Tracking is enabled anytime the belt is running at a flow
rate less than the range setting selected below.

Auto zero tracking Password: Operator
>Yes<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE soft key to scroll through the settings (YES or NO).
 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
The following screens are only visible if Auto Zero Tracking is enabled.
Define the range of action of the AZT with reference to the scale capacity (rate) on the
Cal Data Scroll 12A screen. A flow rate greater than the range setting deactivates
AZT.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12A -

Range ± 2.0%
ENTER
Default ±2%
If NTEP enabled:
Min 0%
Max 2 %
If NTEP not enabled:
Min 0%
Max 10 %

REC-3924 Rev M
Define the maximum amount of correction that each AZT can automatically
compensate on the Cal Data Scroll 12B screen.
If zero error exceeds the step limit, only the step value will be zeroed and the
remainder left. The Auto Zero Step alarm is activated. If the next AZT completes with
no remainder, the alarm self-clears.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12B -

Step ± X.XX%
ENTER
Default 10%
Min 0.01%
Max 10%
Define the maximum amount of zero error (with reference to the scale capacity) that
AZT can automatically compensate on the Cal Data Scroll 12C screen.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12C -

Auto zero tracking Password: Service
Max Dev + 2.0
ENTER
Default ±2%
If NTEP enabled:
Min 0%
Max 2 %
If NTEP not enabled:
Min 0%
Max 10 %
Define the amount of time to delay enabling Auto Zero Track after a belt stoppage on
the Cal Data Scroll 12D screen. The AZT “Z” flashes for five seconds, then stays on
steady for five seconds to indicate warm-up mode.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12D -

Warm Time XXX.XX Min
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Default 0 Min
Min 0 Min
Max 160 Min
Speed Capacity Screen Enter or automatically acquire the maximum speed capacity on the Cal Data Scroll 13
screen.
The maximum speed capacity is used to scale the current output when used to
monitor the speed, and to allow entering the speed alarms in percentage.

Max speed capacity Password: Service
600.00 FPM
ENTER ACQ

Default 200.0 Fpm Default 1.0 m/s
Min 1.0 Fpm Min 0.1 m/s
Max 2000.0 Fpm Max 10 m/s
 Press ENTER to confirm the speed capacity setting.

 Press ACQ to automatically acquire the speed capacity setting.
Auto Zero Max Deviation Set the auto zero maximum deviation on the Cal Data Scroll 14 screen.
Screen
The auto zero max deviation sets the amount that AZT (Auto Zero Track) can adjust
from a reference. (The reference is set to INVALID after a cold start and is obtained
during the first operator-assisted zero test.)
If an Auto Zero exceeds the max deviation, and if the new zero is accepted, the Auto
Zero Limit alarm becomes active, and is logged into Audit trails. The alarm clears if a
new Auto Zero returns back to within range or a new zero reference value is set.

Auto Zero Max Dev Password: Service
XX.XX %
ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
If W&M Mode is NONE:
Default 100 %
Min 0%
Max 100 %
If W&M Mode is NTEP: Default 2%

Min 0%
Max 2%
If W&M Mode is OIML:

Default 4%
Min 0%
Max 4%
Zero Reference Screen Set the zero reference number on the Cal Data Scroll 15 screen.
The zero reference number is set to INVALID during a cold start. The zero number
acquired during the first operator-assisted zero test is then set as the zero reference
number. This value is used to determine allowable zero correction limits.
The zero reference number can be set to the current zero number ± acquired Auto
Zero Track correction number via the SET soft key.
A service password is required to change the zero reference.

Zero Reference Password: Service
XXXXXX
ENTER
Default Invalid
Min 0
Max 120000
Zero Ready The Zero Ready feature provides visible indication of when the scale is not loaded,
has a valid zero calibration, and is ready to run material. This feature is a requirement
for all NTEP scales. The indication is shown on the display when the belt loading
remains under 0.12% of full scale belt loading for a period of time equivalent to one
belt revolution. The indicator is an “R” on the left side of line 2 of the display. The
function can be activated only after a complete scale calibration. A Zero Ready digital
output is also available. It is active when ‘R’ is displayed.

REC-3924 Rev M
00000000 TONS
R 000000 Tph
The Zero Ready feature can be turned on or off in CAL DATA SCROLL 18.

Zero Ready Password: Service
>Yes<
CHOICE ENTER
When W & M Mode (SC DATA SCROLL 11) is set to NTEP, the Zero Ready scroll
defaults to “Yes”. When W & M Mode is set to OIML or NONE, the Zero Ready scroll
defaults to “No”.
Whenever the Zero Ready scroll setting is changed an Audit Trail event is generated.
Main Menu 3 – Main Menu 3 is used for protecting and un-protecting the system using passwords,
and to perform diagnostic and test functions. The diagnostic functions can only be
Security, operated after removing all password protection, and should only be used by
Diagnostics and experienced technical personnel.
Tests Most test functions are not password protected.
- MAIN MENU 3 -
Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST
 Press PROT to access the Protection menu. This menu is only visible after
the passwords have been defined.
 Press DIAG to access the Diagnostics menu.
 Press TEST to access the Test menu.
Protection Level Set the protection level on the Protection Level screen.
Screens
The Integrator has three protection levels:
 None
 Limited
 Protected
The protection levels and the passwords are defined using the scheme in Table A-1.

REC-3924 Rev M
Protection Level Password Status
None Service The system is totally unprotected. All
data can be read or changed.
Limited Operator Operator functions and data are
unprotected. All setup and calibration
data are protected, except zero
calibrate.
Protected None Required The system is totally protected.
Process data can be read, but no
change is allowed.
Table A-1. Protection Level
 A service password is required to access the None protection level.

 An operator or a service password is required to access the Limited protection
level.
- PROTECTION LEVEL -
>NONE<
NONE LTD PROT
 Press the NONE soft key to access the None protection level. If the current
protection level is not already None, the service password is required.
 Press the LTD soft key to access the Limited protection level.
 If the system is in protection level None, the change is immediate.
 If the system is in protection level Protected, the service or operator password
is required.
 Press the PROT soft key to access the protected level. No password is
required.
Temporarily Changing Change the system protection level during normal operation on the System Protected
System Protection screen. This screen appears when the operator tries to enter a variable or select a
Screens function that is password protected and the password is installed.
PLEASE ENTER
PASSWORD
ENTER
Enter the appropriate operator or service password to continue with normal

operations.

REC-3924 Rev M
If you enter the correct operator password, but the variable or function requires the
service password, you are prompted to enter that password.
PLEASE ENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD
ENTER
Enter the appropriate password to continue with normal operations.
If the password you enter is incorrect, access is denied and the following screen
appears.
INVALID PASSWORD
ACCESS DENIED
ENTER
 Press RETURN to return the program to the previous function.
Diagnostics Screens View diagnostic data on the Diagnost. Scroll screens.
A/D Raw Data Screen The Diagnost. Scroll 1 screen shows the raw data from the A/D converter of the
Integrator (A/D gross) and the net value after the zero constant has been subtracted.
The range of the A/D converter is from 0 to 131070 numbers.
A/D gross 00000

A/D net 0000
Readout Load Cell mV The system displays the mV output of the load cell on the Diagnost. Scroll 2 screen.
Screen
The reading must be positive and must increase when the load increases.

REC-3924 Rev M
Weight on load cell Password: Service
0.00 mV
CALIB
Press the CALIB soft key to display additional load information and fine tune the
readout of m/VV.
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 2A -
Load cell output zero Password: Service
0000000 A/D counts
ENTER
Default 15
Min - 10000
Max 10000
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 2B -
Load cell output span Password: Service
0000000
ENTER
Default 3497
Min 0
Max 30000
Change Prescaler The prescaler is a number that is used to divide the incoming frequency of the speed
Screens sensors to achieve a usable input frequency of approximately 30 Hz. The prescaler is
automatically calculated and should never be altered by the user. However, a direct
entry has been made possible for quick replacement of the Integrator.
Use the Diagnost. Scroll 3 to change the prescaler.
NOTE. This screen is only functional if the speed input is local at the Integrator, or
simulated. The screen is not functional is the speed input is remote at the Digitizer.

REC-3924 Rev M
Prescale 00000 Password: Service
00000.0 pls/min
ENTER CALIB
Default 10
Min 1
Max 1000

 Press CALIB to enter additional data.
Test duration total Password: Service
pulses 0000000
ENTER
Default 900
Min 1
Max 1000000
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 3B -
Test duration total Password: Service
length 00000.0 ft
ENTER

Default 200 feet Default 200 m
Min 1 feet Min 1m
Max 100000 feet Max 100000 m
Change Passwords The service and operator passwords can be changed by entering a new one on the
Screens Diagnost. Scroll 4 screen.
 You can enter up to eight characters (numeric key entries). The entry is not
echoed on the screen.
 Press ENTER without entering a password removes the current password.
 The default is no password.
 The system prompts you to confirm the password by entering it again.

REC-3924 Rev M
ENTER SERVICE Password: Service
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
REENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
If the password entered the second time matches the first, the system displays a
confirmation screen.
NEW PASSWORD
ACQUIRED
RETURN
If the two passwords do not match, the system does not accept the new password and
a failure message appears.
INVALID PASSWORD
RETURN
ENTER OPERATOR Password: Operator
PASSWORD ********
MENU ENTER
The operator password is double checked, similar to the service password.
Display Software Version The software version is displayed for reference only on Diagnost. Scroll 6A screen.
Screen

REC-3924 Rev M
Main software
version:
41.00.00.00
Setup Date and Time The user can set the current date and time on the Diagnost. Scroll 7 and 8 screens. A
Screens battery operated clock calendar then maintains time and date even if power is
removed. Day, month, and year are entered in sequence.
NOTE. This section only applies if a COMM board is installed.
Date: DD-MM-YYYY Password: Service
Day: DD
ENTER
Default 00-00-0000
Min 01-01-0000
Max 12-31-2096
Time is entered in a similar way. The AM/PM key is used when time is in the English
mode. See the section “Define Time and Date Format Screens”.)
Time: HH:MM
Hours: HH
ENTER AM/PM
24 hour AM/PM
Default 00.00 01.00
Min 00.00 01.00
Max 23:59 12:59
Check Hardware The system automatically recognizes when optional boards are installed. Use the
Configuration Screens Diagnost. Scroll 9 through 14 to view hardware configuration.
When a board is acknowledged, the related information stays in memory even if the
board is removed, until the operator deletes it by responding YES to the message
shown at power on.

REC-3924 Rev M
Board type slot #1
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #2
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #3
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #4
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #5
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #6
BOARD TYPE

REC-3924 Rev M
Board Description
Dig I/O 16in/4out Optional digital input output board.
 #16 Optocoupled digital inputs
 #4 Optocoupled digital outputs
Dig I/O 16out/4in Optional digital input output board.
Load Out 16in/4in Optional digital input output board dedicated to the
Load Out.
Load Out 16out/4in Optional digital input output board dedicated to the
Load Out.
Analog I/O Optional analog input output board.
 #2 Current outputs
 #2 Voltage inputs
Current Out Optional current output board.
 #1 Current output
Communication A Serial communication board (RS232, RS485)
Communication B Allen-Bradley Remote I/O or Profibus-DP
Table A-2. Board Description
Digitizer COMM Setup The Diagnost. Scroll 15 screen displays the actual configuration of the communication
Screen line connecting the Digitizer and Integrator. The parameters cannot be changed; they
are automatically detected at the power on.
Digitizer Comm. Setup
baud 9600, 8 bits
no parity
Test Screens Test the unit using the Test Scroll screens.
Lamp Test Screen Press START on the Test Scroll 1 screen to begin a Lamp Test of the Integrator. All
LEDs and digits of the display blink for a number of seconds.
- TEST SCROLL 1 -
LAMP TEST
START

REC-3924 Rev M
Unit Self Test Screens The system can perform some internal test functions, which can be used to detect
malfunctions to the hardware devices.
Perform the unit self test using the Test Scroll 2 screens.
- TEST SCROLL 2 -
Internal test of Password: Service
microprocessor.
START
Press START to begin the test.
 Screens Test Scroll 2A through Test Scroll 2C display in sequence.

 The message “Test PASSED” appears if the test runs correctly.
 If something wrong is detected, then the message “Test FAILED” appears,
along with the soft key CONTINUE. Press CONTINUE to go to the next test.
- TEST SCROLL 2A -
Testing ROM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2B -
Testing RAM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2C -
Testing E2PROM
Test PASSED
Test Digital Inputs The Test Scroll 3 screen is used to check the digital input circuitry.
Screen
 The display shows a 1 if the specific input is closed and 0 if the specific input
is open.
 If more digital I/O boards are installed, the NEXT soft key appears, allowing
the operator to scroll between boards.

REC-3924 Rev M
- TEST SCROLL 3 -
Dig input test
Slot #0 ----0000
NEXT
 Slots are numbered 1 to 6.

 Slot 0 is the motherboard.
 _Digit_ (displayed instead of _slot #_) identifies the four Digitizer inputs.
 Inputs are shown from right to left. If a board has 16 inputs, two screens are
used to show the first and the second half. The lower half is shown first.
Test Digital Outputs The Test Scroll 4 screen shows the shows the status of each digital output and allows
Screens the operator to force the output for testing purposes.
When forced, the output is on until you press the CLEAR soft key or enter the Run
menu. If an output is forced and the scroll key is used for reaching some other menu,
the output stays in the forced status until you press RUN. This allows the operator to
check inputs while outputs are still in the forced status.
Slots are numbered 1 to 6, slot 0 is the motherboard.
- TEST SCROLL 4 -
Dig output test Password: Service
output #1: ON/OFF
ENTER ON/OFF
 To force an output, enter the desired number and press the ENTER soft key.
 Use the ON/OFF key to force it to the ON or OFF status.
 After the output has been forced, the CLEAR soft key appears in the middle
position.
NOTE. Forcing the digital outputs may cause machinery to start. After the user tried to
force the output, the following message appears.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT

REC-3924 Rev M
NOTE. If the user presses continue, be aware the action may cause damage or injury.
If the user presses ABORT, the system automatically returns to the previous scroll.
Test Current Outputs Use the Test Scroll 5 and Test Scroll 6 to test the current output. The board can have
Screens one or two current output channels.
NOTE. This section only applies if a current output board is detected.
- TEST SCROLL 5 -
Current output #1 Password: Service
should be 00.0 mA
ENTER CLEAR
Default 0.0 mA
Min 0.0 mA
Max 20.0 mA
 To force the output, enter the desired number of milliamps and press ENTER.
 Press CLEAR to free the mA channel.
Test Scroll 6 appears if the board has two channels.
- TEST SCROLL 6 -
Current output #2 Password: Service
should be 00.0 mA
ENTER CLEAR
Test Current Inputs Use Test Scroll 7 to view the status of each analog input channel.
Screen
NOTE. This screen is displayed only if an analog input board is detected.
- TEST SCROLL 7 -
Volts input
#1 00.0 V
#2 00.0 V

REC-3924 Rev M
Test Communication A Use the Test Scroll 8 screen to check the installed serial lines.
 The maximum line number is three.
 The first line is used to interface the Digitizer.
 The second and third lines can be used for printing or high level
communication.
 The DIGIT soft key identifies the first dedicated line.
 PORT 1 and PORT 2 soft keys are shown only if a second and third COMM
board is detected.
- TEST SCROLL 8 -
Test communication A Password: Service
PORT 1 PORT 2
Press the PORT 1 or PORT 2 soft key to initiate the test.
A test pattern is sent out on the TX output and read on the RX input. Depending on the
results of the test, a “Test Passed” or “Test Failed” message appears.
NOTE. This test requires a hardware jumper to be installed between terminals TB5-8
(RX) and TB5-9 (TX) on the communication board.
Test Communication B Use the Test Scroll 9 screen to test the field bus version of the communication board.
Screen
Press START to initiate the test.
- TEST SCROLL 9 -
Test communication B Password: Service
START
Test Load Out or DIO If an optional Load Out board is detected, use the Test Scroll 10 screen to initiate a
Input Board Screen BCD input test. The test is similar to the digital input test.
- TEST SCROLL 10 -
BCD Input test
0000
ENTER CLEAR

REC-3924 Rev M
Test DIO Output Board Use the Test Scroll 11 screen to test an optional DIO output board.
- TEST SCROLL 11 -
BCD Output test
0000
ENTER CLEAR
Default 0
Min 0
Max 9999 or 7999 (if parity check enabled)
 To force the outputs, enter a number and then press ENTER. The CLEAR key
appears, indicating that the output is being forced to a value.
 Press CLEAR to free the output.
Test the CPU Serial Line Use the Test Scroll 12 screen to perform a test of the CPU board serial line.
 Press START to initiate the test.
- TEST SCROLL 12 -
Test CPU serial line Password: Service
START
NOTE. The CPU serial line is not implemented in the current hardware, therefore the
normal response is TEST FAILED.
Test Integrator/Digitizer Use the Test Scroll 13 screen to view and reset statistical information about the
Communication Link communication between Integrator and Digitizer.
Screen
- TEST SCROLL 13 -
OK 00000
Err 00000 000.00%
RESET

REC-3924 Rev M
Test Digitizer Switch Use the Test Scroll 14 screen to view the actual status of the Digitizer’s switch banks.
Banks Screen
- TEST SCROLL 14 -
Digitizer switches
SW3: 00000001
SW4: 00000000
Test the Keyboard and Use the Test Scroll 15 screen to test the keyboard and switches.
Switches Screen
- TEST SCROLL 15 -
Keyboard + switches
Key:
Switches: 00000000
 Press the RUN key twice to exit.

 All other keys, including MENU, are displayed but not executed.
Main Menu 4 – Main Menu 4 is dedicated to the definition of the input output (I/O) and alarms.
Defining I/O and

Alarms
- MAIN MENU 4 -
Press MENU for more
I/O ALARMS
DEFINE DEFINE
 Press the I/O DEFINE soft key to access the I/O definition screens.
 Press the ALARMS DEFINE soft key to access the alarm definitions.
I/O Definition Screens The input output section of the system is fully configurable. All inputs and outputs are
conventionally numbered and can be assigned to physical input and output terminals
depending on the needs.
The standard configuration, as provided by the factory, is normally satisfactory.

However, you can use the I/O Def. Scroll screens to configure I/O, if necessary.

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Current Outputs Use the I/O Def. Scroll 1 through 1C screens to configure the current outputs.
Screens
 Press the CHOICE key to change the variable.
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the setting.
 Press NEXT to set up additional outputs, if installed.
- I/O DEF SCROLL 1 -

Current Output define Password: Service
#1 >Rate<
CHOICES ENTER NEXT
NOTE. There are three variables the analog output can be configured to represent.
However, the Model 2301 Integrator can only support two active outputs.
Default (1st) RATE

(2nd) LOAD
Selections OFF
RATE
LOAD
SPEED
Use the I/O Def. Scroll 1A, 1B, and 1C to set up the range, delay and damping of the
current output. (These screens are not available if the current output definition in I/O
Def. Scroll 1 is set to OFF.)
The range is selectable between the standard 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA both in

direct and reverse mode.
 Select 0-20 or 4-20 if an increase in current is desired for any increase of the
variable.
 Select 20-0 or 20-4 if a decrease of current is desired for any increase of the
variable.
- I/O DEF. SCROLL 1A -

Current out range Password: Service
#1 >4-20 mA
CHOICES ENTER NEXT
Default (1st) 4-20 mA

(2nd) 4-20 mA

REC-3924 Rev M
Selections 0-20 mA
4-20 mA
20-0 mA
20-4 mA
Each current output can be delayed. This is typically needed in blending systems, to
correct transport time differences. The delay can be set either in time or in length of
belt travel. Belt travel is suggested for variable speed applications.
Use the T/L soft key to switch between time and length.
- I/O DEF. SCROLL 1B -

Current out delay Password: Service
#1 0 sec
ENTER T/L NEXT
Default (1st) 0 sec, (2nd) 0 sec

If TIME
Min 0 sec
Max 300 sec
If LENGTH
English Min 0 Ft
Max 10000 Ft
Metric Min 0M
Max 300 M
A damping factor can also be selected for each current channel on I/O Def. Scroll 1C.
The damping factor is the time for the output to stabilize after a step change. This
damping only affects the current output, not the displayed variable.
- I/O DEF. SCROLL 1C -

Current out damping Password: Operator
#1 0
ENTER NEXT
Default 4 sec (1st, 2nd)

Min 0 sec
Max 400 sec
 Up and down arrows move between range, delay and damping.

 NEXT moves to the next current output.

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Analog Inputs If a two input analog board is installed, you can define analog inputs using the I/O Def.
Screen Scroll screens.
NOTE. The analog input hardware is factory configured for current (0-20 mA) in
utilizing a shunt (W3 or W4) and 250 ohm resistor (R-21 and R-22 or R-28 and R-29)
across the input. To use with a voltage input (0-5 VDC), the corresponding shunt (W3
for Input #1 or W4 for Input #2) must be cut.
Analog inputs can be used for:
 Measuring the moisture of the material

 The conveyor angle of inclination
Moisture compensation is performed on the belt loading, and affects both rate and
totals. Only during material calibration with material is moisture compensation
suspended, so that the totalized quantity can be directly compared to the weight
obtained on a static scale. The moisture compensation is executed before adding to
total.
Angle compensation dynamically adjusts span when conveyor inclination changes.
 Press the CHOICES soft key to select the action of the analog input.
 Press the ENTER soft key to confirm the selection.
 Press the CALIB soft key to calibrate the analog input signal.
 The same defaults and selections apply to both screens.
- I/O DEF. SCROLL 2 -

Analog Input #1 def. Password: Service
>Inclination<
CHOICES ENTER CALIB
Default OFF
Selections OFF
INCLIN(ATION)
MOISTURE

Analog Input #2 def. Password: Service
>Moisture<
CHOICES ENTER CALIB

REC-3924 Rev M
Moisture Compensation If an analog input has been programmed for reading the moisture signal and CALIB
Input Screen was pressed, the I/O Def. Scroll 2A and 2B screens appear.
The user can calibrate the input signal by entering the equivalence between percent of
moisture and voltage on two points.
 Press ENTER to confirm your selection or entry.

 Press the %MOIST key to enter the percent of moisture.
 Press the VOLT key to enter the corresponding number of volts.

Moisture input calibr. Password: Service
0.0 %M = 2.0 V
ENTER %MOIST VOLTS
Percentage Moisture Volts

Default 0.0% 0.0 V
Min 0.0% 2.0 V
Max 20.0% 2.5 V

Moisture input calibr. Password: Service
20.0 % = 5.0 V
ENTER %MOIST VOLTS
Percentage Moisture Volts

Default 20.0% 5.0 V
Min 1.0% 1.0 V
Max 20.0% 5.0 V
Inclination If an analog input has been programmed for reading the angle signal and CALIB was
Compensation Input pressed, the I/O Def. Scroll 3A and 3B screens appear.
Screens
The user can calibrate the input signal by entering the number of degrees
corresponding to the minimum signal (0 mA or 4 mA) and the number of degrees
corresponding to the maximum signal (20 mA).
 Press the +/- key to enter negative numbers.

 The same defaults and limitations apply to both screens.

REC-3924 Rev M
Conveyor low posit Password: Service
00.0 Degrees
ENTER ±
Default 0.0 Degrees

Min - 25 Degrees
Max + 25 Degrees

Conveyor high posit Password: Service
00.0 Degrees
ENTER ±
Define Digital Inputs Digital inputs can be programmed using the I/O Def. Scroll 4 screens.
Screens
The screen shows one logical function per time, and allows the user to assign it to a
physical input.
 The NEXT key scrolls between the logical functions.

 The NC/NO key selects the status of the input, normally open (NO) or
normally closed (NC). NO means the input is inactive when disconnected.
 To program a function, scroll with NEXT until the function is displayed, then
enter the physical input number and confirm with ENTER. Scroll with NC/NO
until the desired mode is displayed.
 By assigning a function to 0, the function is disabled.

Dig. Input def. Password: Service
Ext Alarm 1 0 NC
ENTER NC/NO NEXT
Table A-3 shows the logical selections that can be assigned to any available physical
input.
 Belt running (conveyor run) input NC has been defaulted to #3 physical input.
Typical field wiring drawings and customer specific field wiring drawings show
belt running (conveyor run) defaulted to #3.

REC-3924 Rev M
 Default inputs can be reassigned to any physical input if desired.
 External alarms 1, 2 and 3 can be assigned to logical functions not on the list.
 Logical selections should not be reassigned after the physical inputs have
been wired.
CAUTION. Logical inputs return to the default if the Integrator is cold started.
Table A-3. Selections Available for Physical Input
Selections Default Comments

External alarm 1 0 NO 0 = function disabled
External alarm 2 0 NO
External alarm 3 0 NO
Print 4 NO Only if COMM installed and
set to PRINTER
Belt Running (Conveyor run) 3 NC
Reset Total 0 NO
Reset Alarms 0 NO
Auto Zero 0 NO Only if AZT enabled
Clip Detector 0 NO
Batch Start 0 NO Only if Load Out installed
Batch Stop 0 NO Only if Load Out installed
Batch Standby 0 NO Only if Load Out installed
 One non assignable belt speed input and three assignable inputs are
standard on the motherboard (Table A-4).
Table A-4. Motherboard Inputs
Physical Assigned Function Field Mount Panel Mount

Input
Number
1 Belt Speed Input TB9 2, 4 & 5 TB2 1, 2 & 3
2 TB8 13 & 14 TB2 5 & 7
3 TB8 11 & 12 TB2 8 & 10
4 TB8 9 & 10 TB2 9 & 10
 Available options are 4 in/16 out, 16 in/4 out or 20 in/20 out by adding both
boards (Table A-5).

REC-3924 Rev M
Table A-5. Digital Input/Output Board Inputs (Installed Options)
Physical
Input Assigned Function 4IN / 16OUT Only 16IN / 4OUT Only
Number
9 J15 – 2 J16 – 17
10 J15 – 15 J16 – 5
11 J15 – 3 J16 – 18
12 J15 – 16 J16 – 6
13 J16 – 19
14 J16 – 7
15 J16 – 20
16 J16 – 8
17 J16 – 21
18 J16 – 9
19 J16 – 22
20 J16 – 10
21 J16 – 23
22 J16 – 11
23 J16 – 24
24 J16 - 12
WARNING. Changing the definition of the digital inputs may cause machinery to
start. After the user tries to change a definition, the following message appears.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT
WARNING. If the user presses CONTINUE, be aware that the action may cause
damage or injury. If the user presses ABORT, the system returns to the previous
scroll.

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Digital Outputs Digital outputs can be programmed.
Screens
The I/O Def. Scroll 5 screen shows one logical function per time, and allows the user
to assign it to a physical output.

Dig. Output def. Password: Service
Alarm: 0 NC
ENTER NC/NO NEXT
 Press the NEXT key to scroll between the logical functions.

 Press the NC/NO key to select the status of the output (NO or NC).
NO is Normally Open. Normally Open means the output is not energized in

normal conditions.
NC is Normally Closed.
 By assigning a function to 0, the function is disabled.
To program a function, follow these steps:
1. Scroll with NEXT until the function appears.
2. Enter the number of the physical output and confirm with ENTER.
3. Scroll with NC/NO until the desired mode appears.
Table A-6 shows the available logical selections that can be assigned to any
available physical output.
 Typical field wiring drawings and customer specific field wiring drawings
show Print Ready defaulted to #1 NO, Out of Range defaulted to #2 NO and
Totalizer (remote counter) defaulted to #3 NO.
 Default selections can be reassigned to any physical output, if desired.
 Logical selections should not be reassigned after the physical outputs have
been wired.
CAUTION. Logical selections return to the default if the Integrator is cold started.

REC-3924 Rev M
Table A-6. Selections Available for Physical Output
Selections Default Comments

Alarm 0 NC
Shutdown 0 NO
Ready 0 NC
High Load 0 NO Only if Load Alarm enabled
Low Load 0 NO Only if Load Alarm enabled
High Rate 0 NO Only if Rate Alarm enabled
Low Rate 0 NO Only if Rate Alarm enabled
High Speed 0 NO Only if speed Alarm enabled
Low Speed 0 NO Only if Speed Alarm enabled
Totalizer 3 NO Only if Load Out installed
Deviation Alarms 0 NC  Output becomes active if high or low rate
exceeds the setpoint.
 Rate alarms must be set to alarm in alarm
screen ALARM DEFINITIONS SCROLL 5.
 Assign physical output to any unused
output in I/O ALARM OUTPUT SCROLL
screen.
 The deviation alarm is not self-clearing.
Out of Range 2 NO  Output becomes active if high or low rate
exceeds the setpoint.
 Rate alarms do not have to be assigned in
alarm screen ALARM DEFINITIONS
SCROLL 5.
Print Ready 1 NO If NTEP is selected in the SCALE DATA
SCROLL 12 W & M Mode screen, print is
inhibited at flow rates greater than 3% of
maximum scale capacity.
Batch Preset 0 NO Only if Load Out installed.
Batch 0 NO Only if Load Out installed.
Print Ready 0 NO Only if W & M selected.
Load WTS (weights) 0 NO
Zero Ready 5 NO
 One non-assignable fault output and three assignable outputs are standard
on the motherboard (Table A-7).

REC-3924 Rev M
Table A-7. Motherboard Outputs
Physical
Output Assigned Function Field Mount Panel Mount
Number
Fault Output TB8 1 & 2 TB2 15 & 16
1 TB8 7 & 8 TB2 12 & 16
2 TB8 5 & 6 TB2 13 & 16
3 TB 8 3 & 4 TB2 14 & 16
Available options are 4in/16out, 16in/4out or 20in/20out by adding both boards (Table
A-8).
Table A-8. Digital Input/Output Board Inputs (Installed Options)
Physical
Output Assigned Function 4IN / 16OUT Only 16IN / 4OUT Only
Number
8 J15 – 17 J16 - 2
9 J15 – 5 J16 – 15
10 J15 – 18 J16 – 3
11 J15 – 6 J16 – 16
12 J15 – 19
13 J15 – 7
14 J15 – 20
15 J15 – 8
16 J15 – 21
17 J15 – 9
18 J15 – 22
19 J15 – 10
20 J15 – 23
21 J15 – 11
22 J15 – 24
23 J15 – 12
WARNING. Changing the definition of the digital output may cause machinery to
start. After the user tries to change a definition, the following message appears.

REC-3924 Rev M
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT
WARNING. If the user presses CONTINUE, be aware that the action may cause
damage or injury. If the user presses ABORT, the system returns to the previous
scroll.
Define Remote Totalizer If the Totalizer output function is assigned to an output, the I/O Def. Scroll 6 and 7
Output Screens screens allow the user to set up related parameters.
 Set the divider according to the maximum rate the scale will run.
 The divider is entered in totalization units (T.U.).
 The pulse frequency generated in normal conditions should not exceed 10
Hz.
 Higher frequencies are possible, but they do not improve accuracy.

Remote counter div. Password: Service
1
ENTER
Default 1
Min 0.01
Max 100

Remote counter pulse Password: Service
width 0.050 sec
ENTER
Default 0.1 sec

Min 0.005 sec
Max 1 sec
 Enter the pulse width in seconds of the totalizer.

 Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection.
 A higher pulse width limits the maximum frequency.
 The default 0.1 sec. is recommended for frequencies lower than 5 Hz.

REC-3924 Rev M
Clip Detector Option The clip detector option reduces flow rate errors on light loaded belts caused by
conveyor belt weight variances.
The clip detector is normally a proximity switch that senses a metal target attached to
the belt.
 In manual mode (MANUAL), the clip detector freezes the flow rate when the
clip is detected and maintains it frozen for the programmed length.
Totalization is not affected. This is the default.
 In automatic mode (AUTO), the Integrator automatically detects tare
variations and compensates for them.
If the clip detector is assigned to one digital I/O input, the I/O Def. Scroll 10 and 10A
appear.

Clip detector mode Password: Service
MANUAL
CHOICE ENTER
 Press CHOICE to scroll through the available selections (AUTO, MANUAL).

 Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
In the MANUAL mode, the user must enter the length of belt which is affected by the
belt splice. The system freezes the belt loading when the clip is detected and
maintains it frozen until the specified belt length has passed.

Clip detect. length Password: Service
00.00 ft
ENTER

Default 1.0 Ft Default 0.30 m
Min 0.5 Ft Min 0.10 m
Max 10 Ft Max 3.00 m
If the AUTO mode is selected, the system automatically detects belt weight variations
and compensates for them. The following rules apply:
 Auto Zero Tracking must be enabled. The Auto Zero Tracking then stores in

REC-3924 Rev M
memory a table of tare values which are used to compensate the tare
variations point by point.
 When the Acquire Test Duration is run in the ACQ FULL mode, the COUNT
key is not displayed because the system automatically counts the clip
detector pulses.
NOTE. For proper operation, there can only be one clip used for the entire belt
length.
Alarm Definition You can program the Integrator alarms. Process alarms, such as low and high rate,
can be set to the desired range. In addition, all alarms can be defined as one of the
Screens
modes shown in Table A-9.
Table A-9. Alarm Mode
Alarm Mode Description

 When an alarm occurs, the front panel ALARM status
indicator illuminates.
 An ALARM message flashes in the lower, right hand
RUN display.
 Pressing ALARM displays the alarm. Time and date are
also displayed if the optional COMM board is installed.
 Pressing RESET clears the alarm message if the alarm
Alarm parameter has cleared. If the alarm parameter has not
cleared, the message ACK appears when RESET is
pressed. When the alarm parameter clears, the alarm
indication clears.
 Pressing RUN at any time returns the operator to the
RUN menu.
 Alarms can be automatically printed if the print option is
enabled.
 The alarm handler operates as above, except the
READY status indicator goes off at the same time as the
ALARM status indicator comes on.
Shutdown  In the I/O definition scroll, alarm and ready can be
assigned to N/C or N/O physical outputs. The output
activates and deactivates at the same time as the front
panel status indicators.
None Alarm is deactivated.

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Rate Alarm Use Alarm Scroll 1 screen to turn on (or off) the rate alarm.
Screens
 Press the CHOICE key to make the selection (YES or NO).
 The rate alarm is off (NO) by default.
- ALARM SCROLL 1 -
Rate Alarm Password: Operator
>NO<
CHOICE ENTER
If the selection in the Alarm Scroll 1 screen was YES, enter the low and high set
points for the alarm on the Alarm Scroll 1A and 1B screens.
 Enter the desired delay time before the alarm is monitored.

 The UNITS key allows the user to specify the set points in engineering units.
 The % key selects set points in percent.
 The SET/DELAY key switches between the setpoint and the delay time.
- ALARM SCROLL 1A -
Low rate set Password: Operator
35% 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY UNITS
Default 35 % 10 sec
Min 0% 0 sec
Max 105 % 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 1B -
High rate set Password: Operator
98% 10 sec
Default 98 % 10 sec
Min 0% 0 sec
Max 150 % 90 sec

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Load Alarm Use the Alarm Scroll 2 screen to turn on (or off) the belt loading alarm.
Screens
 Press the CHOICE key to make the selection (YES or NO).
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection.
 The belt loading alarm is off by default.
- ALARM SCROLL 2 -
Load Alarm Password: Operator
>NO<
CHOICE ENTER

- ALARM SCROLL 2A -
Low load set Password: Operator
10% 10 sec
ENTER DELAY UNITS
Default 10 % 10 sec
Min 0% 0 sec
Max 105 % 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 2B -
High load set Password: Operator
100% 10 sec
ENTER DELAY UNITS
Default 100 % 10 sec

Min 0% 0 sec
Max 200 % 90 sec

REC-3924 Rev M
Define Speed Alarm Use the Alarm Scroll 3 screen to turn on (or off) the belt speed alarm.
Screens  Press the choice key to make the selection (YES or NO).
 The belt speed alarm is off by default.
- ALARM SCROLL 3 -
Speed Alarm Password: Operator
>NO<
CHOICE ENTER

- ALARM SCROLL 3A -
Low speed set Password: Operator
10% 10 sec
Default 10 % 10 sec
Min 0% 0 sec
Max 105 % 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 3B -
High speed set Password: Operator
100% 10 sec
Default 100 % 10 sec

Min 0% 0 sec
Max 150 % 90 sec
If the Speed Mode that was defined in Main Menu 2, Scale Data, is DUAL, the user
must enter the maximum acceptable difference in percent between the two speed
inputs, and the delay time before the alarm is generated (Alarm Scroll 4A).

REC-3924 Rev M
- ALARM SCROLL 4A -
Belt slip set Password: Operator
1% 10 sec
Default 1% 10 sec
Min 0% 0 sec
Max 100 % 90 sec
Setup Alarm Modes The following message on the Alarm Scroll 5 screen displays for three seconds.
Screen
- ALARM SCROLL 5 -
- ALARM DEFINITION -
Use NEXT key or
enter alarm number
After three seconds, the Alarm Number screen appears.
 Press the CHOICE soft key to select the desired mode (ALARM,
SHUTDOWN or NONE). (See Table A-9 for descriptions of the available
alarm modes.)
 Use the NEXT key to scroll between alarms, or enter the alarm number.
ALARM NUMBER # 1
Clock Fail
set at ALARM
CHOICE ENTER NEXT
Main Menu 5 – Main Menu 5 is dedicated to setup and configuration of the serial options.
Serial Options
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
COMM A PRINT

REC-3924 Rev M
 Press the COMM A soft key to set up the serial line of the optional board,
Communication A.
 Press the PRINT soft key to set up the printer output.
NOTE. Main Menu 5 does not appear unless an optional COMM A is installed.
Communication A The communication board A has one serial channel. The serial channel can be:
Screens
 Configured using jumpers as an RS232 or an RS485 channel.
 Can be used for printing or for a serial communication with an intelligent
device such as a PLC or a PC.
Two boards can be installed and programmed, typically one for the printer and one for
the supervisor.
Use the Comm A Scroll 1 through 14 screens to define the communication parameters
for the first and the second channel.
- COMM A SCROLL 1 -
Baud rate port #1 Password: Service
>9600<
CHOICE ENTER
Default 9600
Selection 110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
12900
- COMM A SCROLL 2 -
Set parity port #1 Password: Service
>No parity<
CHOICE ENTER
Default No parity
Selection Even parity
Odd parity
No parity

REC-3924 Rev M
- COMM A SCROLL 3 -
Stop bits port #1 Password: Service
>1 stop bit<
CHOICE ENTER
Default 1 Stop bit

Selection 1 Stop bit
2 Stop bit
- COMM A SCROLL 4 -
Word length port #1 Password: Service
>8 bits<
CHOICE ENTER
Default 8 bits
Selection 7 bits
8 bits
Some commonly used protocols are implemented in the system. See Communications
Protocols, REC 3949, for details. Possible selections are shown in Table A-10.
Table A-10. Communications Protocols
Communication Protocol Description

Thermo Scientific proprietary protocol.
PC-MASTER  Multi Drop
 Master Slave
A proprietary protocol of Siemens.
SIEMENS 3964R  Point-to-point
 Multi Master
A proprietary protocol of Allen Bradley.
ALLEN BRADLEY DF1  Multi Drop
 Master Slave
A proprietary protocol of AEG.
MODBUS  Multi Drop
 Master Slave
PRINTER Not a protocol, selects printer output.

REC-3924 Rev M
- COMM A SCROLL 5 -
Protocol port #1 Password: Service
>MODBUS<
CHOICE ENTER
Default MODBUS
Selection PC-MASTER
SIEMENS 3964R
ALLEN BRADLEY DF1
MODBUS
PRINTER
 If the selected protocol is not PRINTER, the COMM. A Scroll 5A through 7

screens define the ADDRESS of the device in the multi drop line, and the
access permission from the remote supervisor.
 If NONE is selected, the supervisor has full access to the device.
 If LIMITED is selected, the supervisor only accesses those variables that are
accessible with the OPERATOR password.
 If PROTECTED is selected, the unit is ready only to the supervisor.
- COMM A SCROLL 5A -
Clear to send #1 Password: Service
>disabled<
CHOICE ENTER
Default disabled
Selection disabled
enabled
- COMM A SCROLL 6 -
Address port #1 Password: Service
>1<
ENTER
Default 1
Min 1
Max 255

REC-3924 Rev M
- COMM A SCROLL 7 -
Access prot. port #1 Password: Service
>None<
CHOICE ENTER
Default None
Selection None
Limited
Protected
If a second communication board is installed, the COMM. A Scroll 8 through 14

screens appears. These screens operate exactly as the ones dedicated to the
communication board 1, including defaults and available selections.
- COMM A SCROLL 8 -
Baud rate port #2 Password: Service
>9600<
CHOICE ENTER
- COMM A SCROLL 9 -
Set parity port #2 Password: Service
>No parity<
CHOICE ENTER
- COMM A SCROLL 10 -
Stop bits port #2 Password: Service
>1 stop bit<
CHOICE ENTER
Word length port #2 Password: Service
>8 bits<
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3924 Rev M
Protocol port #2 Password: Service
>MODBUS<
CHOICE ENTER
- COMM A SCROLL 12A -

Clear to send #2 Password: Service
>disabled<
CHOICE ENTER
Address port #2 Password: Service
>1<
CHOICE ENTER
Access prot. port #2 Password: Service
>None<
CHOICE ENTER
Printer Screens The Integrator has a fully programmable printer format. Use the Printer Scroll screens
to program it to specific needs.
Handshaking Screens The system can be configured to operate in any of the following ways:
 Without any handshake (NONE). This is the default.

 This selection is used for testing purposes. It is not recommended for normal
use. If NONE is selected, the system is not able to recognize if the printer is
online or not, or if the paper is empty.
 Using the Clear to Send signal (CTS) sequence.
 This is the most commonly used protocol. CTS is a signal generated by the
printer to indicate whether it is ready to receive data or not.
 Using the XON-XOFF sequence.

REC-3924 Rev M
- PRINTER SCROLL 1 -
Handshaking Password: Service
>None<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE key to select the handshake protocol (NONE, CTS or
XON-XOF).
Different printers use different end of line patterns. Select the one you need for your
printer on the Printer Scroll 2 screen.
End of line Password: Service
>CR+LF<
CHOICE ENTER
Default CR
Selection CR
LF
CR+LF
Some printers cannot accept characters while they are printing. In some cases, the
handshake is not well controlled by the printer, so a delay at end of line is helpful.
Delay end of line Password: Service
0 sec
ENTER
Default 0 sec
Min 0 sec
Max 5 sec
A form feed character can be sent to the printer after each report to force the printer to
eject the paper. If NO is selected, a normal END OF LINE character is printed at the
end of the report.

REC-3924 Rev M
Form Feed Password: Service
>NO<
CHOICE ENTER
Default NO
Selections NO
YES
Periodical Printing If you want to generate periodical printing, enter the number of minutes, hours or days
Screens in the Printer Scroll 5 screen.
 Enter 0 to prevent periodical printing.

 Use the INTV key to switch from minutes to hours, and then to days.
Print Interval Password: Operator
0 min
ENTER INTV
Default 0 min
Min 0 min, 0 hour, 0 days
Max 59 min, 23 hours, 365 days
The system can print at specific times during the day. Enter the time you want to
obtain the printing on the Printer Scroll 6 screen.
Print time #1 Password: Operator
Time: HH:MM
ENTER ON/OFF NEXT
If 24 hours If am/pm
Default OFF OFF
Min 00:00 01:00
Max 23:59 12:59
Print Format Screens By selecting YES in the Printer Scroll 7 screen, the system is instructed to print one
line each time a new alarm condition occurs.

REC-3924 Rev M
The alarm is printed as follows:
xx-xx-xxxx yy:yyz
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
where:
 xx-xx-xxxx
Day, month and year, printed according to the local format as defined in Main
Menu 2, Display. (See the section “Define Time and Date Format Screens”.)
 yy:yyz
Hours, minutes and am/pm, printed according to the local format as defined in
Main Menu 2, Display. (See the section “Define Time and Date Format
Screens”.)
 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Alarm message. This is the same message that appears on the screen.
For example:
11-10-1998 8:14a
Clock Fail
Print alarms Password: Service
>No<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE key to select the setting (NO or YES). Alarms are not
printed, by default (NO).
There are three ways to defining the printing format.
 Use one of the predefined formats, named DEFAULT 1 and DEFAULT 2.

(See the section “Integrator Cold Start”.)
DEFAULT 2 is preselected when the weights and measures choice is NTEP.

REC-3924 Rev M
 Define your own format, using the PRINTER SCROLL 8 through 9P.
Total report format Password: Service
>Default 1<
CHOICE ENTER
 Press the CHOICE key to select a report format. The default format is
DEFAULT 1. (If the weights and measures option is selected, the default is
DEFAULT 2.)
 Select USER DEFINED if you want to set up your own format.
Default DEFAULT 1 (unless weights and measures option is

selected, then DEFAULT 2)
Selections DEFAULT 1
DEFAULT 2
USER DEFINED
If your selection is USER DEFINED, the Printer Scroll 9A through 9P screens appear
sequentially.
You can add a heading string to your report. Up to three strings can be used to add
the customer name, as well as other information that you want to include in the print
format.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9A -
Number of strings Password: Operator
3u
ENTER
Default 1
Min 0
Max 3
Define the contents of the first string on the Printer Scroll 9B screen.
 Use the alphanumeric keypad, pressing the numeric key corresponding to the
letter that you want to type.
 Every time you press a new key, the cursor moves to the right one place.
 If you need to use the same key two times in a row (for words with double
letters, for example), move the cursor right using the arrow keys (left and right

REC-3924 Rev M
soft keys).
 The default is an empty string.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9B -
Contents string #1 Password: Operator
<ENTER>
Once you have defined the string, specify where the string has to be placed on the
printed report.
The coordinates are given in the following way:
0000000000111111111122222222223...
0123456789012345678901234567890...
+------------------------------------------------> X
00|This line printed first

01|This line printed second ^
02| | DIRECTION OF
03| | PAPER
04|
05|
06|
.v
.Y
 Use the X-pos and Y-pos keys to enter the X and Y coordinates.
 By specifying 0,0, the string is not printed.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9C -
String #1 pos. Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X/Y-pos
X Y
Default 1, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
If a second string was selected, the Printer Scroll 9D and 9E screens appear.

REC-3924 Rev M
- PRINTER SCROLL 9D -
<ENTER>
- PRINTER SCROLL 9E -
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X/Y-pos
X Y
Default 2, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
If a third string was selected, the Printer Scroll 9F and 9G screen appear in sequence.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9F -
<ENTER>
- PRINTER SCROLL 9G -
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X/Y-pos
X Y
Default 3, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
A series of variables can be added in the report. Variables include:
 OPERATOR TOTAL
 MASTER TOTAL
 RESET TOTAL

REC-3924 Rev M
 DATE
 TIME
 RATE
 AVG. RATE
 RUNNING TIME
You must define a position for each variable. If you do not intend to use a variable in
the report, set its X position to 0.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9H -
Position oper. total Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 4, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9I -
Position reset total Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 5, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9J -
Position mast. total Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 6, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80

REC-3924 Rev M
- PRINTER SCROLL 9K -
Position date Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 7, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9L -
Position time Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 8, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9M -
Position rate Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 9, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9N -
Position avg. rate Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 0, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80

REC-3924 Rev M
- PRINTER SCROLL 9P -
Position running tm Password: Operator
X = ___, Y = ___
ENTER X-Pos Y-pos
X Y
Default 0, 1
Min 0, 1
Max 24, 80
Printer Screen The Print Menu is accessible by pressing the PRINT key in the Run Menu or, if more
scales are defined, in Main Menu 1. It is a single screen menu that allows the operator
to select and start a print report. (See section “Using the PRINT Key” for more
information.)
- PRINTER SCROLL -
COM #1 no data Password: Not Required
Start print TOTALS
PRINT RETURN COM
 The second line shows the status of the printer.

 The third line indicates what kind of data is printed if the PRINT key is
pressed.
 Press the COM key to select the printer (if more than one printer is installed).
 Press the PRINT key to start printing.
If you select a data type of TRAILS, the Print Audit Trails screen appears.
- PRINT AUDIT TRAIL -

Number of records
to print
ENTER PRINT EXIT
The system will print the last “N” records, beginning with the most recent entry.

REC-3924 Rev M
Main Menu 6 – Main Menu 6 is dedicated to audit trails and linearization.
Audit Trails and

Linearization
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more Password: Service
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
 Press the AUDIT TRAIL soft key to access the audit trail menus.
 Press the LINEAR soft key to access the linearization menus.
Audit Trail Screens This menu is only displayed if the Audit Trails option is installed.
Audit Trail consists of an event logger that includes:
 An event counter (000 to 999)

 The parameter description
 The date and time of the change
 The old and new value of the parameter. (Parameters can be configuration
parameters or routine calibration.)
The Audit Trail meets NIST HB 44 Category 3: Remote configuration capability.

Access may be unlimited or controlled through a password.
Events and changes can be viewed on the Integrator’s display, or they can be printed
out by an on-site printer.
The logger records the before and after setting of all configuration parameters that
affects the calibration of the scale. It also records when calibration was performed.
The event counter increments one count for each event.
Audit Trail records the time and displays the new and old data for any change in the
items in below, indicating each by an event number.
 ZERO
 SPAN
 CALIBRATION METHOD
 CHAIN WEIGHT
 TEST WEIGHT
 SCALE CAPACITY
 SCALE DIVISION
 SCALE MODEL NO.

REC-3924 Rev M
 IDLER SPACING
 INCLINATION
 LOAD CELL SIZE
 LOAD CELL SENSITIVITY
 LOAD CELL RESISTANCE
 SPEED INPUT TYPE
 DEAD BAND
 MEASURE UNITS
 REMOTE COUNTER DIVIDER
 REMOTE COUNTER DURATION
 AUTO ZERO LIMIT
 ZERO REFERENCE
 AZT DEVIATION
 AZT TRACKING RANGE
 LINEARIZATION
NOTE. Changes in zero by auto zero tracking are not recorded. However, if AZT limit
is reached, it is recorded.
- AUDIT TRAILS 1 -
Audit trails Password: Service
NO
CHOICE ENTER
Default NO
Selections NO
YES
If the Audit Trails are enabled (YES is selected), the following screen appears for a
short time (3 seconds):
- AUDIT TRAILS -
Use scroll keys or
enter trail number
After 3 seconds, the next screen appears:
- TRAIL EVENT No. 0000

hh:mm dd:mm-yyyy
nnnnnn = vvvvvvv/N
nnnnnn = vvvvvvv/O

REC-3924 Rev M
hh:mm Time of the change.
dd-mm-yyyy Date of the change.
nnnnnn Name of the parameter.
vvvvvvv/N Parameter’s new value (after the change).
vvvvvvv/O Parameter’s old value (before the change).
Time and date are shown only if an optional Communication board is installed.
The user can scroll between events that are displayed in order of date and time. The
user can also enter a number to display a specific event.
Linearization Linearization is not normally used with conveyor belt scales. In case of extreme
instances where calibration at multiple flow rates may be required, please consult the
factory.

REC-3924 Rev M
Appendix B Weighbridge Physical
Parameters
This appendix contains a listing of all weighbridges manufactured by Thermo
Scientific. Each weighbridge is assigned a code number to be entered during initial
programming of the Integrator. This code number defines the selected weighbridge’s
default parameters and enables the Integrator to calculate span calibration constants
(Calcon) for simulated calibration modes selected.
Weighbridge physical parameters can be altered by pressing the soft key DETAIL in
the Scale Data Scroll 3 screen. Scroll down to the desired parameter and enter in the
correct factor. Calcon's are calculated.
You can define a weighbridge that is not manufactured by Thermo Scientific by

entering code number 0 (zero) and pressing DETAIL in the Scale Data Scroll 3
screen. Scroll down and enter the weighbridge parameters in scroll positions 3A
through 8F.
Table B-1 shows the physical parameters and typical scale models.
Weighbridge Physical Parameters
Thermo Fisher Scientific B-1

REC-3924 Rev M
Table B-1. Weighbridge Physical Parameters
Scale Data Parameter

Scroll Positions
3 Belt Scale Code #
3A (LA) Pivot to Load Cell Distance
3B (IDL) No. of Weigh Idlers
3C (LB1) Pivot to 1st Idler Distance
3D (LB2) Pivot to 2nd Idler Distance
3E (LB3) Pivot to 3rd Idler Distance
3F (LB4) Pivot to 4th Idler Distance
3G (LB5) Pivot to 5th Idler Distance
3H (LB6) Pivot to 6th Idler Distance
3I (LE) Pivot to Test Weigh Height
3L (LC) Pivot to Test Weigh Length
3M (LF) Pivot to Carriage Height
3N (LG) Carry Roll to Carriage Height
3O No. of Load Cells
4 (LD) Idler Spacing
5 Conveyor’s Angle Degree
6 Load Cell Capacity
Typical This section includes illustrations of typical weighbridges, including:

 Model 10-20-1 (Figure B-1)
Weighbridges  Model 10-22 (Figure B-2)
Figure B-1. Weighbridge Model 10-20-1
B-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure B-2. Weighbridge Model 10-22

REC-3924 Rev M

REC-3924 Rev M
Rules for Table B-2 identifies the rules for entering the weighbridge physical parameters during
the Integrator’s initial programming.
Entering
Weighbridge
Parameters
Table B-2. Data Entry Rules
Parameter Rule
L.C. Must be entered.
Idlers Must be entered.
LA Must be entered.
LB1 Must be entered.
LB2 Defaults to LB1 if zero (0) entered.
LC Defaults to one (1) if zero (0) entered.
LD Must be entered.
LE Defaults to zero (0).
LF Defaults to zero (0).
LG Defaults to zero (0).
Tables for The tables at the end of this appendix show the default value for scale model
selections. If no value is show, that parameter is not useful for that scale model and it
Thermo Scientific is not displayed.
Weighbridges Underscored dimensions are shown in metric units of measure.

REC-3924 Rev M
Table B-3. Thermo Scientific Weighbridges
Parameters
Model LB1
L.C. LF
# Belt LA thru LC LD LE m V/V
Idlers LG
Width LB6
1 10-20-1 1 32 24 24 36 0 6.5 3.00
18-36 1 6.5
2 10-20-1 1 32 22.75 22.75 36 0 6.5 3.00
42-72 1 7
3 10-20-1 2 32 24 24 36 0 6.5 3.00
24-36 1 6.5
4 10-20-1 2 32 22.75 22.75 36 0 6.5 3.00
42-84 1 7
5 10-20-2 1 36 18 18 36 0 6.5 3.00
2 7
6 10-20-2 1 48 24 24 48 0 6.5 3.00
2 7
7 10-20-1 1 32 24 38 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
18-36 1 6.5
8 10-20-1 1 32 22.75 38 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
42-72 1 7
9 10-20-1 2 32 24 38 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
24-36 1 6.5
10 10-20-1 2 32 22.75 38 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
42-84 1 7
11 10-22 1 62 54 38 36 4.75 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 18 6.5
12 10-22 1 71 63 42 42 4.75 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
13 10-22 1 80 72 48 48 4.75 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
14 10-22 1 62 52.75 36 36 4.75 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7
15 10-22 1 71 61.75 42 42 4.75 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
16 10-22 1 80 70.75 48 48 4.75 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
17 10-22 1 62 54 72 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 18 6.5

REC-3924 Rev M
Parameters
Model LB1
L.C. LF
Idlers LG
Width LB6
18 10-22 1 71 63 81 42 4.5 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
19 10-22 1 80 72 90 48 4.5 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
20 10-22 1 62 52.75 72 36 4.5 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7
21 10-22 1 71 61.75 81 42 4.5 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
22 10-22 1 80 70.25 90 48 4.5 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
23 10-22 12 62 64 54 36 0 6.5 3.00
18-36 18 6.5
24 10-22 1 71 63 63 42 0 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
25 10-22 1 80 72 84 48 0 6.5 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
26 10-22 1 62 52.75 66 36 0 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7
27 10-22 1 71 61.75 75 42 0 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
28 10-22 1 80 70.75 84 48 0 6.5 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
29 10-20-W F 1 32 24 24 30 -2 4 3.00
1 4
30 10-20-W F 1 32 22.75 22.75 30 -2 4 3.00
1 4
31 10-20-W F 1 32 24 36 30 2 4 3.00
1 4
32 10-20-W F 1 32 22.75 36 30 2 4 3.00
1 4
33 10-17-2 2 64 54 36 36 -4.7 6.5 3.00
2 18 5 7
34 10-17-2 2 76 63 42 42 -4.7 6.5 3.00
2 21 5 7
35 10-17-2 2 88 72 48 -4.7 6.5 3.00
2 24 5 7
36 10-17-2 2 76 63 43.31 -4.7 6.5 3.00
2 23.62 5 7

REC-3924 Rev M
Parameters
Model LB1
L.C. LF
Idlers LG
Width LB6
37 10-17-2 2 88 72 48.38 -4.7 6.5 3.00
2 24.75 5 7
38 10-17-4 2 64 54 36 36 6.5 3.00
4 18 7
39 10-17-4 2 76 63 42 42 6.5 3.00
4 21 7
40 10-17-4 2 88 72 48 48 6.5 3.00
4 24 7
41 10-17-4 2 66 63 43.31 1000 6.5 3.00
4 23.62 39.37 7
42 10-17-4 2 88 72 48.31 1200 6.5 3.00
4 24.75 47.24 7
43 10-14-3 4 36 3.00
3
44 10-14-3 4 42 3.00
3
45 10-14-3 4 48 3.00
3
46
47 10-14-4 4 36 3.00
4
48 10-14-4 4 42 3.00
4
49 10-14-4 4 48 3.00
4
50 10-14-4 4 54 3.00
4
51 10-14-4 4 1000 3.00
4 39.37
52 10-14-4 4 1200 3.00
4 47.24
53 10-30 1 36 3.00
1
54 10-11 1 55.5 48 40 36 6.5 6.5 3.00
18-42 1 6.5
55 10-11 1 56.5 48 40 36 7 7 3.00
48-72 1 7

REC-3924 Rev M
Parameters
Model LB1
L.C. LF
Idlers LG
Width LB6
56 10-12 1 66 48 40 36 7 7 3.00
2 7
57 10-17-2D 2 40 24 24 48 0 6.5 3.00
2 24 7
58 10-17-2D 2 34 21 21 42 0 6.5 3.00
2 21 7
59 10-17-2D 2 28 18 18 36 0 6.5 3.00
2 18 7
60
214 10-101R- 1 1000 2.00
1 1 39.37
215 10-101R2 2 1000 2.00
1 39.37

REC-3924 Rev M
Appendix C Digital Input/Output
This appendix describes the digital inputs and outputs available for the Integrator, and
 Motherboard digital inputs and outputs

 Digital input / output board configuration
 BCD input option
Overview The Integrator has provision for up to 24 programmable digital inputs and 24
programmable digital outputs. The following inputs and outputs are located on the
mother board:
 Two speed inputs. One speed input is defaulted to a programmable input,

unless the belt slip option is installed.
 Two programmable inputs
 Three programmable outputs
 One non-programmable Thermo Scientific Micro-Tech hardware fault output.
Optional DIO boards can be added if additional I/O is required.
Motherboard The Integrator motherboard includes two speed and two programmable digital (DC)
inputs (Figure C-1). The inputs have the following characteristics:
Digital I/O
 Optically isolated
 Powered by inter +24 V DIO supply, 6 mA maximum
 Cable length: 150 ohm maximum (7500 ft of 20 AWG)
Thermo Fisher Scientific C-1

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure C-1. General Purpose Digital Inputs
The Integrator motherboard includes three programmable and one non-programmable

digital open collector outputs (Figure C-2). The outputs have the following
characteristics:
 Able to drive TTL, CMOS, or relay solenoids

 Current sinking socketed drivers
 +24 VDC internal supply, 100 mA DC maximum per output
 Failure output is “fail safe”, turns off under fault condition
Figure C-2. General Purpose Fault Output
C-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3924 Rev M
Digital In addition to the programmable digital inputs and outputs on the Integrator
motherboard, you can add optional digital I/O (DIO) expansion boards to the system.
Input/Output
Board The following DIO boards are available:
Configuration  Input board (16 inputs/4 outputs)

 Output board (16 outputs/4 inputs)
You can add both boards for 20 inputs/20 outputs.
Figure C-3. Digital Input Board

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure C-4. Digital Output Board

REC-3924 Rev M
Both DIO boards provide isolated contact closure inputs and 24 volt current sinking
(default) or current sourcing (consult factory) isolated outputs.
The DIO input board connector J16 is a male 25 pin sub-miniature D connector and
the DIO output board connector J15 is a female connector.
Internal or external 24 VDC power for the DIO boards is controlled by selectable
jumpers OP1 and OP2, located on the lower right hand side of the DIO boards (Figure
C-3 and Figure C-4). All inputs and outputs use the same selected power supply.
Table C-1 lists the jumper positions.
Table C-1. DIO Board Power Supply Jumpers
Power Source OP1 OP2

Internal A A (Default)
External B B
The isolated contact closure inputs are activated by completing the circuit from the
input to the negative side of the 24 VDC supply. Approximately 6 mA of current flows
out of each input during contact closure.
The outputs of the DIO boards use 2803 current sinking (default) type ICs. The output
ICs are installed in sockets to allow replacing the output IC only, rather than the board,
if the IC is damaged.
The output ICs can be replaced with 2981 type ICs for current sourcing applications.
Wire jumpers W1 through W4 must be relocated for current sourcing (Figure C-3 and
Figure C-4). In most cases, it is recommended that the boards be returned to the
factory for converting from current sinking (default) to current sourcing. See table lists
the jumper positions.
Table C-2. Wire Jumper Positions
Current W1 W2 W3 W4
Sinking Yes No Yes No (Default)
Sourcing No Yes No Yes

REC-3924 Rev M
Board Specifications The following specifications apply to the 16 in/4 out DIO board.
1. Sixteen (16) programmable inputs, with the following characteristics:
 Powered by internal +24 V DIO supply, 6 mA maximum
2. Four (4) programmable outputs, with the following characteristics:
3. Connector, with the following characteristics:
 25 pin D connector (male)
 Connector is interchangeable with a 20 or 22 pin subminiature D connector
dimensionally complying with MIL-C-24308
The following specifications apply to the 4 in/16 out DIO board.

1. Four (4) programmable inputs, with the following specifications:
 Powered by internal +24 V DIO supply, 6 mA maximum
2. Sixteen (16) programmable outputs, with the following specifications:
3. Connector, with the following characteristics:
 25 pin D connector (female)
 Connector is interchangeable with a 20 or 22 pin subminiature D connector
dimensionally complying with MIL-C-24308

REC-3924 Rev M
Figure C-5. Digital Input/Outputs

REC-3924 Rev M
BCD Input Option Load sizes for load out or batching applications can be remotely entered by BCD. An
optional Load Out input output board is required.
Figure C-6 shows wiring details.
Figure C-6. BCD Input Wiring

REC-3924 Rev M
Appendix DMiscellaneous
Documents
Please request the following additional documentation from
uscoo.eng.services@thermofisher.com.
 Load Out – REC 3910

 Communication Protocols – REC 3913
 Micro-Tech 2301 Addendum – REC 4257
Thermo Fisher Scientific D-1

REC-3924 Rev M

3. GUÍA
A DE
E RE
EFE
EREN
NCIA
A

MicroTech Integrator
Quick Reference Guide
REC‐3914 Rev G P/N 049771
Revision History
Revision Number Date Revised ECO Number Revision Specifics

Revision A September 1995
Revision B January 1996
Revision C February 1997
Revision D February 1998
Revision E January 1999
Revision F February 2003
Revision G March 2012 2958 Graphics, format and phone numbers
This document is confidential and is the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific. It may not be copied or
reproduced in any way without the express written consent of Thermo Fisher Scientific. This document
also is an unpublished work of Thermo Fisher Scientific. Thermo Fisher Scientific intends to, and is
maintaining the work as confidential information. Thermo Fisher Scientific also may seek to protect
this work as an unpublished copyright. In the event of either inadvertent or deliberate publication,
Thermo Fisher Scientific intends to enforce its rights to this work under the copyright laws as a
published work. Those having access to this work may not copy, use, or disclose the information in
this work unless expressly authorized by Thermo Fisher Scientific.
Disclaimer
Though the information provided herein is believed to be accurate, be advised that the information
contained herein is not a guarantee for satisfactory results. Specifically, this information is neither a
warranty nor guarantee, expressed or implied, regarding performance, merchantability, fitness, or
any other matter with respect to the products, and recommendation for use of the product/process
information in conflict with any patent. Please note that Thermo Fisher Scientific reserves the right to
change and/or improve the product design and specifications without notice

What this Guide This Quick Reference guide contains information for setting up
the Micro-Tech™ 2000 Integrator and calibrating it to your belt
Contains scale. It is intended as a supplement to the operating manual
provided with your belt scale system. Information presented here
assumes your belt scale system has been set up in accordance to
the installation data presented in your Thermo Scientific system
manual. The manual contains more detailed information on the
Micro-Tech™ 2000 and we encourage you to read it in its entirety.
Key Descriptions Three types of keys are used to change the Integrator's displays:
Soft Keys: The three keys located directly below the display
window are known as "soft" keys. These keys
have two types of functions which are
determined by the control keys.
Control Keys: The four control keys located on the right side
of the display are used to run the Integrator,
scroll up or down to adjacent menus, or permit
entry into menu access modes.
Numeric Keys: The numeric keys, which include a decimal point

and clear key, enter numeric data or remove
wrong entries. All numeric entries have internal
minimum and maximum limits.
Thermo Fisher Scientific 1

REC-3914 Rev G
Programming the When power is first applied to the Integrator, the system steps the
operator through menus and options that bring the system to a
MicroTech 2000 weighing state. The soft keys, numeric keys and the scroll control
keys are used to select choices. The RUN and MENU control
Integrator keys are inactive during this procedure.
1. Turn the belt scale conveyor belt on. Run the conveyor
empty during setup and calibration.
2. Inside the Integrator's front panel are two AC voltage

selection slide switches. SW1 and SW2 are located on the
right center of the mother board.
AC INPUT FUSE SW1 SW2

VOLTAGE F1 (SB) SETTING SETTING
Default 110 0.5A 110 110/220
120 0.5A 110 120/240
220 0.25A 220 110/220
240 0.25A 220 120/240
First, set SW1 for nominal 110 VAC or 220 VAC. Next,
set SW2 close to the actual input voltage.
Example: Input Voltage = 117 VAC

SW1 = 110
SW2 = 120/240
3. The programming mode begins with the following

instructional screens:
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language key to
continue to
ESP USA
Press the language key.

REC-3914 Rev G
Initial Scale setup
and calibration
Press down SCROLL
Press the down scroll key.
Press key under HELP “HELP” is flashing

for more information
HELP
Press the HELP soft key.
Key with dot (soft

key) performs action
of word above it.
MORE RETURN
When RETURN is pressed, the user is returned to the

previous screen. Pressing MORE advances the system to
the next screen.
Use down SCROLL key

to advance through
the menus.
MORE RETURN
Pressing MORE or RETURN will revert the screen back

to previous screens in this series. By pressing the down
scroll key, you will enable the system to proceed through
the menus needed for system setup.
NOTE: Menus appearing during initial setup may operate

differently in normal operation.
4. This setup screen gives the operator the choice of

displaying English, Metric or mixed units of weights and
measures. The defaulted (selected) value is English.
2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3914 Rev G
Units:
English Selected
CHOICES ENTER HELP
Press the ENTER soft key for measurements expressed in

English, or CHOICES soft key to select the Metric
standard of measurement or mixed (a combination of
both). Scroll down.
5. Dependent upon the type of measurement programmed

in Display Scroll 1, units of weight can now be entered:
Tons, Long Tons, Pounds or Tonnes, Kilograms. The
English default value is tons; the Metric value is tonnes.
Totalization Units
> Tons <
CHOICES ENTER
Press the ENTER soft key to accept the selected value, or

CHOICES soft key to select other units. Scroll down.
6. Units used for parameters expressed in length are selected

here. Selections are only available if mixed units are in
US.
Length Units
> Feet <
CHOICES ENTER
Press ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or

CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to
confirm your selection. Scroll down.
7. The rate will be displayed according to the units selected

here.

REC-3914 Rev G
Rate Units
> Tph <
CHOICES ENTER
Press ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or

8. The units used for entering the load cell capacity are
specified here. In this particular case, the use of English
or Metric units is always allowed, even if MIXED is not
specified.
Load Cell Units
> Pounds <
CHOICES ENTER
Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or

9. The next value to be entered is the scale capacity using a

decimal in units of tenths. Refer to the System Data Sheet
under "Conveyor Data - Capacity" in the front of your
system manual for your scale capacity. Use the numeric
keys to enter the maximum scale capacity. Press ENTER
to confirm. Scroll down.
Max. scale capacity
500.0 Tph
ENTER
10. The decimal point location (scale division size) may be

changed if required.

REC-3914 Rev G
Scale divisions
> 0.1 <
CHOICES ENTER
Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default divisions,

or the CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press
ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.
11. By entering the code number of your Thermo Scientific

scale on the next screen, the Integrator will automatically
calculate parameters of the system such as number of load
cells and number of weigh idlers. This entry will also be
used for internal calibration calculations. The default code
number is 1, which corresponds to the belt scale model
10-20-1. Refer to System Data Sheet in the front of your
system manual for your belt scale code number.
Belt scale code #
>1<
ENTER DETAIL
Press ENTER to accept the displayed selection or enter

your belt scale code and press ENTER. If ENTER is
pressed, scrolls 3A to 3M are not displayed. Scroll down
to accept the carriage parameter defaults.
Press DETAIL to force the following scrolls 3A to 3M

even if ENTER was pressed. Scroll down to accept the
default or enter the actual parameter through the numeric
keys and press ENTER. Scroll down.
Enter "0" if you want to define the carriage. This should

only be done for carriages other than Thermo Scientific's.
12. The following screens 3A through 3M are only displayed

if OTHER or DETAIL were pressed.
Refer to Appendix A, Weighbridge/Carriage Parameters,

in your manual. All dimensions should be measured to
within 0.032 (1/32)" (1 mm).

REC-3914 Rev G
a. Parameter LA: pivot to load cell distance. For
carriages which do not have a pivot, enter zero.
Enter the distance.
Pivot to load cell
distance: 000.00 In
ENTER
Press ENTER and scroll down.
b. Enter the number of weigh idlers on your system.
# of weigh idlers
ENTER
c. Parameter LB: pivot to first idler distance.
Enter the distance.
Pivot to 1st idler
distance: 000.00 In
ENTER
NOTE: Screens 3D through 3H appear if the number of weigh

idlers entered in Step b above was more than one. Maximum
number is six.
d. Parameter LE: pivot centerline to test weight

height. For carriages which do not have a pivot,
enter zero.

REC-3914 Rev G
Enter the distance and sign.
height 000.00 In
ENTER +/-
e. Parameter LC: pivot centerline to test weight

length. For carriages which do not have a pivot,
enter zero.
Enter the distance.
length 000.00 In
ENTER
f. Parameter LF: pivot centerline to carriage height.

For carriages which do not have a pivot, enter
zero.
Pivot to carriage
height: 000.00 In
ENTER
g. Parameter LG: weigh idler carry roll centerline to

carriage height. For carriages which do not have a
pivot, enter zero.
Enter the distance.

REC-3914 Rev G
Roll to carriage
height: 000.00 In
ENTER
h. Enter the number of load cells in your carriage.
Enter the number.
# of load cells
0
ENTER
13. Using the numeric keys, enter the spacing recorded in

"Determining Installation Parameters" in your manual and
press ENTER. Only a single value may be entered from a
minimum of 1" (20mm) to 120" (2500mm). The default
value is 36" (1000mm).
Idler spacing:
36.00 In
ENTER HELP
14. Enter the angle of incline recorded in "Determining

Installation Parameters" in your manual using the numeric
keys. Degree field is 0 to +/-25 with 0 being the default
value.

REC-3914 Rev G
Conveyor’s angle”
0.0 Degrees
ENTER +/-
15. The units of measure for this entry were determined in

Step 8. Under some conditions, the operator may need to
convert units to accommodate new load cell specifics.
The range of input permitted is 10 to 15,000 pounds or 5
to 5000 kilograms. Default value is 250 pounds
(113,4Kg). See the System Data Sheet in your manual for
the size of load cell.
Load cell size:
250.0 Lbs
ENTER HELP
16. This menu is used to set the degree of load cell sensitivity
that will be used in any future R-Cal calibrations which
calculate a span number. The minimum range is 0.5;
maximum is 3.5. Default value is based on scale type
selected. Press the numerical keys to change the value.
Load cell sens.:
3.000 mV/V
ENTER HELP
17. Load cell resistance is entered on this screen. The

resistance for each load cell has been recorded on the
System Data Sheet of your manual. (It is also stamped on
the load cell cable.) Enter the ohms for each load cell;
press the down scroll key to enter ohms for two, three, or

REC-3914 Rev G
four load cells. The system default is 350.000 ohms with a
range of 10 to 1000 ohms.
Load cell 1
Res.: 350.000 Ohms
ENTER HELP
18. The speed input screen allows the operator to select either
the single speed sensor input (default value), the dual
speed sensor input (requires two speed sensors to provide
extra safety against speed sensor failure) or a simulated
value using an internal timer. Simulation allows operation
without a speed sensor. When simulated speed is selected,
a conveyor running input is required (refer to the field
wiring diagram).
Speed input
> single <
CHOICE ENTER
Scroll down after entering the speed input.
19. When the display options and scale data have been set up,
the operator must enter the conveyor's belt length and
establish test duration for all simulated calibrations. The
"Acquire" test function calibrates the belt to the system.
Zeroing and spanning are the most accurate when done
over complete passes of the belt. The system also
calculates a new speed prescale value.

Establish test
duration
ACQUIRE MANUAL
ACQUIRE is the recommended selection.

REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
REC-3914 Rev G
a. Select the method of belt length measurement.
PARTIAL is selected when the belt is hard to
measure, but may be less accurate than selecting
FULL. When selecting FULL, use a 100 foot tape
to measure belt length to the nearest .1 foot.
Reference a fixed point (an idler) on the conveyor
when counting belt revolutions. See "Determining
Installation Parameters" in your manual for the
recorded conveyor belt length.
ACQUIRE TEST DUR

Choose belt length
measurement method
FULL PARTIAL HELP
FULL is the recommended selection.
b. If FULL has been selected, the following screen

appears. If PARTIAL is selected, proceed to Step
19 c.
Enter length of one

belt revolution.
length: 1000.0 Ft
ABORT ENTER HELP
There is a minimum length of 1.0 feet (0.5 m) and

maximum of 10,000.0 feet (3000 m) allowed.
Enter the length recorded in "Determining
Installation Parameters" in your manual using the
numeric keys. Press ENTER. The default value is
1,000 feet (200.0 m). Pressing ABORT returns the
screen to CAL DATA SCROLL 4. When
measuring the total conveyor belt length, mark the
belt so it is at full speed when it passes the fixed
point.
c. The PARTIAL (belt length measurement)

selection enables the operator to acquire test
duration without the entire belt length
measurement.

REC-3914 Rev G
CAUTION: THIS OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED
WHEN BELT LENGTHS EXCEED 1000 FEET.
By using two marks on the belt which are a known

distance apart (minimum 200 feet or 60 meters)
and determining the number of speed sensor
pulses within that distance, the leading mark can
be used to determine the actual length of the belt.

two marks on belt
Length: 200.0 Ft
ABORT ENTER HELP
There is a minimum length of 1.0 feet (0.5 m) and

maximum length of 1000 feet (3000 m) allowed.
The default value is 200 feet (50 m). Pressing
ABORT returns the screen to CAL DATA
SCROLL 11.
20. After the length of one revolution of belt has been entered
in the Step 19 b menu, the system automatically moves to
the following screen which prompts the operator to press
START when the mark passes the reference point.
The belt must be running at its maximum speed before

executing this function. If not, the speed prescale will be
improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
ABORT START HELP
21. When START is pressed above, the system automatically

moves to the next instructional screen. The operator
presses COUNT each time the mark passes the reference
point until both of the following conditions are met: 3
revolutions of the belt or more than 6 minutes. When the
last revolution passes the mark, the operator must press
COUNT followed by pressing DONE.
When START is pressed above, the zero cal LED

REC-3914 Rev G
illuminates and an unassisted zero calibration starts and
continues until DONE is pressed.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
ABORT COUNT DONE
22. When test duration test is finished, the new values for
length of belt and time are displayed.
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
New values for test duration and speed prescale have been
installed.
Press CONTINUE.
23. After test duration has been determined, and the scale has
been zeroed, the integrator performs a calibration of the
scale. The scale is calibrated using the parameters just
entered. After this, the R CAL (electronic calibration
resistor) is used to check the integrity of the load cell.
During this time, the following screen is displayed:
CALIBRATION
IN
PROGRESS
When the calibration procedure is completed, the

following message is displayed:
SCALE CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start,
or MENU for scrolls.

REC-3914 Rev G
In case the load cell is not connected or a failure is
detected, the following message appears.
SCALE NOT CALIBRATED

Press RUN to start,
or MENU for scrolls.
The field data entered during this procedure enabled the

Micro-Tech 2000 to perform an unassisted zero balance
and span calibration. Assuming no mistakes were made,
the scale is calibrated and is ready for use at this time.
NOTE: The span number was calibrated from the data that was
entered during this initial calibration setup procedure. This span
number is based on a perfect mechanical alignment of the scale
and its adjacent idlers. Therefore, verify this by performing a
material calibration or by performing a span calibration
procedure.
Zero Calibrate The zeroing process is implemented as a machine directed

procedure. Press the MENU soft key until Main Menu 1 appears.
Press the ZERO CAL soft key. Pressing RUN at any time returns
the integrator to the Run mode.
1. Auto Zero
- ZERO CAL - Password: Operator

press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Pressing MANUAL advances to Step 2, Manual Zero.
The belt must be running during Auto Zero, since a

complete zeroing procedure requires at least one full
revolution of the belt to be averaged.
Pressing EXIT returns the screen to Main Menu 1.
When START is pressed, the following screen is

displayed:

REC-3914 Rev G
AUTO ZEROING
Time remaining 0000
Rate 000.00 Tph
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Zero, resolution of the total is ten times

higher than normal. The number of seconds in line 2 is
calculated based on the current speed, and corresponds to
the time remaining for completing the test. If the belt is
not running at the moment the test is started, or it is
stopped during the test, a message is displayed, indicating
the procedure has been aborted.

Calibration aborted
EXIT
Pressing EXIT returns to the beginning of the test. When

zero is reached, the system automatically displays the
following screen:
AUTO ZERO COMPLETE “COMPLETE” is

Error ±000.00 % flashing
Change zero ?
YES NO ADV
The soft key, ADV, changes from Error % to

Accumulated Weight. The percentage of error is related
to the scale capacity.
Pressing NO returns the screen to Main Menu 1. If YES

is pressed, the zero number is changed. The screen
displays the new and old zeroing numbers.
ZERO # CHANGED
New zero # 00000
Old zero # 00000
RUN MENU ADV

REC-3914 Rev G
ADV changes from Old Zero to Rate, to Accumulated
Weight and to Error %. Record readings for future
reference.
Press the MENU soft key to return to Main Menu 1 or

press RUN for normal operation.
2. Manual Zero
This menu allows the operator to directly enter a zero

level. The current running rate is displayed to the
operator. Performing any AUTO ZERO functions
overwrites values entered here. The allowable range is 0
to 120000. The default is set by the system.
- MANUAL ZERO - Password: Operator

Rate 000.00 tph
Zero # 00000
ENTER EXIT ADV
Press ENTER to confirm the new zero number. The

ADV only appears if Auto Zero Track has been selected
in the "CALIB DATA" scroll. See Main Menu 1 in your
instruction manual for operation. Press EXIT to return to
Main Menu 1 or press RUN for normal operation.
Span Calibrate This function is implemented as a machine directed procedure.

Press the MENU soft key until Main Menu 1 appears. Press the
SPAN CAL soft key. Pressing RUN returns the integrator to the
Run mode.
1. Auto Span
The text displayed in the following screens, depend on

which method of simulated calibration was selected in
Main Menu 2, "CALIB DATA" scroll.
- AUTO SPAN R Cal - Password: Operator

press START.
START EXIT MANUAL

REC-3914 Rev G
Pressing MANUAL advances to Step 2, Manual Span.
After START is pressed, there is no totalization, the R-Cal

relay is energized and a three second delay is used for
stabilize. The operator must insure the belt is running
empty before pressing start.
By pressing the EXIT key, the system returns to Main

Menu 1.
When START is pressed, the following screen appears:
AUTO SPANNING
Time remaining 0000
Rate 000.0 Tph
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Span, the resolution of the total is ten times

higher than during normal work. The time remaining
shown in line two is calculated upon the current speed,
and it is based on the test duration.
If the belt is not running at the moment the test is started,

or it is stopped during the test, a message is displayed,
indicating the procedure has been aborted.

Calibration aborted
EXIT
Pressing EXIT returns to the beginning of the test. When

zero time is reached, the system automatically displays the
following screen:
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE “COMPLETE” is

Error ±00.00 % flashing
Change span?
YES NO ADV

REC-3914 Rev G
Pressing ADV advances the screen to Accumulated
Weight, Cal Con, Material Factor and back to Error %. If
the Material Factor is INVALID (never acquired before),
it is not displayed; if displayed, see Main Menu 1 in your
instruction manual. Pressing NO returns the screen to
Main Menu 1.
If YES is pressed, the following screen is displayed:
SPAN # CHANGED
New span # 000000
Old span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
ADV changes from Error % to Accumulated Weight,

Calcon, Old Span, Material factor (only if not INVALID).
Pressing REPEAT restarts auto spanning.
Record readings for future reference after final span

change.
Press RUN for normal operation.
2. Manual Span
This menu allows direct entry of a span value. Minimum

entry is 500000, maximum is 9000000.
- MANUAL SPAN -
Rate 000.0 Tph
Span # 00000000
MENU ENTER ADV
Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Pressing MENU returns the screen to Main Menu 1.
Pressing RUN returns to normal operation.

REC-3914 Rev G
See your system manual for complete information on Micro-
Tech™ 2000 Integrator installation, operation, maintenance,
and parts ordering.
Ordering Other Micro-Tech 2000 manuals are available from Thermo

Scientific. For fast service and price information, please fax or
Manuals telephone:
Telephone: 800-445-3503
Fax: 763-783-2525
Service: 800-445-3503
Parts: 800-445-3503

REC-3914 Rev G

4. INT
TEGR
RAD
DORE
ES DE
D
M RO-T
MICR TEC
CH 2000
2 0

Micro-Tech 2000
Integrators
Model 2001, 2101, 2301, 2201
REC 3949 Rev H Part #050576
II
III
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE SOFTWARE VERSION

A OCTOBER 1996
B MAY 1997
C JANUARY 1998
D SEPTEMBER 1998
E MARCH 2000 XX.00.03.05
F MARCH 2001 XX.00.03.07
G JUNE 2001 XX.00.03.08
H AUGUST 2002
IV
COPYRIGHT 1996, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001 BY THERMO SCIENTIFIC
THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL AND IS THE PROPERTY OF THERMO SCIENTIFIC

("RAMSEY"). IT MAY NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED IN ANY WAY WITHOUT THE
EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF RAMSEY. THIS DOCUMENT ALSO IS AN UNPUBLISHED
WORK OF RAMSEY. RAMSEY INTENDS TO AND IS MAINTAINING THE WORK AS
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. RAMSEY ALSO MAY SEEK TO PROTECT THIS WORK AS AN
UNPUBLISHED COPYRIGHT. IN THE EVENT OF EITHER INADVERTENT OR DELIBERATE
PUBLICATION, RAMSEY INTENDS TO ENFORCE ITS RIGHTS TO THIS WORK UNDER THE
COPYRIGHT LAWS AS A PUBLISHED WORK. THOSE HAVING ACCESS TO THIS WORK MAY
NOT COPY, USE OR DISCLOSE THE INFORMATION IN THIS WORK UNLESS EXPRESSLY
AUTHORIZED BY RAMSEY.
PLEASE READ AND OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS FOUND THROUGHOUT THIS MANUAL.
DANGER
FAILURE TO OBSERVE WILL CAUSE VERY SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
WARNING
FAILURE TO OBSERVE COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION
FAILURE TO OBSERVE MAY CAUSE MINOR OR MODERATE PERSONAL INJURY

OR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
V
RAMSEY PRODUCTS
MICRO-TECH 2000 INTEGRATORS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Protocol Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2.0 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 COMM A BOARD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3.0 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 PRINT FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.4 Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.5 Audit Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 COMMUNICATION SET-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.1 Clock/Calendar Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.2 COMM A and PRINT Scroll Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.3 Multidrop Operator Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.4 Printer Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.5 Define Printing Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3.6 Setting the Printer Inhibit Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.7 The PRINT Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.8 Additional Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.9 Main Menu 5 - Permanent Scroll Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(continued)
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
3.4 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

3.4.1 Registers Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.5 PC-MASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.5.2 Registers Mapping for PC-Master Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.6 SIEMENS 3964R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.6.2 Register Mapping for Siemens 3964R Protocol . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.7 MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.7.2 Register Mapping for Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.8 ALLEN-BRADLEY DF1 (PLC-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.8.2 Register Mapping for DF1 Allen-Bradley (PLC-5) . . . . . . . 3-76
4.0 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
5.0 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
VII
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE
2-1 COMM A Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-2 Model 2000 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 Micro-Tech 2101 Integrator, Serial Connection RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 Micro-Tech 2101 Integrator, Serial Connection RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE
2-1 COMM A Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
APPENDIX
NO. TITLE
A/1 Field Wiring Drawings
VIII
CHAPTER 1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL
The Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator is a bus-based microprocessor instrument that can be
optionally equipped with one or two COMM A serial communication boards. Each COMM
A board has one serial channel that can be configured according to the following
standards.
! RS423/RS232C For point to point asynchronous bidirectional communications,
maximum 50 feet (15 m). Modem capability.
! RS485/RS422 For point to point or multidrop 4 wire bidirectional
communications, maximum 4000 feet (1200 m).
! Current Loop For high immunity bidirectional asynchronous communications.
Passive only.
All of the above are optically isolated.
COMM A boards can be installed in any available mother board expansion slot. After
installing the board and power has been restored, the instrument automatically detects the
new board and adds the communication set-up scrolls to the Main Menu scrolls. The
Micro-Tech refers to the COMM A board installed in the lower numbered slot as COM 1,
and the second board (if installed) as COM 2.
Two COMM A boards may be installed; one can be set up for printing, the other one for
transferring data to and from other intelligent devices such as computers and PLC's. The
system cannot support two printers or two COMM lines.
Each COMM A board contains a perpetual clock/calendar circuit with battery backup. The
battery is located on the mother board and is the same battery used for system memory
backup. The system automatically detects and uses the clock calendar circuit of the first
board and ignores the second.
Time and date set-up screens become visible after the COMM board is installed.
The Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator COMM option meets the year 2000 requirements.
1-1
1.2 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
When a COMM line is set up for communication (not for a printer), the system is able to
send and receive data to and from another device connected to the COMM line. The
COMM option comes with the following software communication protocols already built in:
- PC-Master A Ramsey proprietary protocol, multidrop.
- Modbus An AEG proprietary protocol, multidrop. The COMM option only
contains a subset of the protocol as specified in this manual.
- Allen-Bradley A proprietary protocol, multidrop. The COMM option only contains a
subset of the protocol in the PLC-5 version of it, as specified in this
manual.
- 3964R A Siemens proprietary protocol, single point.
The hardware can be configured (through jumpers on the COMM board) to one of the
three standards as listed in the previous paragraph. However, only the RS485/RS422
standard allows multidrop communications, RS232C and Current Loop can only be used
in point to point mode. This does not prevent the use of a protocol; it only prevents
physically connecting the Micro-Tech 2000 to more than one device.
CAUTION
The communication protocols have been implemented and tested as
described in this document or in other referenced documents. It is the
intention of Ramsey to provide all the necessary information and help
the user to connect the instrument to other compatible devices.
However, because most of the protocols are specific to other
manufacturers, Ramsey declines any responsibility for any malfunction
that may occur when connecting the instrument to devices of other
manufacturers, unless tested and approved by Ramsey.
1.2.1 Protocol Rules
The communication protocol allows a remote intelligent device to read and
eventually write information from and to the Micro-Tech 2000. For convenience,
the information is organized in a set of registers as listed in this document.
During the communication activity, the Micro-Tech 2000 always acts as Slave,
meaning it responds to a request from a Master device on the line, but never
attempts to send messages out.
The following rules apply:
a. The Micro-Tech 2000 responds only if the message is completely received.
b. The Micro-Tech 2000 reads the message and looks for the address, which is
contained into an address byte in the query package. The message is then
processed only if the address matches the one specified in the set-up data of
the Micro-Tech 2000, otherwise it is ignored.
c. When the system receives a message, the integrity of the message is
checked. An answer-back message is prepared if the message is formally
correct.
1-2
d. When a message containing a variable to be written in memory is received,
the system checks the correctness of the message and, if it is correct,
immediately sends the answer-back message. This does not always mean
the data is written in memory. The system first checks the register number
(which must correspond to a valid address of a variable), then the minimum
and maximum limits, and then the password. If data can be accepted, it is
stored in memory and the success flag is set to 0 (no error). If not, it is set to
1. To know if the last variables sent have been stored, the Master checks
(reads) the success flag contained in a read only register.
The following procedure applies:
- The Host sends data to the Micro-Tech 2000.
- The Host waits at least 100 ms.
- The Host reads the success flag. It should be 0.
Some data is read only, some is read write, and some is write only.
WARNING
In all cases, the maximum number of words the system can transfer is
limited to 41 per time. Requests of registers in excess of 41 are
considered errors and do not generate an answer.
1.3 PRINTER
When a COMM line is set up for printing, the system prints out data in different ways,
depending on the set-up. Print menus become visible that allow the user to define when
and in which format the data is printed.
1. Periodical printouts at predefined intervals, as well as at predefined times of day, or
on command is possible.
2. The format of the printouts is selectable between a number of predefined formats,
plus a fully programmable user defined format. In this particular case, the user is
able to easily format the printout to fit into any pre-printed ticket or form, without the
need of special software.
1-3
1.4 WARRANTY
THERMO SCIENTIFIC
WARRANTY
The seller agrees, represents, and warrants that the equipment delivered hereunder shall be free
from defects in material and workmanship. Such warranty shall not apply to accessories, parts, or
material purchased by the seller unless they are manufactured pursuant to seller's design, but shall
apply to the workmanship incorporated in the installation of such items in the complete equipment.
To the extent purchased parts or accessories are covered by the manufacturer's warranty, seller
shall extend such warranty to buyer.
Seller's obligation under said warranty is conditioned upon the return of the defective equipment,
transportation charges prepaid, to the seller's factory in Minneapolis, Minnesota, and the
submission of reasonable proof to seller prior to return of the equipment that the defect is due to
a matter embraced within seller's warranty hereunder. Any such defect in material and
workmanship shall be presented to seller as soon as such alleged errors or defects are discovered
by purchaser and seller is given opportunity to investigate and correct alleged errors or defects and
in all cases, buyer must have notified seller thereof within one (1) year after delivery, or one (1) year
after installation if the installation was accomplished by the seller.
Said warranty shall not apply if the equipment shall not have been operated and maintained in
accordance with seller's written instructions applicable to such equipment, or if such equipment
shall have been repaired or altered or modified without seller's approval; provided, however, that
the foregoing limitation of warranty insofar as it relates to repairs, alterations, or modifications, shall
not be applicable to routine preventive and corrective maintenance which normally occur in the
operation of the equipment.
"EXCEPT FOR THOSE WARRANTIES SPECIFICALLY CONTAINED HEREIN, SELLER
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT DELIVERED
HEREUNDER, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR USE. THE SOLE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING OUT OF THE WARRANTY CONTAINED
HEREIN SHALL BE EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO BREACH OF THOSE WARRANTIES. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE WARRANTIES SET OUT ABOVE
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE ACCESSORY,
PART OR MATERIAL WITH A SIMILAR ITEM FREE FROM DEFECT, AND THE CORRECTION
OF ANY DEFECT IN WORKMANSHIP. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES."
FIELD SERVICE
Purchaser agrees to underwrite the cost of any labor required for replacement; including time,
travel, and living expenses of Ramsey Field Service Engineer at closest factory base.
THERMO SCIENTIFIC
501 90th Avenue N.W.
Phone: (763) 783-2500
Fax: (763) 783-2525
1-4
CHAPTER 2.0
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the installation procedure and hardware configuration for the
communications option. If the communications option was installed at the factory, it may
not be necessary to continue with this chapter. Proceed to Chapter 3.0, Operation.
2.2 COMM A BOARD INSTALLATION

To install the COMM A board(s), proceed as follows:
1. Select the jumper positions on the COMM A board for the desired communication
standard. Below is a table which summarizes the jumper positions for selection of
the electrical interface. Refer to Figure 2-1 for jumper locations.
TABLE 2-1
COMM A BOARD JUMPERS
JUMPERS
RS-232 "A" "A" "A" "A" "A" "B"
RS-485 "B" "A" "B" "B" "MDP" "TRM" [Default)
20 mA "B" "B" "A" "A" "A" "C"
TABLE "MDP" TABLE "TRM"

FOR RS-485 ONLY FOR RS-485 ONLY
OP5 OP6
"A" NORMAL "A" TERMINATED
"B" MULTIDROP "B" NOT TERMINATED
2. Open the Micro-Tech wall mount enclosure and turn power off at the mains, or
remove panel mount enclosure from the panel and remove top cover allowing
access to the mother board.
3. Remove the field mating connector. Wire the connector per the supplied field wiring
diagram or install field terminal board cable (wall mount only).
4. Remove the hex head mounting screw from the connector end of the COMM board.
5. Insert the COMM board in any available expansion slot on the mother board (see
Figure 2-2).
2-1
COMM A BOARD
FIGURE 2-1
2-2
MODEL 2000 MOTHER BOARD
FIGURE 2-2
6. Insert the hex head screw through the chassis and tighten.
7. Install the wired mating connector on the COMM board connector.
8. Reinstall panel mount enclosure in the panel.
9. Turn power back on. The following screen appears when power is applied and
remains on for 10 seconds.
-SLOT # n CHANGED
Acquire new
configuration ?
YES NO
The screen disappears after 10 seconds if the question is not answered, and the
Micro-Tech 2000 assumes the answer is NO. "HW CONFIG. CHANGED" alarm is
on and cannot be reset. The above screen appears each time power is cycled if the
question is not answered.
Answer YES because this is a hardware configuration change.
10. This completes the installation procedure.
11. Set-up data for the newly installed COMM board must now be entered. Proceed to
Chapter 3.0, Operation.
2-3
MICRO-TECH 2101 INTEGRATOR
SERIAL CONNECTION RS232
FIGURE 2-3
2-4
MICRO-TECH 2101 INTEGRATOR
SERIAL CONNECTION RS485
FIGURE 2-4
2-5
CHAPTER 3.0
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
The Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator is a bus-based menu driven machine that allows the
operator easy access to all communication and printer set-up scrolls. Main Menu 3's
Diagnostic Scroll contains the clock/calendar set-up screens. Main Menu 2's Display
Scroll contains the clock/calendar configuration screens, and Main Menu 5 contains the
communications and printer set-up scrolls.
The PRINT key enables the Micro-Tech 2000 to print the data selected in the Printer
Scroll. Periodical printing and alarms print when directed by the system if enabled.
3.2 PRINT FORMATS

The printer can be set up to print totals, batch reports, instrument set-up data, and audit
trails upon request. Batch reports and audit trails require optional hardware. In addition,
totals can be printed at four predetermined intervals and enabled alarms at the time they
occur.
3.2.1 Totals
There are three formats for printing totals; two of them are predefined, one is user
programmable. Selection between the different formats is done via menus, as
described in the next paragraphs.
The first predefined format is named DEFAULT1, and prints data in the following
way:
TOTALS REPORT
DATE: 09-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a

RATE: 0.00 Tph
The second predefined format is named DEFAULT2, and prints data in the
following way:
DATE: 09-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER START TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

RESET STOP TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
QUANTITY: 0.00 Tons
In both cases, the format in which date and time are printed depends on the
system set-up.
The last method called USER DEFINED, is to define your own format using the
printer set up screens as described in Section 3.3.4.
3-1
The USER DEFINED format includes three programmable strings and a mean of
printing the average rate during totalization. The position of each datum on the
paper can be assigned by row and column, making it easy to fulfill any custom
requirement.
3.2.2 Batch
If the optional Load Out board is installed, the load out data can be printed in the
following format:
BATCH REPORT
DATE: 09-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a
BATCH NR: 0
SET PT: 0.00 Tons
TOTAL : 0.00 Tons
3.2.3 Alarms
The system can optionally print out each alarm (if the alarm has been turned on in
the Alarms Menu) in the following format:
09-10-1998 8:14a
High rate
where "High rate" is only an example of a possible alarm condition. Date and time
corresponds to when the alarm has occurred the first time.
3.2.4 Set-Up
The entire system set-up data can be printed by the unit for the customer's record.
Format and sequence of data can vary depending on the hardware and software
configurations.
3-2
3.2.5 Audit Trails
When Audit Trails is installed, the recorded data can be printed out in the following
format:
TRAIL RECORD NR 1
DATE 09-10-1998 TIME 11:59p
VARIABLE scale cap
NEW 400.00
OLD 500.00
TRAIL RECORD NR 2
DATE 09-10-1998 TIME 11:31p
VARIABLE span
NEW 250000
OLD 300000
TRAIL RECORD NR 3
DATE 09-10-1998 TIME 11:59p
VARIABLE div (e)
NEW 0.05
OLD 0.1
Each record contains a description of the variable which has been altered, the old
and the new values of the variable, and an index number.
3.3 COMMUNICATION SET-UP

This section explains the communication and printer set-up. See Section 3.4 for
communication protocols detailed description.
3.3.1 Clock/Calendar Set-Up
When an optional COMM A board is installed, date and time become available and
must be set. The battery, located on the mother board, provides backup for the
perpetual calendar/clock. Time and date needs to be set only once.
1. Press the MENU key until Main Menu 3 appears. Press the soft key under the
DIAGNOSTICS scroll and scroll down until -DIAGNOST SCROLL 7- appears.
The following scroll is provided to set up the date, and enter the day, month
and year in sequence.
-DIAGNOST. SCROLL 7- Password: SERVICE

Date: DD-MM-YYYY
DAY: DD
ENTER
Default: 00-00-0000
Min: 01-01-0000
Max: 12-31-1999
3-3
Time is entered in a similar way. The AM/PM key is used when time is in the
English mode (see Display Scroll 7 below).
-DIAGNOST. SCROLL 8- Password: SERVICE

Time: HH:MM
HOURS: HH
ENTER AM/PM
24 hour am/pm
Default: 00:00 01:00
Min: 00:00 01:00
Max: 23:59 12:59
2. Press the MENU key until Main Menu 2 appears. Press soft key under
DISPLAY scroll and scroll down until -DISPLAY SCROLL 7- appears.
The user can define the format for displaying and printing time and date.
Select the 24 hours or 12 hours format:
- DISPLAY SCROLL 7 - Password: SERVICE

Time
> 24 h<
CHOICE ENTER
If USA or English: Default: am/pm

If other language: Default: 24 h
Selections: am/pm, 24 h
Then date can be set to show month or day first, in three possible
configurations:
- DISPLAY SCROLL 8 - Password: SERVICE

Date
> DD-MM-YYYY <
CHOICE ENTER
If USA: Default: MM-DD-YYYY

If other language: Default: DD-MM-YYYY
Selections: DD-MM-YYYY, MM-DD-YYYY, YYYY-MM-DD
3. When a COMM board is installed, date and time can be displayed line three
(3) in the RUN screen if selected using DISPLAY SCROLL 9.
- DISPLAY SCROLL 9 - Password: OPERATOR

Run display line 3
> No Display <
CHOICE ENTER
3-4
Default: NO DISPLAY
Selections: NO DISPLAY, LOAD, SPEED, DATE/TIME (Only if COMM
board installed)
3.3.2 COMM A and PRINT Scroll Set-Up

Main Menu 5 is dedicated to the serial options. COMM A is used to set up the
serial line of the COMM A board, regardless if the serial line is connected to a
computer or a PLC or for printing. The PRINT scroll is used for setting up the
printer, and it only appears if the COMM A is set for printer.
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
COMM A PRINT
1. Line Setting and Protocol Definition

Two COMM A boards can be installed and programmed, typically one for the
printer and one for the supervisor.
The following screens define the communication parameters for the first and
the second channel.
- COMM. A SCROLL 1 - Password: SERVICE

Baud rate port #1
> 2400 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 9600
Selections: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

Set parity port #1
> No parity <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO PARITY
Selections: EVEN PARITY, ODD PARITY, NO PARITY

Stop bits port #1
> 1 <
CHOICE ENTER
3-5
Default: 1
Selections: 1, 2

Wordlength port #1
> 8 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 8
Selections: 7, 8
The next screen defines the port use. Some commonly used protocols are
implemented in the system. Possible selections are:
PC-MASTER Ramsey proprietary protocol: Multidrop, Master Slave.
SIEMENS 3964R A proprietary protocol of Siemens. Point to point, Multi

Master.
ALLEN-BRADLEY A proprietary protocol of Allen-Bradley.

DF1 Multidrop, Master Slave.
MODBUS A proprietary protocol of AEG. Multidrop, Master Slave.
PRINTER Not a protocol, selects printer output.

Protocol port #1
> MODBUS <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: MODBUS
Selections: PC-MASTER, SIEMENS 3964R, ALLEN-BRADLEY DF1,
MODBUS, PRINTER
If a second COMM A board is installed, the following screen appears. These

screens operate exactly as the ones dedicated to the COMM A board 1.

Baud rate port #2
> 2400 <
CHOICE ENTER
3-6
Default: 9600
Selections: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

Set parity port #2
> No parity <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO PARITY
Selections: EVEN PARITY, ODD PARITY, NO PARITY
- COMM. A SCROLL 10- Password: SERVICE

Stop bits port #2
> 1 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 1
Selections: 1, 2

Wordlength port #2
> 8 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 8
Selections: 7, 8

Protocol port #2
> PRINTER <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: PRINTER
Selections: PC-MASTER, SIEMENS 3964R, ALLEN-BRADLEY DF1,
MODBUS, PRINTER
3.3.3 Multidrop Operator Set-Up

NOTE: This section only applies to multidrop operation. If you are using the
COMM option for connecting a printer, skip this section and refer to
Section 3.3.4.
3-7
The Clear To Send (CTS) line of the port can be used for hardware handshake.
Select Enabled if you want to connect the CTS input of the system to a control
signal generated by the other device.
WARNING
THE CTS INPUT CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN JUMPERS ARE SET FOR
RS232. ATTEMPTING TO ENABLE THE CTS SOFTWARE CONTROL IN
RS485 MODE WILL RESULT IN LOCK-UP OF THE LINE.
- COMM. A SCROLL 5A - Password: SERVICE

CLEAR TO SEND #1
> Disabled <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: DISABLED
Selections: ACTIVE, DISABLED
The following screens define the ADDRESS of the device in the multidrop line, and
the access permission from the remote supervisor. If NONE is selected, the
supervisor has full access to the device. If LIMITED is selected, the supervisor
can only access those variables that are accessible with the OPERATOR
password. If PROTECTED is selected, the unit is read only to the supervisor.

Address port #1
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 255

Access prot port #1
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, LIMITED, PROTECTED
3-8
Similarly for COMM 2, if installed:
- COMM. A SCROLL 12A- Password: SERVICE

CLEAR TO SEND #2
> Disabled <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: DISABLED
Selections: ACTIVE, DISABLED

Address port #2
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 255

Access prot port #2
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, LIMITED, PROTECTED
3.3.4 Printer Set-Up

NOTE: This section only applies to printer. If you are using the COMM option for
connecting a computer, PLC or other device using a protocol, skip this
section and refer to Section 3.3.3.
The Micro-Tech 2000 has a fully programmable printer format. The following
section explains how to program the Print scroll according to the specific needs.
The system can be configured to operate without any handshake (NONE), or using
the Clear To Send signal (CTS) or the XON-XOFF sequence. Refer to the
instruction manual of the printer to define which selection is required. The
selection NONE is only supplied for testing purposes, but is not recommended for
normal use. If NONE is selected, the system is not able to recognize if the printer
is on line or not, or if the paper is empty.
3-9
The most commonly used protocol is the CTS, which is a signal generated by the
printer to indicate whether it is ready to receive data or not.
WARNING
THE CTS INPUT CAN ONLY BE USED WHEN JUMPERS ARE SET FOR
RS232. ATTEMPTING TO ENABLE THE CTS SOFTWARE CONTROL IN
RS485 MODE WILL RESULT IN LOCK-UP OF THE LINE.
- PRINTER SCROLL 1
Password: SERVICE
-
Handshaking
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, CTS, XON-XOFF
Different printers use different end of line patterns. Select the one you need
according to the printer.
- PRINTER SCROLL 2 - Password: SERVICE

End of line
> CR <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: CR
Selections: CR, LF, CR+LF
Some simple printers cannot accept characters while they are printing. In some
cases the handshake is not well controlled by the printer, so a delay at end of line
is helpful.

Delay end of line
0 sec
ENTER
Default: 0 sec
Min: 0 sec
Max: 5 sec
3-10
A Form Feed character can be sent to the printer after each report to force the
printer to eject the paper.

Form Feed
> NO <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: NO, YES
If you want to generate periodical printing, enter the number of minutes, hours or
days in the following screen. By entering 0, the periodical printing is prevented.
Use the INTV key to switch from minutes to hours and to days.

Print interval
0 min
ENTER INTV
Default: 0
Min: 0 min, 0 hour, 0 days
Max: 59 min, 23 hour, 365 days
The system can print at specific times during the day. Enter the time you want to
obtain the printing. Use the NEXT key to scroll between the print times. Up to four
discrete times may be entered. The ON/OFF key enables or disables the
displayed print time.
- PRINTER SCROLL 6 - Password: OPERATOR

Print time # 1
time HH:MM
ENTER ON/OFF NEXT
Default: OFF
Min: 00:00
Max: 23:59
3.3.5 Define Printing Format

By selecting YES in the following screen, the system is instructed to print one line
each time a new alarm condition occurs. The alarm is printed as follows:
xx-xx-xxxx yy:yyz
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
3-11
where:
xx-xx-xxxx Day, Month, Year, printed according to the local format
as defined in Main Menu 2 - Display.
yy:yyz Hour, Minutes, am/pm printed according to the local
format as defined in Main Menu 2 - Display
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Alarm message, same message appearing on the
screen.
For example:
09-10-1998 8:14a
High rate

Print alarms
> No <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: NO, YES
If YES is selected, the system prints all alarms that have been set to alarm in the
Alarm scroll.
There are three ways for defining the printing format. The first two are predefined
formats, which are as follows:
1. DEFAULT 1
TOTALS REPORT
DATE: 09-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a

RATE: 0.00 Tph
3-12
2. DEFAULT 2
DATE: 09-10-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER START TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

RESET STOP TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
QUANTITY: 0.00 Tons
3. Define Own Format

The last method is to define your own format using the printer setup screens
listed below.
Select DEFAULT if you want the predefined format. Select USER DEFINED if
you want to set up your own format.

Totals Report format
> Default <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: DEFAULT1
Selections: DEFAULT1, DEFAULT2, USER DEFINED
If your selection is USER DEFINED, the following screens are displayed.

Define first the number of strings that you want to add in your report. You may
enter a number from 0 to 3. Strings can be used to add the Customer name
as well as other information that you want to include in the print format.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9A- Password: OPERATOR

Number of strings
3
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 0
Max: 3
If you specified a number of strings larger than zero, you can now enter the
strings. Use the alphanumeric keypad, pressing the numeric key
corresponding to the letter that you want to type. Each time you press a new
key, the cursor moves to the right one place. If you need to use the same key
twice (example: for double letters), move the cursor right using the arrow keys
(left and right soft keys).
3-13
- PRINTER SCROLL 9B- Password: OPERATOR
Contents string #1
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
< ENTER >
Default: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Once you have defined the string, you have to specify where the string is to
be placed on the printed report. The coordinate is given in the following way:
0000000000111111111122222222223...
0123456789012345678901234567890...
+--------------------------------------------------> Y
00|This line printed first
01|This line printed second ^
02| | DIRECTION OF
03| | PAPER
04|
05|
06|
.v
.X
Use the X-pos and Y-pos keys to enter the X and Y coordinates. Confirm with
ENTER. By specifying 0,0, the string is not printed.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9C- Password: OPERATOR

Position string #1
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 1,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
If you specified more strings, enter the relevant data using the same
procedure.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9D- Password: OPERATOR

Contents string #2
< ENTER >
3-14
- PRINTER SCROLL 9E- Password: OPERATOR

Position string #2
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 2,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9F- Password: OPERATOR

Contents string #3
< ENTER >
- PRINTER SCROLL 9G- Password: OPERATOR

Position string #3
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 3,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9H- Password: OPERATOR

Position oper. total
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 4,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
In a similar way, you can position in the print format the following variables:
The Reset Total:
3-15
- PRINTER SCROLL 9I- Password: OPERATOR
Position reset total
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 5,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
The Master Total:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9J- Password: OPERATOR

Position master total
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 6,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
The Current Date:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9K- Password: OPERATOR

Position date
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 7,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
The Current Time:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9L- Password: OPERATOR

Position time
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 8,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
3-16
The Instantaneous Value of Rate:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9M- Password: OPERATOR

Position RATE
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 9,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
The Average Rate since the last print is next. The average rate is calculated
only on the periods of time in which rate has been higher than 5% of capacity.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9N- Password: OPERATOR

Position AVG RATE
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 0,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
The running time since the last print. The running time is the time in which
rate has been higher than 5%.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9P- Password: OPERATOR

Position RUNNING TM
X = 0 , Y = 0
ENTER X-pos Y-pos
Default: 0,1
Min: 0,1
Max: 24,80
If the optional load out board is installed, the batch quantity and the batch total
can also be printed.
3.3.6 Setting the Printer Inhibit Range
The Printer Inhibit Range setting prevents printing when the rate is higher than a
preset value. This is a requirement of NTEP, and therefore automatically turned
on when the NTEP W&M mode is selected.
3-17
- SC DATA SCROLL 12- Password: SERVICE
Print Inhibit range
0%
ENTER
Default: 3%
Min: 0%
Max: 100%
3.3.7 The PRINT Key

NOTE: This section only applies to the Printer. If you are using the COMM option
for connecting a computer or a PLC and you are using a protocol, skip
this section and refer to Section 3.3.2.
The Micro-Tech 2000 can print out several kinds of data, depending on the system
set-up. When the printer has been installed and properly set up, the user can print
by means of the PRINT key as described below.
When the PRINT key is pressed, the following screen is displayed:
- PRINTER SCROLL - Password: Not Required

COM #1 no data
Start print TOTALS
PRINT RETURN COM
The second line gives the status of the printer:

NO DATA Indicates the printer is idle, no data is being sent to the
printer.
IS RUNNING Indicates the system is sending data to the printer.
The third line indicates what kind of data is printed if the PRINT soft key is
pressed.
The UP and DOWN keys select between:
a. TOTALS Prints the selected totals format. Default1, Default2, or
User Define (see Section 3.3.5).
b. BATCH Only if load out option is active, print load out information.
c. SETUP Print the set-up data of the instrument.
d. TRAILS If audit trails option is active, print audit trails data. (See
Main Menu 6 in the Micro-Tech 2000 manual.)
Print starts after the PRINT soft key is pressed.

The COM key allows the operator to select the printer if more than one is installed.
3-18
3.3.8 Additional Diagnostics
If a Communication board is detected, the following screen is shown. The "Port 2"
soft key is only shown if two boards are detected.
- TEST SCROLL 8 - Password: SERVICE

Test communication A
PORT1 PORT 2
By pressing the PORT 1 or the PORT 2 soft key the test is initiated. A test pattern
is sent out on the TX output and read on the RX input. If the test fails, the
message TEST FAILED is shown, otherwise the message TEST PASSED is
displayed.
NOTE: This test requires a hardware jumper to be installed between the TB5-
8(RX) and TB5-9(TX) terminals of the communication board.
3-19
3.3.9 Main Menu 5 - Permanent Scroll Record
COMM A SCROLL
2. Set Parity Port #1
5. Protocol Port #1
6. Address Port #1
9. Set Parity Port #2
12. Protocol Port #2
13. Address Port #2
PRINT SCROLL
1. Handshaking
2. End of Line
3. Delay End of Line
4. Form Feed
3-20
5. Print Interval
6. Print Time #1
7. Print Alarms
8. Totals Report Format
9A. Number of Strings
9B. Contents String #1
9C. Position String Number #1
9D. Contents String #2
9E. Position String #2
9F. Contents String #3
9G. Position String #3
9H. Position Oper. Total
9I. Position Reset Total
9J. Position Master Total
9K. Position Date
9L. Position Time
9M. Position Rate
9N. Position Avg. Rate
9P. Position Running
3-21
3.4 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
The communication protocol allows a remote intelligent device to read and eventually
write the contents of the registers as listed in this section.
During the communication activity, the Micro-Tech 2000 always acts as Slave, meaning
that it will respond to a request from a Master device on the line, but never attempts to
send messages out.
The instrument responds only if the message is completely received. The instrument
reads the message and looks for the address, which is contained in an address byte in
the query package. The message is then processed only if the address contained in the
message matches the address specified in the set-up data of the instrument. When the
system receives a message, the integrity of it is checked, and an answer message is
prepared if yes.
The Master must respect a 100 ms interval time between two messages. If a message is
sent before 100 ms have passed since the previous one, it is lost. (The data is received
by an interrupt routine, while it is processed in a task which is executed each 100 ms.)
If the Master sends variables to be written in memory, the system checks the correctness
of the message, and immediately sends an answer message if it is correct. This does not
necessarily mean that the data is written in memory. The system first checks the address,
which must correspond to a valid address of a variable, then the minimum and maximum
limits are checked, and then the password. If data can be accepted, the success flag is
set to 0 (no error), if not, it is set to 1. The Master needs to check the success flag
(contained into a read only register), to know if the last variables sent have been stored or
not.
The procedure is as follows:
- Send the data to the Micro-Tech 2000
- Wait 100 ms
- Read the success flag, should be 0.
Some data is read only, some is read write, some is write only.
NOTE: The maximum number of words the system can transfer is 41 per time.
Requests of registers in excess of 41 are treated as errors and do not generate
an answer.
NOTE: This section only applies to multidrop operation. If you are using the COMM
option for connecting a Printer, skip this section and refer to Section 3.3.4.
3-22
3.4.1 Registers Definition
The following registers can be accessed through a serial line link using one of the
available communication protocols. The table lists the registers specifying per
each:
- register A conventional name
- type Can be: RO The register can be read but cannot be
written.
RW The register can be read or written.
Write is allowed if the instrument is in
the specified protection level at the
moment the write message is received.
WO The register can only be written. Write
is subject to protection control.
- low limit The minimum acceptable value for the variable. Lower values
are considered as errors.
- high limit The maximum acceptable value for the variable. Higher values
are considered as errors.
- refresh time The time between two updates of the variable in the instrument's
memory.
- protection The minimum protection level which must be in place to allow
access to the variable:
- always available
limited available if limited or service
service available if service only
- format Can be: char An ASCII string
integer 16 bits IEEE integer
long 32 bits IEEE long integer
float 32 bits IEEE float

double 64 bits IEEE double precision float
WARNING
THE ACTUAL ADDRESS OF EACH REGISTER IS DEFINED DIFFERENTLY

FOR EACH PROTOCOL AS EXPLAINED IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS.
3-23
1. Type, Limits and Format of Registers
register type low limit high limit refresh protection format

time [ms]
success_flag RO - - - none integer
display RO - - 100 - char
leds RO - - 100 - integer
status RO - - 100 - integer
alarms RO - - 100 - integer
i_o RO - - 100 - integer
commands WO 0 32767 100 none integer
rate RO - - 100 - float
load RO - - 100 - float
speed RO - - 100 - float
master_total RO - - 100 - float
reset_total RW 0 (1) 0 (1) 100 none float
operator_total RW 0 (1) 0 (1) 100 limited float
batch_total RO - - 100 - float
batch_number RW 0 999 100 limited integer
batch_set RW 0 10000 - limited float
batch_pre_set RW 0 10000 - limited float
batch_pre_act RW 0 10000 - limited float
batch_deviation RW 0 100 - limited integer
scale_capacity RW 1 200000 - service float
speed_capacity RW 0.1 m/s or 10 m/s or - service float

1 fpm 2000 fpm
load_cell_cap RW 5 kg or 10 5000 kg or - service float

Lbs 15000 Lbs
3-24
time [ms]
high_rate_set RW 0 105.0% or - limited float

scale cap +
5%
low_rate_set RW 0 103.0% or - limited float

scale cap +
3%
high_speed_set RW 0 150.0% or - limited float

speed cap
+ 50%
low_speed_set RW 0 105.0% or - limited float

speed cap
+ 5%
high_load_set RW 0 max load + - limited float

50% (2)
low_load_set RW 0 max load + - limited float

5% (2)
cal_error RO - - - none float
Span * RO - - - none float
Zero * RO - - - none long
a.z.t correction * RO - - - none float
Zero Reference ** RW 0 120000 - service long
Auto zero max RW 0 100.0 - service float

deviation **
Total AZ% ** RO - - - none float
AZ Dev ** RO - - - none long
AZT step ** RW 0.01 10.00 - none long
Belt warm up time RW 0.0 160.0 - none float

**
master total * RO - - - none double
reset total * RO - - - none double
3-25
time [ms]
operator total * RO - - - none double
Number of trails ** RW 0 999 - limited integer
* MT2001, 2101 - Version 3.05.

** MT 2301 - Version 3.07 & above only.
(1) Can only be zeroed.

(2) Max load defined as:
cap_cell * cell number
max load = -----------------------------------------
idler spacing * of weigh idlers
2. Description of Registers
In the following section an explanation is given per each variable of the above
table.
a. success_flag
Set to 0 after a message has been received and properly processed. If a
message is correctly received but cannot be processed because
password protection or size error, this flag is set to 1. The user may read
this register after a write message to ensure the data have been
accepted.
b. display
It contains the messages actually shown on the display of the instrument
in form of an ASCII string. For example, the screen:
- MENU MAIN 1 -
PRESS MENU FOR MORE
ZERO SPAN MAT'L
CAL CAL CAL
Will be stored in registers in the following way:

display( 1 ) 2DH20H Characters 1 and 2 from left of first row
display( 2 ) 4DH45H
display( 3 ) 4EH 55H
display( 4 ) 20H 4DH
display( 5 ) 41H 49H
display( 6 ) 4EH 20H
...
display( 10 ) ... ... Characters 19 and 20 from left of first row
3-26
display( 11 ) ... ... Characters 1 and 2 from left of second row
...
display( 20 ) ... ... Characters 19 and 20 from left of second row
display( 21 ) ... ... Characters 1 and 2 from left of third row
...
display( 30 ) ... ... Characters 19 and 20 from left of third row
display( 31 ) ... ... Characters 1 and 2 from left of fourth row
...
display( 38 ) 4CH 20H
display( 39 ) 20H 20H
display( 40 ) 20H 20H Characters 19 and 20 from left of fourth row
c. leds
Leds( 1 ) bit description
15 not used
.
.
05 not used
04 led 5 (1 = on, 0 = off)
03 led 4
02 led 3
01 led 2
00 led 1
d. status
Status(1) bit description

15 cumulative shutdown (a shutdown alarm is
pending)
14 cumulative alarms (an alarm is pending)
13 calibration running
12-8 Not used
07 High load (Load is higher than limit)
06 Low load (Load is lower than limit)
05 High rate (Rate is higher than limit)
04 Low rate (Rate is lower than limit)
03 High speed (Speed is higher than limit)
02 Low speed (Speed is lower than limit)
01-0 Not used
Status(2) Only applicable if Load Out option installed:
3-27
3 2 1 0
x 0 0 0 Batch not running
x 0 0 1 Not used
x 0 1 0 Batch running at high rate
x 0 1 1 Batch running at low rate
x 1 0 0 Waiting start delay time
x 1 0 1 Waiting stabilization time
x can be 0 Normal status
1 Stand by status
+
3-28
e. alarms
In the alarms register, each bit represents the status of an alarm. If the
alarm is active, the relevant bit contains '1', otherwise it contains '0'.
alarms(1) bit description

15 CLOCK FAIL
14 CELL FAIL
13 RAM FAIL
12 ROM FAIL
11 SPEED SENSOR ERROR
10 HIGH LOAD
09 LOW LOAD
08 HIGH RATE
07 LOW RATE
06 HIGH SPEED
05 LOW SPEED
04 WARM START
03 COLD START
02 PWD DURING CALIB
01 CAL TIME ELAPSED
00 EXTERN ALAM 1

15 EXTERN ALAM 2
14 EXTERN ALAM 3
13 OVERFLOW TOTALIZER
12 AZT OVER LIMIT
11 BATCH DEVIATION
10 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 1
04 BCD OVERFLOW
03 MATHEMATIC ERROR
02 PRINTER ERROR
01 COMMUNICATION ERROR
00 NOT USED
15-00 NOT USED
3-29
f. i_o
The instrument has physical inputs and outputs to which logical input and
output functions are associated. As far as communication is concerned,
only the status of physical inputs and outputs are transferred.
i_o (1) bit description
15-04 not used

03 in 3 - mother board
15 in 3 board 4in/16out #1
3-30
3-31
15-04 not used mother board

03 out 3 mother board
3-32
15 out 3 board 16in/4out #1

15 out 15 board 4in/16 out #1

3-33


3-34

g. commands
Each bit of the commands register is specified as follows:
Bit Description Action
15 (MSB) Not used

14 Not used
13 Not used
12 Not used
Print commands: (Model 2301 and 2201 ver 3.08 & above - Modbus only)
11 Print setup Start print function for instrument

setup.
10 Print audit trails Start print function for the

complete list of audit trails.
09 Print totals Start print function for total

registers.
Calibration commands:
It is possible to start a calibration function from the remote. At the end of
the calibration (calibration flag in status registers should be tested to
determine when cal function ends), it is possible to verify the calibration
error (cal error register) and eventually accept the new zero or span.
3-35
08 Autospan RCAL Start the autospan function with

RCAL method. The Rcal is
automatically connected by the
instrument at the beginning of the
function and disconnected at its end.
This operation needs a delay of 0.5
seconds. In case a RCAL remote
calibration is aborted, the calibration
flags will turn off after this delay.
07 Autospan CHAIN Start the autospan function with

CHAINS method.
06 Autospan WTS Start the autospan function with

WTS method. An output of the
Microtech can be programmed to
automatically load the test weights,
this adds a 10 second delay at the
beginning and at the end of the
calibration function. In case a WTS
remote calibration is aborted, the
calibration flags will turn off after this
time.
05 Autozero Start the autozero function.
04 Confirm zero/span At the end of the calibration function,

this command tells the instrument to
save the new zero or span. If this
command is sent during a remote
calibration, it aborts the running
function.
batch commands:
03 Stand by Batch Only if Load Out option installed.

Temporarily stops a Load Out
(batch) sequence. BAtch can
resume if a Start command is sent
later.
02 Stop Batch Only if Load Out option installed.

Stops a Load Out (batch) sequence.
3-36
01 Start Batch Only if Load Out option installed.

Starts a Load Out (batch) sequence.
00 Reset Alarms Resets any pending alarm.
In order to give a command, the Host must set the relevant bit to 1 and
write (send) the register to the instrument. The action is performed if the
write message is accepted.
h. rate
The instantaneous rate in engineering units as currently displayed on the
RUN screen
i. load
The instantaneous weight in engineering units.
j. speed
The instantaneous belt speed in engineering units.
k. master_total
The current value of the master totalizer of the integrator.
l. reset_total
The current value of the reset totalizer of the integrator. Reset total can
be zeroed by writing zero to this register.
m. operator_total
The current value of the operator totalizer of the integrator. Operator total
can be zeroed by writing zero to this register.
NOTE: The registers from m. to r. only apply if the optional Load Out option is
installed.
n. batch_total
The current contents of the load out totalizer. Usually read at end of
batch to check the result of the load out. This register is automatically
cleared when a new batch is started.
o. batch_number
The number of the currently running load out or the number of the last
finished one. The integrator automatically increments the batch number
when a new batch is started.
3-37
p. batch_set
The set point for the current or the next load out. Usually entered or
downloaded by the user.
q. batch_pre_set
The pre-set point for the current or the next load out. Set by the user,
defines when the rate is lowered to increase batch accuracy.
r. batch_pre_act
The set point of the preact for the current or the next load out. Entered or
downloaded by the user (if in MANUAL mode) or calculated by the
integrator. Defines when the load out has to stop to compensate the
queue of material from the loading point to the scale.
s. batch_deviation
The maximum acceptable deviation from the batch set point. Usually
entered by the user.
t. scale-capacity
The scale capacity of the scale. Entered by the user at first start up,
should never be altered.
u. speed_capacity
The speed capacity of the integrator. Entered or acquired at first start up,
should never be altered.
v. load_cell_capacity
The load cell capacity of the integrator. Entered at first start up, should
never be altered.
w. high_rate_set
The set point for the alarm of high rate. Entered or downloaded by the
user.
x. low_rate_set
The set point for the alarm of low rate. Entered or downloaded by the
user.
y. high_speed_set
The set point for the alarm of high speed. Entered or downloaded by the
user.
z. low_speed_set
The set point for the alarm of low speed. Entered or downloaded by the
user.
3-38
aa. high_load_set
The set point for the alarm of high belt loading. Entered or downloaded
by the user.
bb. low_load-set
The set point for the alarm of high belt loading. Entered or downloaded
by the user.
cc. cal_error
Indicates in percent, the zero or span error computed at the end of a
remote calibration function.
dd. Span
Indicate the span in use in the scale.
ee. Zero
Indicate the zero in use in the scale.
ff. A.Z.T correction
The AZT function accurately tracks the zero of the scale, by calculating
an additional zero constant. The portion of zero due to AZT is not
incorporated in the zero constant, but is shown separately.
gg. Zero Reference
The current value of the zero Reference
hh. Auto zero max deviation
The current value of auto zero max deviation.
ll. Total AZ %
The current value of total AZ %.
mm. AZ Dev
The current value of AZ Dev.
nn. AZT step
The current value of AZT step.
3-39
oo. Belt warm up time
The current value of belt warm up time.
pp. master_total ( Only with Modbus protocol )
The current value of the master totalizer of the integrator. ( In double

precision float format )
qq. reset_total ( Only with Modbus protocol )
The current value of the reset totalizer of the integrator. (In double
rr. operator_total ( Only with Modbus protocol )
The current value of the operator totalizer of the integrator. (In double
ss. number of trails ( Only with Modbus protocol )
The number of audit trails to print. Entered or downloaded by the user.

An integer value 1 to 999.
3-40
3.5 PC-MASTER
The PC-Master protocol is fully described in the following manual (available from Ramsey
on request):
PC-MASTER COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL Rev 08.01.1996
The following messages are used to communicate with the MT2000 type of instruments:
- Message #97: Send a Key to the MT2000
- Message #98: Send variables to the MT2000
- Message #99: Get variables from the MT2000
3.5.1 Description
1. Message #97: SEND A KEY TO THE 2000
With this command, the code of one or more keys can be sent to the
instrument. When the keys are received by the instrument, they are
processed as the normal keyboard entries.
QUERY MESSAGE
Begin of frame STX 02

DLE 10H
Address xxx xxx
Code 97 61H
Stamp xxx xxx
Data KEY 1 byte
Error check xxx xxx

End of frame ETX 03
RESPONSE MESSAGE
No response is provided.
3-41
TABLE OF THE KEYS
KEY HEX CODE KEY HEX CODE
UP ARROW 48H EIGHT 38H

DOWN ARROW 50H NINE 39H
DECIMAL POINT 2EH MENU 4DH
CLEAR 53H RUN 52H
ZERO 30H F1 3FH
ONE 31H F2 40H
TWO 32H F3 41H
THREE 33H TOTAL 3BH
FOUR 34H PRINT 3CH
FIVE 35H START 3DH
SIX 36H STOP 3EH
SEVEN 37H
Example 1:
The Host sends the 'MENU' key to 2000 (Address of Slave 1):
HOST (PLC) SLAVE (2000)
02H -->
10H
01H
61H
01H
4DH
B0H
03H -->
3-42
2. Message #98: SEND A VARIABLE TO THE 2000
With this command, the master sends registers to the slave unit.
QUERY MESSAGE

DLE 10H
Address xxx xxx
Code 98 62H
Stamp xxx xxx
Data Address 1 WORD
WordCount 1 WORD
DATA WordCount WORDS
Error check xxxxxx
End of frame ETX 03
RESPONSE MESSAGE

DLE 10H
Address xxx xxx
Code 98 62H
Stamp xxx xxx
Data Address 1 WORD
WordCount 1 WORD
Error check xxx xxx
End of frame ETX 03
3-43
Example 1:
The Host writes the batch setpoint:
Batch setpoint: 100 Tons
Address of Slave: 1
02H -->
10H
01H
62H
01H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
42H
C8H
00H
00H
DCH
03H -->
<-- 02H
10H
01H
62H
01H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
D2H
<-- 03H
3-44
3. Message #99: READ REGISTERS FROM THE 2000
With this command, the master asks the slave unit for registers.
QUERY MESSAGE

DLE 10H
Address xxx xxx
Code 99 63H
stamp xxx xxx
Data Address 1 word
WordCount 1 word
Error check xxx xxx
End of frame ETX 03
RESPONSE MESSAGE

DLE 10H
Address xxx xxx
Code 99 63H
Stamp xxx xxx
Data Address 1 word
WordCount 1 word
DATA n. words
Error check xxx xxx
End of frame ETX 03
3-45
Example 1:
The Host reads from the 2000 the batch setpoint:
Batch setpoint: 200.5 Tons
Address of Slave: 1
02H -->
10H
01H
63H
01H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
D3H
03H -->
<-- 02H
10H
01H
63H
01H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
43H
48H
80H
00H
DEH
<-- 03H
3-46
3.5.2 Registers Mapping for PC-Master Protocol
register address note
success_flag 20 H 0 successful, 1 failed.
display( 1 ) 21 H
display( 2 ) 22 H
display( 3 ) 23 H
display( 4 ) 24 H
display( 5 ) 25 H
display( 6 ) 26 H
display( 7 ) 27 H
display( 8 ) 28 H
display( 9 ) 29 H
display( 10 ) 2A H
display( 11 ) 2B H
display( 12 ) 2C H
display( 13 ) 2D H
display( 14 ) 2E H
display( 15 ) 2F H
display( 16 ) 30 H
display( 17 ) 31 H
display( 18 ) 32 H
display( 19 ) 33 H
display( 20 ) 34 H
display( 21 ) 35 H
display( 22 ) 36 H
3-47
display( 23 ) 37 H
display( 24 ) 38 H
display( 25 ) 39 H
display( 26 ) 3A H
display( 27 ) 3B H
display( 28 ) 3C H
display( 29 ) 3D H
display( 30 ) 3E H
display( 31 ) 3F H
display( 32 ) 40 H
display( 33 ) 41 H
display( 34 ) 42 H
display( 35 ) 43 H
display( 36 ) 44 H
display( 37 ) 45 H
display( 38 ) 46 H
display( 39 ) 47 H
display( 40 ) 48 H
leds 49 H
status( 1 ) 4A H
status( 2 ) 4B H
alarm_status( 1 ) 4C H
alarm_status( 2 ) 4D H
alarm_status( 3 ) 4E H
i_o( 1 ) 4F H
3-48
i_o( 2 ) 50 H
i_o( 3 ) 51 H
i_o( 4 ) 52 H
i_o( 5 ) 53 H
i_o( 6 ) 54 H
i_o( 7 ) 55 H
i_o( 8 ) 56 H
i_o( 9 ) 57 H
i_o( 10 ) 58 H
i_o( 11 ) 59 H
i_o( 12 ) 5A H
commands 5B H
batch_number 5C H Load out option required
batch_deviation 5D H Load out option required
rate( 1 ) 5E H
rate( 2 ) 5H H
load( 1 ) 60 H
load( 2 ) 61 H
speed( 1 ) 62 H
speed( 2 ) 63 H
master_total( 1 ) 64 H
reset_total( 1 ) 66 H
operator_total( 1 ) 68 H
3-49
batch_total( 1 ) 6A H Load out option required
batch_total( 2 ) 6B H Load out option required
batch_set_point( 1 ) 6C H Load out option required
batch_set_point( 2 ) 6D H Load out option required
batch_pre_set( 1 ) 6E H Load out option required
batch_pre_set( 2 ) 6F H Load out option required
batch_pre_act( 1 ) 70 H Load out option required
scale_capacity( 1 ) 72 H
speed_capacity( 1 ) 74 H
load_cell_capacity( 1 ) 76 H
high_rate_set( 1 ) 78 H
low_rate_set( 1 ) 7A H
low_rate_set( 2 ) 7B H
high_speed_set( 1 ) 7C H
high_speed_set( 2 ) 7D H
low_speed_set( 1 ) 7E H
low_speed_set( 2 ) 7F H
high_load_set( 1 ) 80 H
3-50
low_load_set( 1 ) 82 H
cal_error( 1 ) A4 H
cal_error( 2 ) A5 H
span ( 1 ) * 86 H
span ( 2 ) 87 H
zero ( 1 ) * 88 H
zero ( 2 ) 89 H
azt correction ( 1 ) * 8A H
azt correction ( 2 ) 8B H
Zero Reference ( 1 ) ** 8C H
Zero Reference ( 2 ) 8D H
Auto zero max dev. ( 1 ) ** 8E H
Auto zero max dev. ( 2 ) 8F H
Total AZ % ( 1 ) ** 90 H
Total AZ % ( 2 ) 91 H
AZ Dev ( 1 ) ** 92 H
AZ Dev ( 2 ) 93H
AZT step ( 1 ) ** 94 H
AZT step ( 2 ) 95 H
Belt warm up time ( 1 ) ** 96 H
Belt warm up time ( 2 ) 97 H
* Version 3.05 in Microtech 2001, 2101 & 2301

** Version 3.07 & above in Microtech 2301 and Microtech 2201.
3-51
3.6 SIEMENS 3964R
3.6.1 Description
The protocol has been implemented as described in - "Funzioni di accoppiamento
con CP 525/2 Manuale - Simatic S5" - Siemens - Rev. 1989
Two communication modes are provided:
FETCH The HOST asks the slave unit for registers
SEND The HOST sends registers to the slave
The choice between requesting or sending data is made using a specific code
inside the message.
- The Host (PLC) sends data to the Slave (2000):

STX (02H) -->
<-- DLE (10H)
-->
HEADER HI (00H)
HEADER LO (00H)
COMMAND HI (41H)
COMMAND LO (44H)
DESTINATION DB (00H)
DESTINATION DW (XXH)
BYTE COUNT HI (00H)
BYTE COUNT LO (XXH)
no CF (FFH)
all CPUs (FFH)
DATA MSB
....
DATA LSB
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC (XXH)
-->
<-- DLE (10H)
<-- STX (02H)
DLE (10H) -->
<-- HEADER HI (00H)
HEADER LO (00H)
NOT USED (00H)
NUMBER ERROR (00H)
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC (XXH
DLE (10H) -->
3-52
- The Host (PC or PLC) asks for data from the Slave (2000)

STX -->
<-- DLE (10H)
-->
HEADER HI (00H)
HEADER LO (00H)
COMMAND HI (45H)
COMMAND LO (44H)
DESTINATION DB (00H)
DESTINATION DW (XXH)
BYTE COUNT HI (00H)
BYTE COUNT LO (XXH)
no CF (FFH)
all CPUs (FFH)
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC (XXH)
-->
<-- DLE (10H)
<-- STX (02H)

DLE (10H) -->
<-- HEADER HI (00H)
HEADER LO (00H)
NOT USED (00H)
NUMBER ERROR (XXH)
DATA LSB
MAX 127BYTES
DATA MSB
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC (XXH
DLE (10H) -->
3-53
Example 1:
The Host wants to write the batch setpoint:
Set batch: 100.0 Tons

02H -->
<-- 10H
00H -->
00H
41H
44H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
FFH
FFH
42H
C8H
00H
00H
10H
03H
F2H -->
<-- 10H
<-- 02H
10H -->
<-- 00H
00H
00H
00H
10H
03H
13H
10H -->
3-54
Example 2:
The Host wants to receive the batch setpoint:

02H -->
<-- 10H
00H -->
00H
45H
44H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
FFH
FFH
10H
03H
7CH -->
<-- 10H
<-- 02H
10H -->
<-- 00H
00H
00H
00H
42H
C8H
00H
00H
10H
03H
99H
10H -->
3-55
3.6.2 Register Mapping for Siemens 3964R Protocol
success_flag 20 H 0 successful, 1 failed.
display( 1 ) 21 H
display( 2 ) 22 H
display( 3 ) 23 H
display( 4 ) 24 H
display( 5 ) 25 H
display( 6 ) 26 H
display( 7 ) 27 H
display( 8 ) 28 H
display( 9 ) 29 H
display( 10 ) 2A H
display( 11 ) 2B H
display( 12 ) 2C H
display( 13 ) 2D H
display( 14 ) 2E H
display( 15 ) 2F H
display( 16 ) 30 H
display( 17 ) 31 H
display( 18 ) 32 H
display( 19 ) 33 H
display( 20 ) 34 H
display( 21 ) 35 H
display( 22 ) 36 H
3-56
display( 23 ) 37 H
display( 24 ) 38 H
display( 25 ) 39 H
display( 26 ) 3A H
display( 27 ) 3B H
display( 28 ) 3C H
display( 29 ) 3D H
display( 30 ) 3E H
display( 31 ) 3F H
display( 32 ) 40 H
display( 33 ) 41 H
display( 34 ) 42 H
display( 35 ) 43 H
display( 36 ) 44 H
display( 37 ) 45 H
display( 38 ) 46 H
display( 39 ) 47 H
display( 40 ) 48 H
leds 49 H
status( 1 ) 4A H
status( 2 ) 4B H
alarm_status( 1 ) 4C H
alarm_status( 2 ) 4D H
alarm_status( 3 ) 4E H
i_o( 1 ) 4F H
3-57
i_o( 2 ) 50 H
i_o( 3 ) 51 H
i_o( 4 ) 52 H
i_o( 5 ) 53 H
i_o( 6 ) 54 H
i_o( 7 ) 55 H
i_o( 8 ) 56 H
i_o( 9 ) 57 H
i_o( 10 ) 58 H
i_o( 11 ) 59 H
i_o( 12 ) 5A H
commands 5B H
batch_number 5C H Load out option required
batch_deviation 5D H Load out option required
rate( 1 ) 5E H
rate( 2 ) 5F H
load( 1 ) 60 H
load( 2 ) 61 H
speed( 1 ) 62 H
speed( 2 ) 63 H
3-58
batch_total( 1 ) 6A H Load out option required
batch_total( 2 ) 6B H Load out option required
batch_set_point( 1 ) 6C H Load out option required
batch_set_point( 2 ) 6D H Load out option required
batch_pre_set( 1 ) 6E H Load out option required
batch_pre_set( 2 ) 6F H Load out option required
low_rate_set( 1 ) 7A H
low_rate_set( 2 ) 7B H
high_speed_set( 1 ) 7C H
high_speed_set( 2 ) 7D H
low_speed_set( 1 ) 7E H
low_speed_set( 2 ) 7F H
3-59
reg_set_point_1( 1 ) 88 H
reg_set_point_1( 2 ) 89 H
reg_set_point_2( 1 ) 8A H
reg_set_point_2( 2 ) 8B H
dsp_set_point_1( 1 ) 8C H
dsp_set_point_1( 2 ) 8D H
dsp_set_point_2( 1 ) 8E H
dsp_set_point_2( 2 ) 8F H
ctr_deviation_1( 1 ) 90 H
hi_pos_dev_1( 1 ) 94 H
hi_pos_dev_1( 2 ) 95 H
cal_error( 1 ) 84 H
cal_error( 2 ) 85 H
span ( 1 ) * 86 H
span ( 2 ) 87 H
zero ( 1 ) * 88 H
zero ( 2 ) 89 H
azt correction ( 1 ) * 8A H
azt correction ( 2 ) 8B H
3-60
Zero Reference ( 1 ) ** 8C H
Zero Reference ( 2 ) 8D H
Auto zero max dev. ( 1 ) ** 8E H
Auto zero max dev. ( 2 ) 8F H
Total AZ % ( 1 ) ** 90 H
Total AZ % ( 2 ) 91 H
AZ Dev ( 1 ) ** 92 H
AZ Dev ( 2 ) 93H
AZT step ( 1 ) ** 94 H
AZT step ( 2 ) 95 H
Belt warm up time ( 1 ) ** 96 H
Belt warm up time ( 2 ) 97 H
* Version 3.05 in Microtech 2001, 2101, & 2301.

** Version 3.07 & above in Microtech 2301and 2201.
3-61
3.7 MODBUS
3.7.1 Description
This protocol has been implemented as described in: - "Gould Modicon Modbus
Protocol" - Reference Guide - November 1993 - Rev. A (Gould Inc. Programmable
Control Division)
NOTE: Only a subset of the protocol has been implemented, as described in this
chapter.
- Message of data query from Host (PC or PLC) to Slave (2000) (code 03H)
QUERY
Address xxx
function 03H
add. hi xxx
add. lo xxx
n.data hi xxx
n.data lo xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
RESPONSE MESSAGE
Address xxx
function 03H
byte cnt xxx
data MSB xxx
... xxx
data LSB xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
3-62
Example 1:
The Host wants to receive the batch setpoint:
Setpoint: 100.0 Tons
Address of Slave: 01

O1H -->
03H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
04H
16H -->
<-- 01H
03H
04H
00H
00H
42H
C8H
CBH
<-- 05H
- Message of data sending from Host (PC to PLC) to Slave (2000) (code 10H)
QUERY
Address xxx
function 10H
add. hi xxx
add. lo xxx
n.data hi xxx
n.data lo xxx
n. bytes xxx
data MSB xxx
... xxx
data LSB xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
3-63
RESPONSE MESSAGE
Address xxx
function 10H
add. hi xxx
add. lo xxx
n. data hi xxx
n. data lo xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
Example 1:
The Host wants to write the batch setpoint:
Address of Slave: 1

O1H -->
10H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
04H
00H
00H
42H
C8H
C4H
E4H -->
<-- 01H
10H
00H
6CH
00H
02H
81H
<-- D5H
3-64
- Message of data sending (only 1 word ) from Host (PC or PLC) to Slave
(2000) (code 06H).
QUERY
Address xxx
function 06H
add. hi xxx
add. lo xxx
value hi xxx
value lo xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
RESPONSE MESSAGE
Address xxx
function 06H
add. hi xxx
add. lo xxx
value hi xxx
value lo xxx
crc16 lo xxx
crc16 hi xxx
Example 1:
The Host wants to write the batch number:
Batch number: 0
Address of Slave: 1
3-65
O1H -->
06H
00H
5CH
00H
00H
49H
D8H -->
<-- 01H
06H
00H
5CH
00H
00H
49H
D8H
<--
3.7.2 Register Mapping for Modbus
success_flag 33 0 successful, 1 failed.
display( 1 ) 34
display( 2 ) 35
display( 3 ) 36
display( 4 ) 37
display( 5 ) 38
display( 6 ) 39
3-66
display( 7 ) 40
display( 8 ) 41
display( 9 ) 42
display( 10 ) 43
display( 11 ) 44
display( 12 ) 45
display( 13 ) 46
display( 14 ) 47
display( 15 ) 48
display( 16 ) 49
display( 17 ) 50
display( 18 ) 51
display( 19 ) 52
display( 20 ) 53
display( 21 ) 54
display( 22 ) 55
display( 23 ) 56
display( 24 ) 57
display( 25 ) 58
display( 26 ) 59
display( 27 ) 60
display( 28 ) 61
display( 29 ) 62
display( 30 ) 63
display( 31 ) 64
3-67
display( 32 ) 65
display( 33 ) 66
display( 34 ) 67
display( 35 ) 68
display( 36 ) 69
display( 37 ) 70
display( 38 ) 71
display( 39 ) 72
display( 40 ) 73
leds 74
status( 1 ) 75
status( 2 ) 76
alarm_status( 1 ) 77
i_o( 1 ) 80
i_o( 2 ) 81
i_o( 3 ) 82
i_o( 4 ) 83
i_o( 5 ) 84
i_o( 6 ) 85
i_o( 7 ) 86
i_o( 8 ) 87
i_o( 9 ) 88
i_o( 10 ) 89
3-68
i_o( 11 ) 90
i_o( 12 ) 91
commands 92
batch_number 93 Integer (Load out option required)
batch_deviation 94 Integer (Load out option required)
rate( 1 ) 95 Float
rate( 2 ) 96
load( 1 ) 97 Float
load( 2 ) 98
speed( 1 ) 99 Float
speed( 2 ) 100
master_total( 1 ) 101 Float
master_total( 2 ) 102
reset_total( 1 ) 103 Float
reset_total( 2 ) 104
operator_total( 1 ) 105 Float
operator_total( 2 ) 106
batch_total( 1 ) 107 Float (Load out option required)
batch_total( 2 ) 108
batch_set_point( 1 ) 109 Float (Load out option required)
batch_set_point( 2 ) 110
batch_pre_set( 1 ) 111 Float (Load out option required)
batch_pre_set( 2 ) 112
batch_pre_act( 1 ) 113 Float (Load out option required)
batch_pre_act( 2 ) 114
3-69
scale_capacity( 1 ) 115 Float
scale_capacity( 2 ) 116
speed_capacity( 1 ) 117 Float
speed_capacity( 2 ) 118
load_cell_capacity( 1 ) 119 Float
load_cell_capacity( 2 ) 120
high_rate_set( 1 ) 121 Float
high_rate_set( 2 ) 122
low_rate_set( 1 ) 123 Float
low_rate_set( 2 ) 124
high_speed_set( 1 ) 125 Float
high_speed_set( 2 ) 126
low_speed_set( 1 ) 127 Float
low_speed_set( 2 ) 128
high_load_set( 1 ) 129 Float
high_load_set( 2 ) 130
low_load_set( 1 ) 131 Float
low_load_set( 2 ) 132
cal_error( 1 ) 133 Float
cal_error( 2 ) 134
span ( 1 ) 135 Float (ver 3.05 or later)
span ( 2 ) 136
zero ( 1 ) 137 Long (ver 3.05 or later)
zero ( 2 ) 138
azt correction ( 1 ) 139 Float (ver 3.05 or later)
3-70
azt correction ( 2 ) 140
Zero Reference ( 1 ) ** 141 ** Long
Zero Reference ( 2 ) 142 **
Auto zero max dev. ( 1 ) ** 143 ** Float
Auto zero max dev. ( 2 ) 144 **
Total AZ % ( 1 ) ** 145 ** Float
Total AZ % ( 2 ) 146 **
AZ Dev ( 1 ) ** 147 ** Long
AZ Dev ( 2 ) 148 **
AZT step ( 1 ) ** 149 ** Float
AZT step ( 2 ) 150 **
Belt warm up time ( 1 ) ** 151 ** Float
Belt warm up time ( 2 ) 152 **
Master total ( 1 ) * 153 ** 141 * (Double precision float)
Master total ( 2 ) 154 ** 142 *
Master total ( 3 ) 155 ** 143 *
Master total ( 4 ) 156 ** 144 *
Reset total ( 1 ) * 157 ** 145 * (Double precision float)
Reset total ( 2 ) 158 ** 146 *
Reset total ( 3 ) 159 ** 147 *
Reset total ( 4 ) 160 ** 148 *
Operator total ( 1 ) * 161 ** 149 * (Double precision float)
Operator total ( 2 ) 162 ** 150 *
Operator total ( 3 ) 163 151 *
3-71
Operator total ( 4 ) 164 154 *
Number of Trails 165 ** version 3.08 Microtech 2301 and

2201 only.
* Version 3.05 in Microtech 2001, 2101.

** Version 3.07 & above in Microtech 2301 and 2201.
3-72
3.8 ALLEN-BRADLEY DF1 (PLC-5)
3.8.1 Description
The DF1 is a proprietary protocol of Allen-Bradley. The protocol has been
implemented according to: Allen-Bradley "Reference Manual - Data Highway /
Data Highway Plus Protocol and Command Set". Publication 1770-6.5, 16
September 1991.
WARNING
ONLY A SUBSET OF THE PROTOCOL HAS BEEN IMPLEMENTED. THE
COMMANDS USED TO READ OR WRITE THE REGISTERS ARE: TYPED
READ (CODE 68H) AND TYPED WRITE (67H).
- Connect message
This message must be sent from Host to Slave before a request of sending data
can be performed.

DLE (10H) -->
SOH (01H)
ADDRESS OF SLAVE
DLE (10H)
STX (02H)
ADDRESS OF SLAVE
ADDRESS OF HOST
COMMAND (OF H)
STS (00H)
TMS (xxH)
TMS (xxH)
FNC (68 H)
PACKET OFFSET (LOW)
PACKET OFFSET (HIGHT)
TOTAL TRANS (LOW)
TOTAL TRANS (HIGHT)
ADDRESS OF DATA (FIRST BYTE)

ADDRESS OF DATA (SECOND BYTE)
ADDRESS OF DATA (THIRD BYTE)
ADDRESS OF DATA (FOURTH BYTE)
SIZE OF DATA IN ELEMENTS (LOW)
SIZE OF DATA IN ELEMENTS (HIGHT)
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC -->
<-- DLE (10H)

<-- ACK (06H)
3-73
- The HOST (PLC) asks for data from the Slave (2000):
This message is sent from the Host to the Slave to request a certain number of
data:

DLE (10H) -->
ENQ (05H)
ADDRESS SLAVE
BCC -->
<-- DLE (10H)

STX (02H)
ADDRESS HOST
ADDRESS SLAVE
4FH (COMMAND)
STS (00H)
TMS (xxH)
TMS (xxH)
TYPE DATA PARAMETER
DATA LSB MSB
...
DATA LSB MSB
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
<-- BCC
DLE (10H) -->
ACK (06H) -->
3-74
- The Host (PLC) sends data to the Slave (2000):
This message is used from the Host to download registers into the Slave unit.

DLE (10H) -->
SOH (01H)
ADDRESS OF SLAVE
DLE (10H)
STX (02H)
ADDRESS SLAVE
ADDRESS HOST
COMMAND (OFH)
STS (00H)
TMS (xxH)
TMS (xxH)
FNC (67 H)
PACKET OFFSET (LOW)
PACKET OFFSET (HIGHT)
TOTAL TRANS (LOW)
TOTAL TRANS (HIGHT)
ADDRESS OF DATA (FIRST BYTE)
ADDRESS OF DATA (SECOND BYTE)
ADDRESS OF DATA (THIRD BYTE)
ADDRESS OF DATA (FOURTH BYTE)
TYPE DATA PARAMETER
DATA LSB MSB

...
DATA LSB MSB
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC
-->
<-- DLE (10H)

<-- ACK (06H)
3-75
- The Host (PLC) asks the Slave (2000) if data were received o.k.:

DLE (10H) -->
ENQ (05H)
ADDRESS OF SLAVE
BCC -->
<-- DLE (10H)
STX (02H)
ADDRESS OF HOST
ADDRESS OF SLAVE
4FH (COMMAND)
STS (00H)
TMS (xxH)
TMS (xxH)
DLE (10H)
ETX (03H)
BCC
DLE (10H) -->

ACK (06H) -->
If the message is incorrectly received, the instrument does not respond.

The character 10H is doubled (sent two times), but it is computed once only in the
BCC.
3-76
Example 1:
The Host asks the instrument to send back the batch setpoint:
Setpoint: 200.5
Address of Host: 02

10H -->
01H
01H
10H
02H
01H
02H
0FH
00H
00H
00H
68H
00H
00H
01H
00H
07H
00H
08H
17H
01H
00H
10H
03H
08H
17H
01H
00H
10H
03H
6DH -->
<-- 10H
<-- 06H
10H -->
3-77
05H
01H -->
FFH <-- 10H
02H
02H
01H
4FH
00H
00H
00H
99H
09H
06H
94H
08H
00H
80H
48H
43H
10H
03H
<-- 5FH
-->
10H -->
06H
3-78
Example 2:
The Host sends to slave the batch setpoint:
Address of Host: 02+

10H -->
01H
01H
10H
02H
01H
02H
0FH
00H
00H
00H
67H
00H
00H
01H
00H
07H
00H
08H
07H
99H
09H
06H
94H
08H
00H
80H
48H
43H
10H
03H
20H
-->
3-79
<-- 10H
10H <-- 06H
05H -->
01H
FFH
-->
<-- 10H
02H
02H
01H
4FH
00H
00H
00H
10H
03H
10H <-- AEH
06H -->
-->
3-80
3.8.2 Register Mapping for DF1 Allen-Bradley (PLC-5)
success_flag N7:0 0 successful, 1 failed.
display( 1 ) N7:1
display( 2 ) N7:2
display( 3 ) N7:3
display( 4 ) N7:4
display( 5 ) N7:5
display( 6 ) N7:6
display( 7 ) N7:7
display( 8 ) N7:8
display( 9 ) N7:9
display( 10 ) N7:10
display( 11 ) N7:11
display( 12 ) N7:12
display( 13 ) N7:13
display( 14 ) N7:14
display( 15 ) N7:15
display( 16 ) N7:16
display( 17 ) N7:17
display( 18 ) N7:18
display( 19 ) N7:19
display( 20 ) N7:20
display( 21 ) N7:21
display( 22 ) N7:22
3-81
display( 23 ) N7:23
display( 24 ) N7:24
display( 25 ) N7:25
display( 26 ) N7:26
display( 27 ) N7:27
display( 28 ) N7:28
display( 29 ) N7:29
display( 30 ) N7:30
display( 31 ) N7:31
display( 32 ) N7:32
display( 33 ) N7:33
display( 34 ) N7:34
display( 35 ) N7:35
display( 36 ) N7:36
display( 37 ) N7:37
display( 38 ) N7:38
display( 39 ) N7:39
display( 40 ) N7:40
leds N7:41
status( 1 ) N7:42
status( 2 ) N7:43
alarm_status( 1 ) N7:44
i_o( 1 ) N7:47
3-82
i_o( 2 ) N7:48
i_o( 3 ) N7:49
i_o( 4 ) N7:50
i_o( 5 ) N7:51
i_o( 6 ) N7:52
i_o( 7 ) N7:53
i_o( 8 ) N7:54
i_o( 9 ) N7:55
i_o( 10 ) N7:56
i_o( 11 ) N7:57
i_o( 12 ) N7:58
commands N7:59
batch_number N7:60 Load out option required
batch_deviation N7:61 Load out option required
rate F8:0
load F8:1
speed F8:2
master_total F8:3
reset_total F8:4
operator_total F8:5
batch_total F8:6 Load out option required
batch_set_point F8:7
batch_pre_set F8:8 Load out option required
batch_pre_act F8:9 Load out option required
scale_capacity F8:10
3-83
speed_capacity F8:11
load_cell_capacity F8:12
high_rate_set F8:13
low_rate_set F8:14
high_speed_set F8:15
low_speed_set F8:16
high_load_set F8:17
low_load_set F8:18
cal_error F8:19
3-84
CHAPTER 4.0
MAINTENANCE
4.1 GENERAL
Refer to the Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator manual for maintenance information.
4-1
CHAPTER 5.0
PARTS
5.1 GENERAL
Refer to the Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator manual for parts information.

5
5. SE
ENSO
OR DE
D VELO
V OCID
DAD
D

Model 61-12C (FM)
or 61-12 C/CSA
Speed Sensor
Operating and Service Manual
REC 3449 Rev M P/N 013984
Revision History
Revision Number Date ECO Number Release Specifics
A March 1995
B December 1995
C January 1990
D March 1991
E September 1991
F February 1993
G May 1999
H February 2001
J April 2001
K July 2006
L December 2007
M November 2008
This document is confidential and is the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific (Thermo Scientific). It may not
be copied or reproduced in any way without the express written consent of Thermo Fisher Scientific. This doc-
ument also is an unpublished work of Thermo Fisher Scientific. Thermo Fisher Scientific intends to, and is
maintaining the work as confidential information. Thermo Fisher Scientific also may seek to protect this work
as an unpublished copyright. In the event of either inadvertent or deliberate publication, Thermo Fisher Scien-
tific intends to enforce its rights to this work under the copyright laws as a published work. Those having
access to this work may not copy, use, or disclose the information in this work unless expressly authorized by
Thermo Fisher Scientific.
"Microsoft" and "Windows" are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific and its subsidiaries.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
The Occupational Safety and Health Act clearly places the burden of compliance on the user of the equipment
and the act is generalized to the extent that determination of compliance is a judgment decision on the part of
the local inspection. Hence, Thermo Fisher Scientific will not be responsible for meeting the full requirements
of OSHA in respect to the equipment supplied or for any penalty assessed for failure to meet the requirements,
in respect to the equipment supplied, of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as interpreted by an autho-
rized inspector. Thermo Fisher Scientific will use their best efforts to remedy such violation at a reasonable
cost to the buyer.
Thermo Fisher Scientific Warranty
The seller agrees, represents, and warrants that the equipment delivered hereunder shall be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Such warranty shall not apply to accessories, parts, or material purchased by the
seller unless they are manufactured pursuant to seller's design, but shall apply to the workmanship incorporated
in the installation of such items in the complete equipment. To the extent purchased parts or accessories are
covered by the manufacturer's warranty, seller shall extend such warranty to buyer.
Seller's obligation under said warranty is conditioned upon the return of the defective equipment, transporta-
tion charges prepaid, to the seller's factory in Minneapolis, Minnesota, and the submission of reasonable proof
to seller prior to return of the equipment that the defect is due to a matter embraced within seller's warranty
hereunder. Any such defect in material and workmanship shall be presented to seller as soon as such alleged
errors or defects are discovered by purchaser and seller is given opportunity to investigate and correct alleged
errors or defects and in all cases, buyer must have notified seller thereof within one (1) year after delivery, or
one (1) year after installation if the installation was accomplished by the seller.
Said warranty shall not apply if the equipment shall not have been operated and maintained in accordance with
seller's written instructions applicable to such equipment, or if such equipment shall have been repaired or
altered or modified without seller's approval; provided, however, that the foregoing limitation of warranty inso-
far as it relates to repairs, alterations, or modifications, shall not be applicable to routine preventive and correc-
tive maintenance which normally occur in the operation of the equipment.
"EXCEPT FOR THOSE WARRANTIES SPECIFICALLY CONTAINED HEREIN, SELLER DISCLAIMS
ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT DELIVERED HEREUNDER,
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE. THE
SOLE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING OUT OF THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL BE
EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO BREACH OF THOSE WARRANTIES. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE WARRANTIES SET OUT ABOVE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE ACCESSORY, PART OR MATERIAL WITH A SIM-
ILAR ITEM FREE FROM DEFECT, AND THE CORRECTION OF ANY DEFECT IN WORKMANSHIP.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES."
Purchaser agrees to underwrite the cost of any labor required for replacement; including time, travel, and living
expenses of a Thermo Fisher Scientific Field Service Engineer at the closest factory base.
Thermo Fisher Scientific
501 90th Ave NW
Phone: (800) 445-3503
Fax: (763) 783-2525
Disclaimer
Though the information provided herein is believed to be accurate, be advised that the information contained
herein is not a guarantee for satisfactory results. Specifically, this information is neither a warranty nor guaran-
tee, expressed or implied, regarding performance, merchantability, fitness, or any other matter with respect to
the products, and recommendation for use of the product/process information in conflict with any patent.
Please note that Thermo Fisher Scientific reserves the right to change and/or improve the product design and
specifications without notice.
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................ 1-1
Overview ...................................................................... 1-1
Application ................................................................... 1-2
Unpacking and Inspection ............................................ 1-2
Storage........................................................................ 1-2
Chapter 2 Installation .................................................................. 2-1

Overview ...................................................................... 2-1
Coupling Installation ..................................................... 2-1
Restraint Arm Installation ............................................. 2-3
Electrical wiring ............................................................ 2-7
Chapter 3 Operation .................................................................... 3-1

Overview ...................................................................... 3-1
Model 61-12C............................................................... 3-1
Chapter 4 Maintenance................................................................ 4-1

Overview ...................................................................... 4-1
Calibration .................................................................... 4-1
Chapter 5 Service, Repair, and Replacement Parts.................. 5-1

Parts Ordering Information ........................................... 5-2
Contact Information ...................................................... 5-5
Parts List ...................................................................... 5-8
Appendix A Engineering Drawings .............................................A-1
Appendix B Factory Mutual Report .............................................B-1

Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1. Model 61-12C Speed Sensor..................................................1 - 1
Figure 2-1. Method A Installation ............................................................2 - 2
Figure 2-2. Method B Installation ............................................................2 - 2
Figure 2-3. Mounting Illustration .............................................................2 - 4
Figure 2-4. Field Wiring Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor ...........................2 - 7
Figure 3-1. Method B Installation.............................................................3 - 1
Figure 3-2. 61-12C Output Voltage Waveform........................................3 - 2
Figure 5-1. Centering Template for Speed Sensor ..................................5 - 6
Thermo Fisher Scientific REC 3349 Rev M

REC 3349 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific
About This Manual
This manual provides information you need to install, operate, and
maintain a Model 61-12 C (FM) or Model 61-12 C/CSA Speed Sensor.
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and
system safety and for the best product performance, make sure you
thoroughly understand the contents before using this machine.
Who Should Use This Model 61-12 C (FM) Speed Sensor manual is a learning resource
this Guide? and reference for anyone concerned with installing, operating or
maintaining the speed sensor.
Organization of This Guide is organized into five chapters and two appendices.
this Guide Chapter 1: Introduction to the Model 61-12C (FM) Speed Sensor – gives you
an overview of the device’s capabilities, describes its functions, and
lists it technical specifications.
Chapter 2: Installing the Model 61-12 C (FM) Speed Sensor– provides
information about the installation of the speed sensor.
Chapter 3: Model 61-12C (FM) Speed Sensor Operations- provides
information about setting up, testing, and operating the speed sensor.
Chapter 4: Maintaing and Troubleshooting the 61-12 C (FM) Speed Sensor –
provides information about maintenance and troubleshooting. It
includes procedures for determining and correcting operational
problems.
Chapter 5: Service Repair and Replacement Parts - tells you how to contact
Thermo Fisher Scientific and how to order parts.
Appendix A: Engineering Drawings
Appendix B: Factory Mutual Report
Thermo Fisher Scientific i REC 3449 Rev M

About this Manual
Documentation The following conventions are used in this manual to help easily identify
Conventions certain types of information.
Bold is used the first time a new term is introduced.
Italic is used to for emphasis and terms that have already been
introduced.
Blue is used for references to other sections of the guide and serve as
links in documents.
SMALL CAPS are used in the names of setup, calibration, menu displays,
and variables.
BOLD CAPITALS are used for the names of keys.
NOTE. Provides information of special importance to the reader. S
HINT. This symbol indicates a hint that may be of value but not
necessary for operation. S
ii REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

About this Manual
Safety Messages Instructions in this manual may require special precautions to ensure the
safety of the personnel performing the operations.
There are two levels of safety messages: warnings and cautions. The
distinction between the two is as follows:
CAUTION. Failure to observe could result in death or serious

injury. S
WARNING. Failure to observe could result in death or serious

injury. S
General Precautions Do not install, operate, or perform any maintenance procedures until you
have read the safety precautions presented.
WARNING. Failure to follow safe installation and servicing

procedures could result in death or serious injury. S
• Make sure only personnel trained by a Thermo Fisher Scientific

representative perform installation and maintenance
procedures in accordance with the instructions in this manual.
• Allow only qualified electricians trained by a Thermo Fisher
Scientific representative to open and work in the electronics
cabinet and terminal boxes.
• Covers over the electronics and moving parts must always
remain in place during normal operation. Remove only for
maintenance with the machines power OFF. Replace all covers
before resuming operation.
• During maintenance, a safety tag (not supplied by Thermo
Fisher Scientific) is to be displayed over the ON/OFF switch
area instructing others not to operate the unit (ANSI:B157.1)
Thermo Fisher Scientific iii REC 3449 Rev M

About this Manual
CAUTION. High voltage that may be present on leads could cause

electrical shock. S
• The main isolator switch must be OFF when checking input AC

electrical connections, removing or inserting any electrical
item, or attaching voltmeters to the system.
• Allow a minimum of 5 minutes between turning the mains
isolator to the OFF position and opening the access panel of
the machine.
• Use extreme caution when testing in, on, or around the
electronics cabinet, high voltages in excess of 115 V or 230 V
are present in these areas.
WARNING. Do not make changes to this equipment of any kind

without prior consultation with Thermo Fisher Scientific. S
Inspection Inspect the packages for external damage before opening. After
unpacking, inspect the unit for damage and compare parts to those and
the shipping invoice.
iv REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

About this Manual
Thermo Fisher Scientific v REC 3449 Rev M

About this Manual
vi REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

Chapter 1
Introduction
Overview The Model 61-12 C (FM) Speed Sensor is designed and constructed for
direct connection to a conveyor tail pulley, snubbing roll, or large
diameter return roller.
The speed sensor employs a brushless pulse generator producing a stream

of pulses, each pulse representing a unit of belt travel. Frequency of the
pulse stream is proportional to true belt speed.
The Model 61-12 C (FM) is Factory Mutual (FM) approved for Class I,
Division II, Groups D and Class II, Divisions I and II, Groups E, F, G.
Figure 1-1. Model 61-12C Speed Sensor
Thermo Fisher Scientific REC 3449 Rev M 1-1

Introduction
Unpacking and Inspection
Application The speed sensor is coupled to a rotating shaft which drives a generator
inside the housing. The Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor has a usable range
between 20 and 200 RPM. The frequency of the speed sensor output
signal is exactly proportional to shaft speed and provides the required
speed input to a Integrator/Totalizer.
Unpacking and The Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor has been properly packaged and
Inspection inspected prior to shipment. Before unpacking, be certain to check the
package for external damage, as the carrier may often times be held
responsible for shipping damage.
Storage The Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor can be safely stored indoors, with hole
plugs installed, between -50 and +70 degrees C (-58 to +158 degrees F).
The unit must be protected against moisture.
1-2 REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

Chapter 2
Installation
Overview The Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor must be attached to a pulley shaft
which turns at true conveyor belt speed. Normally, the tail pulley shaft or
a snubbing roll shaft satisfies this requirement. In installations where the
tail pulley or snubbing roll shaft is not accessible, an additional pulley
must be installed specifically for the speed sensor.
Coupling Installation Two methods of coupling the speed sensor to the pulley shaft are shown
in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2. Other methods may work as well. The most
important requirement is that the speed sensor remains free floating and
not rigidly coupled to the conveyor frame.
Note. Never mount speed sensor on a driven pulley. S
Use the following procedures for coupling installation:
Method “A” Locate the exact center of tail pulley or snubbing roll shaft. Figure 5-1
may be cut out and used as a centering guide. (Refer to Figure 2-1)
1. Locate circle guide over tail pulley shaft and punch center. Drill a
1-3/4" deep hole using a 17/32" drill. (Drilling a smaller pilot hole is
helpful in assuring correct centering).
2. Tap this hole using a 5/8"-11 tap.
3. Clean out oil and dirt with an appropriate solvent and apply a thread
lock retaining compound, such as "LOCKTITE thread locker 262".
4. Thread in supplied stub shaft coupling (part# 037711) so that
coupling collar bottoms out against tail pulley or snubbing shaft. See
Figure 2-1.
5. Insert 61-12 C speed sensor into coupling. Be sure to align shaft flat
spot with set screws on coupling. Tighten all set screws securely.

Installation
Overview
Figure 2-1. Method A Installation
Method “B” If customer's tail pulley shaft has a 5/8" diameter stub shaft extending
from it and is concentric with the centerline of the driving shaft, use part
#002931 to couple 61-12 speed sensor to tail pulley shaft. (Refer to
Figure 2-2.) This coupling is not supplied with the speed sensor but may
be purchased separately from Thermo Fisher Scientific.
It would be advisable to provide two flat surfaces, 90° apart, on the stub
shaft for a good set screw holding power.
Note. If possible, weld coupling to tail pulley shaft. Do not weld to

any part of 61-12 C speed sensor. S
Align shaft flat spots with set screws on coupling. See Figure 2-2.
Tighten all set screws securely.
Figure 2-2. Method B Installation

Installation
Restraint Arm Installation
Restraint Arm 1. Attach restraint arm to speed sensor with two (supplied) 5/16" x
Installation 1-1/4" bolts. See Figure 2-3. The restraint arm should be mounted in
a direction that will allow the sensor restraint arm to twist against the
mechanical stop and in the direction of belt travel.
2. Weld or otherwise secure an appropriate mechanical stop such as a
piece of scrap iron (or a bolt) to the conveyor frame. Rotate restraint
arm to let it rest on the stop. See Figure 2-3. Make the mechanical
stop large enough to accommodate some lateral movement of the
restraint arm.
3. Fit one end of the supplied restraining spring through the hole in the
end of the restraint arm. Attach the other end to the conveyor frame.
Location should be such as to give a 1/2 inch spring stretch. Do not
over-tighten spring as this may cause premature failure. See Figure
2-3.
4. Although not required, it is recommended that a rock or step shield be
fabricated and installed around the speed sensor.
Note. The purpose of this mounting arrangement is to allow the

speed sensor to “float” and accommodate any slight misalignment
of the coupling. Therefore, no resultant bearing stress is applied
due to misalignment, nor will a slight “wobble” of the device result
in electrical errors. S
Alternate Sensor In installations where the tail pulley or snubbing roll shaft is not
Location accessible, an additional pulley must be installed specifically for the
speed sensor. When using an additional pulley for the speed sensor, the
following requirements are essential:
1. Select the proper pulley diameter to provide a shaft RPM within the
range of the speed sensor (at rated belt speed or over the range of belt
speeds that are of concern).
2. Locate the pulley on the clean side of the return belt to minimize
material build up on the pulley.
3. Install the unit in such a manner as to provide 15 to 30 degrees
contact wrap on the pulley. Any slippage between belt and pulley will
decrease the belt scale accuracy.

Installation
Alternate Sensor Location
CAUTION. Unless the installation is consistent with the

illustrations shown in Figures 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3, and as described
above, the warranty on the device is void. S

Installation
Figure 2-3. Mounting Illustration
1. Speed Sensor must not be mounted rigid. Use restraint arm and
retaining spring. Mechanical stop and spring mount are by others.
2. Attach spring in location such as to give 1/2” spring stretch.
3. All wiring by others in accordance with system field wiring diagram
and applicable codes.

Installation
Speed Minimum “A” Maximum “A”
100 FPM 2” 14”
200 FPM 4” 36”
300 FPM 6” 48”
400 FPM 8” 60”
500 FPM 10” 60”
600 FPM 12” 60”
700 FPM 14” 60”
800 FPM 16” 60”
900 FPM 18” 60”
1000 FPM 20” 60”

Installation
5/8-11
UNC
A0041d
A0041a
A0041b A0041c
1. Speed Sensor to be driven by conveyor tail pulley shaft or by special

return roll.
2. Unit must be directly coupled to driving shaft. Do not drive with
chains, belts, gears, etc.
3. Customer to provide 5/8-11 tapped hole 1.75” deep.
4. Do not rigid mount speed sensor.

Installation
Electrical Wiring
Electrical Wiring
WARNING. This device is rated for use in areas described as:

Class I, Division 2, Group D, and Class II, Divisions 1 and 2,
Groups E, F, and G as defined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC). S
WARNING. All wiring must be made in accordance with field wiring

diagram, Figure 2-5, and the National Electrical Code. S
Figure 2-4. Field Wiring Model 61-12 C Speed Sensor
CAUTION. Two wires connecting the speed sensor to the

integrator/totalizer must be shielded. Refer to filed wiring diagram
in Figure 2-4 for proper shield termination. S

Installation
Electrical Wiring
CAUTION. The speed sensor must be connected to a solid earth

ground. A ground terminal screw (green) is connected to the
housing by Thermo Fisher Scientific. Earth ground wire to be
provided by others. See Figure 2-4. S
Notes:
1. Shielded cable, Belden #8762 (2 conductor) or equivalent.
2. Connect shield at integrator/totalizer end only. Make no connection at
speed sensor end.

Installation
Electrical Wiring

Chapter 3
Operation
Overview The speed sensor element employs a brushless, pulse generator which
produces a stream of pulses, each pulse representing a unit of belt travel.
The frequency of the pulse stream is proportional to true belt speed. The
pulse output signal is fed to the Integrator/ Totalizer.
Model 61-12 C The Model 61-12 C supplies the output of the generator directly to the
totalizer for high speed operation (20-200 RPM).
The rotor consists of a 50-slot permanent magnet that is rotated in the

stator. The 61-12 C puts out 50 pulses per revolution; the output
frequency is therefore the product of RPM x .8333. The output signal is a
+5.6 volt pulse. The 61-12 C does not require an external power source to
operate.
Figure 3-1. Method B Installation

Operation
Motor MFG Color
A B C
Superior SS25 Red White Black
Oriental Red White Black

C8115-925
Source Eng. 57TYG002 Blue White Red

(2)
Figure 3-2. 61-12C Output Voltage Waveform

Chapter 4
Maintenance
Overview When performing scale calibration, it is a good practice to inspect the shaft cou-
pling for tightness. Also verify that the restraint arm is free to move. If arm has
worn a slot in the restraint stop and the restraint bar cannot float back and forth
as well as against the spring, corrections should be made.
Calibration No adjustment or calibration of the device is necessary. Operating temperature

range is -20°F to 130°F.

Maintenance
Calibration

Chapter 5
Service, Repair, and Replacement
Parts
This chapter provides information about service, repair, and replacement

parts for your Thermo Scientific product. It includes the telephone
numbers for various departments at Thermo Fisher Scientific, the
procedure for ordering replacement parts, a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) Form, and the appropriate parts lists.
The maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your

service needs. If you encounter a problem that requires technical
assistance, please call Thermo Fisher Scientific Product Service at (800)
445-3503.
Thermo Fisher Scientific also provides on-site service technicians to

assist you with the installation, setup, initial calibration, customer
training, maintenance, and repair of your equipment. Please contact the
Thermo Fisher Scientific Field Service department at the number given
below for current rates and scheduling.
A Thermo Fisher Scientific repair center is located at the plant in

Minneapolis, Minnesota. Products that need system checkout or repair
can be returned to the plant with the Return Material Authorization
(RMA) Form. Contact our Repair and Return department at (800)
445-3503 to get a number to use on the form.
Note: Have your machine model number and serial number available
when you call.
Main Switchboard (763) 783-2500

FAX (763) 783-2525
Service (800) 445-3503
RMA and Repair (800) 445-3503
24 x 7 phone support
Or any local Thermo Fisher Scientific office.

Service, Repair, and Replacement Parts
Parts Ordering Information
Parts Ordering For the fastest service when ordering parts, telephone or FAX the Thermo
Information Fisher Scientific Parts Department at the numbers given below. Your
regional field service representative can also assist you with parts orders.
The recommended procedure for ordering parts is:
1. Determine the broken or faulty part.

2. Locate the part in the Parts List.
3. Find the part number(s) for the item(s) you need.
4. Before you contact Thermo Fisher Scientific for your parts, make
sure you have the following information:
• Machine model and serial number
• Purchase Order number
• Date Required
• Preferred shipping method
• Part number(s), description, and quantity needed.
Telephone or FAX:

501 90th Ave NW
FAX: (763) 783-2525
Phone: (763) 783-2500
Return Material Authorization and Repair: (800) 445-3503

501 90th Avenue N.W. 1-800-445-3503

Minneapol is, MN 554 33 Fax: 76 3.783.2525
501 90 Avenue N.W.
th
1-800-445-3503
11/27/2008 www.t hermo.com
Dear Customer,
Thank you for using our i n-house repair servi ce. To expedite your repair, control costs, an d ensure that safety
Dear Customer,
requi rement s are met please follow thes e si mpl e steps.
Thank you for using our i n-house repair servi ce. To expedite your repair, control costs, an d ensure that safety
1. Send in a copy of this c ompleted form with a copy of your PO to the fax or email listed above. An
requi rement s are met please follow thes e si mpl e steps.
RMA wi ll not be iss ued without a hard copy PO on file.
1. Send in a copy of this c ompleted form with a copy of your PO to the fax or email listed above. An
2. On ce an RMA has been issued, you will be sent a s hipping label noting your RMA number and the
RMA wi ll not be iss ued without a hard copy PO on file.
address to shi p t he parts back to. The assigned RMA number i s valid for 30 days from the date of
2. On ce an RMA has been issued, you will be sent a s hipping label noting your RMA number and the
iss uance. If your part(s) is not received within 30 days, your PO will be cancelled and a new RMA will
address to shi p t he parts back to. The assigned RMA number i s valid for 30 days from the date of
be required. All parts for repair MUST reference a valid RMA numb er or the part will b e returned at
iss uance. If your part(s) is not received within 30 days, your PO will be cancelled and a new RMA will
your cost.
be required. All parts for repair MUST reference a valid RMA numb er or the part will b e returned at
3. Please do not ship part ial shipments. Your return must be complete. Any parts received separately
your cost.
will requi re a separate RMA and PO. Return on ly thos e produc ts whic h are authorized by the RMA.
3. Please do not ship part ial shipments. Your return must be complete. Any parts received separately
Additional product s t hat are sent without approval may be returned to you.
will requi re a separate RMA and PO. Return on ly thos e produc ts whic h are authorized by the RMA.
4. If a product is determined to be a “no defect found” then an evaluation fee of $250.00 per part
Additional product s t hat are sent without approval may be returned to you.
($500.00 per full
4. If a product is determined to be a “no defect found” then an evaluation fee of $250.00 per part
5. system) s ent i n will be charged.
($500.00 per full
Thank you for giving Thermo Fis her Scientifi c the opport unity to s at isfy your servic e needs. You can contact
5. system) s ent i n will be charged.
me by sending an e-mail to __________ ___________ _____________ or by callin g 1 -800-445-3503.
Thank you for giving Thermo Fis her Scientifi c the opport unity to s at isfy your servic e needs. You can contact
me by sending an e-mail to __________Return___________
Material Authorization
_____________ or (RMA)
by callin g Form
1 -800-445-3503.
Note: Thermo Fisher Sc ientific safety polic y requi res
Return Material Authorization (RMA) Form a decontamination form for any package being
rec eived into our buildi ng. Please compl ete the followi ng paperwork an d s end it to the fax or email noted
Note: Thermo Fisher Sc ientific safety polic y requi res a decontamination form for any package being
above. Fai lure to do so will cause del ays. If the unit is not decontaminated as requi red, there will be a
rec eived into our buildi ng. Please compl ete the followi ng paperwork an d s end it to the fax or email noted
$300 .0 0 mini mum charge.
above. Fai lure to do so will cause del ays. If the unit is not decontaminated as requi red, there will be a
$300 .0 0 mini mum charge.
CONTACT INF ORMATION
Contact Name: ____________ _____________ ___________ __
CONTACT INF ORMATION
Phone Number: _______ ___________
Contact Name: ____________ _____________ ___________ __
Fax Number: ____________ _______
Phone Number: _______ ___________
Email: __________ _____________ ________
Fax Number: ____________ _______
Email: __________ _____________ ________
SHIPPING INFORMATION
Company Name: ___________ ____________ ____________ ____________ _____
SHIPPING INFORMATION
Address: ___________ _____________ ___________ ____________ ___________
Company Name: ___________ ____________ ____________ ____________ _____
City: ___ _____________ _______ State: _______ ___ Zip: ___ __
Address: ___________ _____________ ___________ ____________ ___________
City: ___ _____________ _______ State: _______ ___ Zip: ___ __
BILLING INF ORMATION (If different from above):
Company Name: ___________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________
BILLING INF ORMATION (If different from above):
Address: ___________ _____________ ___________ ____________ ____________ ______
Company Name: ___________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________
City: ___ _____________ __________ State: _______ ___ Zip: ____ _______
Address: ___________ _____________ ___________ ____________ ____________ ______
A/P Con tac t Name: ____ __________ __________
City: ___ _____________ __________ State: _______ ___ Zip: ____ _______
Phone Number: _______ __________
A/P Con tac t Name: ____ __________ __________
Fax Number: ____________ _______
Phone Number: _______ __________
Email: __________ _____________ ___________
Fax Number: ____________ _______
TAX EXEMPT: Yes No
Email: __________ _____________ ___________
TAX EXEMPT: Yes No
PAYMENT INF ORMATION (Choose One):
PAYMENT INF ORMATION (Choose One):
Credit Card (If you wi sh to pay via c redit card, please c al l 800-2 27-889 1, opt.2. In order to protec t our
cus tomers from acci dental data compromise, Thermo Fisher Scientific dba Thermo Rams ey Inc does not accept
Credit Card (If you wi sh to pay via c redit card, please c al l 800-2 27-889 1, opt.2. In order to protec t our
cred it card numbers via email or fax.)
cus tomers from acci dental data compromise, Thermo Fisher Scientific dba Thermo Rams ey Inc does not accept
cred it card numbers via email or fax.)
Purchase Order (If you wish to pay via PO, pl ease send an official hard copy PO wit h this form)
PO Number: _____________ _____
Purchase Order (If you wish to pay via PO, pl ease send an official hard copy PO wit h this form)
PO Number: _____________ _____
W arranty (All warranties need to be pre-approved by our tec h support representatives prior to an RMA
being iss ued. If this box is checked then a tech support rep will be contacting you s hortly)
W arranty (All warranties need to be pre-approved by our tec h support representatives prior to an RMA
being iss ued. If this box is checked then a tech support rep will be contacting you s hortly)

501 90th Avenue N.W. 1-800-445-3503

PRODUCT INFORMATION:
Part number: ______________________________
Part Description: ____________________________
Problem description:
_____________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Part number: ______________________________

Part Description: ____________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Part number: _____________________________

Part Description: ___________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Part number: _____________________________

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Part number: _____________________________

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________

501 90th Avenue N.W. 1-800-445-3503

DECONTAMINATION FORM
Please complete all areas of the Decontamination Declaration below.
• Orders without a Decontamination Declaration will not be processed and the

instrument will be returned to the sender via collect freight.
• Please send this form with a hard copy of your PO to the above email or fax number to
obtain an RMA number for shipping. Retain a copy for your records.
Please provide a specific description of your system’s use:

Describe type of product run on your equipment:
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
Please describe all cleaning and/or decontamination performed:

____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ ________
Check all that apply:
Out of Box Failure Non-Hazardous Materials only Hazardous Material (See Below)
Hazardous Materials:
Carc inogen Bac teria Fungus Pathogen Toxic Subs tance
Radioactive Virus Corrosive Flammable Chem. Reactive Chem.

Chem. Hazard Hazard Hazard
Animal/ Plant/ Mineral (Explain) Oth er (Explain)
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ __ __________ ____________ ____________ ________
____ ____________ ____________ ____________ __ __________ ____________ ____________ ________
____ ____________ ___ __________ _________
To the bes t of my knowledge, this equipment is free of harmful or hazardous chemical, biological or radioacti ve
contamination. I understand that if the equi pment is found to be contaminated, regardless of the signature on
this doc ument, the equipmen t will b e returned at my company's expens e.
Signature: ____________________Title: ____________Date: ______

Thermo Fisher Scientific Offices
Thermo Fisher Here is a list of Thermo Fisher Scientific offices worldwide.

Scientific Offices
Australia
+61 (0) 8 8208 8200
+61 (0) 8 8234 3772 (fax)
Canada
+1 (905) 888-8808
+1 (905) 888-8828 (fax)
Chile
+56 (0) 2 378 8050
+56 (0) 2 370 1082 (fax)
China
+86 (0) 21 6865 4588
+86 (0) 21 6445 7830 (fax)
Germany
+49 (0) 208-824930
+49 (0) 208-852310 (fax)
India
+91 (20)-6626-7000
+91 (20)-6626-7001 (fax)
Italy
+39 02-959514-1
+39 02-953200-15 (fax)
Netherlands
+31 (0) 76-579-5555
+31 (0) 76-571-4958 (fax)
South Africa
+27 (0) 11-609-3101
+27 (0) 11-609-3110 (fax)
Spain
+34 (0) 91-484-5965
+34 (0) 91-484-3597 (fax)

Thermo Fisher Scientific Offices
United Kingdom
+44 (0) 1788-820300
+44 (0) 1788-820301 (fax)
United States
+1 (800) 445-3503
+1 (763) 783-2525 (fax)
+1 (763) 783-2500 (direct)

Disposal of Hazardous Waste
Disposal of Disposal of lithium batteries and soldered printed circuit boards must be
Hazardous Waste in accordance with your local Hazardous Waste Policy.
As an alternative, a product supplied by Thermo Fisher Scientific may be

returned, freight pre-paid, for disposal. Contact the Repair Department
for a Return Material Authorization Number, before shipping any
product for disposal.
Parts List This list provides part numbers and descriptions of the replaceable parts
for the Model 61-12C Speed Sensor.
ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NO.

Speed Sensor, Model 61-12C/FM 005995
Speed Sensor Accessories:

Diode, Zener IN4734A, 5.6-V 001303
Capacitor, Tant 1-mf, 50-V 001173
Clamp Bar (Restraint Arm) 002920
Coupling Shaft, 6.25 Bore 002931
Spring, Extension for Clamp Bar 001988
Motor Support 040736
Motor, Step, AC 001522
Coupling, shaft, threaded 037711

Parts List
Figure 5-1. Centering Template for Speed Sensor

Parts List

Appendix A
Engineering Drawings
This appendix contains engineering drawings for your Model 61-12 C

Speed Sensor. The following drawing is included.
• Outline and Installation Diagram, Speed Sensor Model 61-12 C

(FM Approved) - C07046A-B019
Thermo Fisher Scientific REC 3449 Rev M A-1

Engineering Drawings
A-2 REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

Appendix B
Factory Mutual Report
Overview This appendix contains Factory Mutual Report 3007635 on the 61-12C
Speed Sensor.
Thermo Fisher Scientific B-1 REC 3449 Rev M

Overview
B-2 REC 3449 Rev M Thermo Fisher Scientific

Overview

Overview

Overview

Overview

6.. SIS
STEM
MAS
S DE
E ESC
CAL
LA DE
T
TRAN NSPO
ORT
TADO
OR DE
D FAJA
F A

Handbook 44 –2010 2.21. Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems
Table of Contents
Section 2.21. Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems .................................................................... 2-57

A. Application .................................................................................................................................................. 2-57
S. Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 2-57
S.1. Design of Indicating and Recording Elements................................................................................... 2-57
S.1.1. General................................................................................................................................. 2-57
S.1.2. Units..................................................................................................................................... 2-57
S.1.3. Value of the Scale Division. ................................................................................................ 2-57
S.1.4. Recording Elements and Recorded Representations. .......................................................... 2-58
S.1.5. Rate of Flow Indicators and Recorders. .............................................................................. 2-58
S.1.6. Advancement of Primary Indicating or Recording Elements. ............................................. 2-58
S.1.7. Master Weight Totalizer. ..................................................................................................... 2-58
S.1.8. Power Loss........................................................................................................................... 2-58
S.2. Design of Weighing Elements. .......................................................................................................... 2-58
S.2.1. Speed Measurement. ............................................................................................................ 2-58
S.2.2. Adjustable Components. ...................................................................................................... 2-58
S.2.3. Overload Protection. ............................................................................................................ 2-58
S.3. Zero Setting........................................................................................................................................ 2-59
S.3.1. Design of Zero-Setting Mechanism. .................................................................................... 2-59
S.3.2. Sensitivity at Zero Load (For Type Evaluation)................................................................... 2-59
S.4. Marking Requirements....................................................................................................................... 2-59
S.5. Provision for Sealing. ........................................................................................................................ 2-59
N. Notes............................................................................................................................................................. 2-60
N.1. General............................................................................................................................................... 2-60
N.1.1. Official Test. ........................................................................................................................ 2-60
N.1.2. Simulated Test. .................................................................................................................... 2-60
N.2. Conditions of Tests. ........................................................................................................................... 2-60
N.2.1. Initial Verification................................................................................................................ 2-60
N.2.2. Subsequent Verification....................................................................................................... 2-61
N.2.3. Minimum Test Load. ........................................................................................................... 2-61
N.3. Test Procedures.................................................................................................................................. 2-61
N.3.1. Zero-Load Tests................................................................................................................... 2-61
N.3.2. Material Tests. ..................................................................................................................... 2-62
N.3.3. Simulated Load Tests........................................................................................................... 2-63
T. Tolerances.................................................................................................................................................... 2-63
T.1. Tolerance Values. .............................................................................................................................. 2-63
T.1.1. Tolerance Values – Test of Zero Stability. .......................................................................... 2-63
T.2. Tolerance Values, Repeatability Tests............................................................................................... 2-63
T.3. Influence Factors................................................................................................................................ 2-63
T.3.1. Temperature. ........................................................................................................................ 2-64
T.3.2. Power Supply, Voltage, and Frequency............................................................................... 2-64
UR. User Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 2-64
UR.1. Use Requirements. ............................................................................................................................. 2-64
UR.1.1. Minimum Totalized Load. ................................................................................................... 2-64
UR.1.2. Security Means. ................................................................................................................... 2-64
2-55
2.21. Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems Handbook 44 – 2010
UR.2. Installation Requirements. ................................................................................................................. 2-64

UR.2.1. Protection from Environmental Factors. .............................................................................. 2-64
UR.2.2. Conveyor Installation........................................................................................................... 2-64
UR.2.3. Material Test........................................................................................................................ 2-66
UR.2.4. Belt Travel (Speed or Velocity). .......................................................................................... 2-66
UR.3. Use Requirements. ............................................................................................................................. 2-66
UR.3.1. Loading. ............................................................................................................................... 2-66
UR.3.2. Maintenance......................................................................................................................... 2-66
UR.3.3. Retention of Maintenance, Test, and Analog or Digital Recorder Information. .................. 2-68
UR.3.4. Diversion or Loss of Measured Product............................................................................... 2-68
UR.4. Compliance. ....................................................................................................................................... 2-68
2-56
Section 2.21. Belt-Conveyor Scale Systems
A. Application
A.1. This code applies to belt-conveyor scale systems used for the weighing of bulk materials.
A.2. The code does not apply to:
(a) devices used for discrete weighing while moving on conveyors;
(b) devices that measure quantity on a time basis;
(c) checkweighers; or
(d) controllers or other auxiliary devices except as they may affect the weighing performance of the
belt-conveyor scale.
A.3. See also General Code requirements.
S. Specifications
S.1. Design of Indicating and Recording Elements.
S.1.1. General. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a primary indicating element in the form of a
master weight totalizer and shall also be equipped with a recording element, and a rate of flow indicator and
recorder (which may be analog).* An auxiliary indicator shall not be considered part of the master weight
totalizer.
[*Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Amended 1986)
S.1.2. Units. – A belt-conveyor scale shall indicate and record weight units in terms of pounds, tons, long
tons, metric tons, or kilograms. The value of a scale division (d) expressed in a unit of weight shall be equal to:
(a) 1, 2, or 5, or
(b) a decimal multiple or submultiples of 1, 2, or 5.
S.1.3. Value of the Scale Division.
S.1.3.1. For Scales Installed After January 1, 1986. – The value of the scale division shall not be
greater than 0.125 % ( 1 /800) of the minimum totalized load.
[Nonretroactive as of January 1, 1986]
(Added 1985)(Amended 2009)
S.1.3.2. For Scales Installed Before January 1, 1986. – The value of the scale division shall not be
greater than 1/1200 of the rated capacity of the device. However, provision shall be made so that compliance
with the requirements of the zero-load test as prescribed in N.3.1. Zero Load Tests may be readily and
accurately determined in 20 minutes of operation.
2-57
S.1.4. Recording Elements and Recorded Representations. – The value of the scale division of the recording
element shall be the same as that of the indicating element.
a) The belt-conveyor scale system shall record the unit of measurement (i.e., kilograms, tonnes, pounds,
tons, etc.); the date; and the time.
b) The belt-conveyor scale system shall record the initial indication and the final indication of the master
weight totalizer and the quantity.*
All of the information in (a) and (b) must be recorded for each delivery.*
(Amended 1993)
S.1.4.1. The belt-conveyor scale system shall be capable of recording the results of automatic or semi-
automatic zero load tests.**
[**Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
(Added 2002)
S.1.5. Rate of Flow Indicators and Recorders. - A belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a rate of flow
indicator and an analog or digital recorder. Permanent means shall be provided to produce an audio or visual
signal when the rate of flow is equal to or less than 20 % and when the rate of flow is equal to or greater than
100 % of the rated capacity of the scale. The type of alarm (audio or visual) shall be determined by the
individual installation.
(Amended 1989 and 2004)
S.1.6. Advancement of Primary Indicating or Recording Elements. – The master weight totalizer shall
advance only when the belt conveyor is in operation and under load.
(Amended 1989)
S.1.7. Master Weight Totalizer. – The master weight totalizer shall not be resettable without breaking a
security means.
S.1.8. Power Loss. – In the event of a power failure of up to 24 hours, the accumulated measured quantity on
the master weight totalizer of an electronic digital indicator shall be retained in memory during the power loss.
(Amended 1989)
S.2. Design of Weighing Elements. – A belt-conveyor scale system shall be designed to combine automatically
belt travel with belt load to provide a determination of the weight of the material that has passed over the scale.
S.2.1. Speed Measurement. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be equipped with a belt speed or travel sensor that
will accurately sense the belt speed or travel whether the belt is empty or loaded.
S.2.2. Adjustable Components. – An adjustable component that can affect the performance of the device
(except as prescribed in S.3.1.) shall be held securely in adjustment.
(Amended 1998)
S.2.3. Overload Protection. – The load-receiving elements shall be equipped with means for overload
protection of not less than 150 % of rated capacity. The accuracy of the scale in its normal loading range shall
not be affected by overloading.
2-58
S.3. Zero Setting.
S.3.1. Design of Zero-Setting Mechanism. – Automatic and semiautomatic zero-setting mechanisms shall
be so constructed that the resetting operation is carried out only after a whole number of belt revolutions and the
completion of the setting or the whole operation is indicated. An audio or visual signal shall be given when the
automatic and semiautomatic zero-setting mechanisms reach the limit of adjustment of the zero-setting
mechanism.*
Except for systems that record the zero load reference at the beginning and end of a delivery, the range of the
zero-setting mechanism shall not be greater than ± 2 % of the rated capacity of the scale without breaking the
security means. For systems that record the zero load reference at the beginning and end of a delivery, the
range of zero-setting mechanism shall not be greater than ± 5 % without breaking the security means.**
[**Nonretroactive as of January 1, 2004]
S.3.1.1. Automatic Zero-Setting Mechanism. – The automatic zero-setting mechanism shall indicate or
record any change in the zero reference.
(Added 2009)
S.3.2. Sensitivity at Zero Load (For Type Evaluation). – When a system is operated for a time period equal
to the time required to deliver the minimum test load and with a test load calculated to indicate two scale
divisions applied directly to the weighing element, the totalizer shall advance not less than one or more than
three scale divisions. An alternative test of equivalent sensitivity, as specified by the manufacturer, shall also
be acceptable.
S.4. Marking Requirements. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be marked with the following: (Also see
G-S.1. Identification)
(a) the rated capacity in units of weight per hour (minimum and maximum);
(b) the value of the scale division;
(c) the belt speed in terms of feet (or meters) per minute at which the belt will deliver the rated capacity;
(d) the load in terms of pounds per foot or kilograms per meter (determined by materials tests);
(e) the operational temperature range if other than -10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F).
S.5. Provision for Sealing. – A device shall be designed using the format set forth in Table S.5. with provision(s)
for applying a security seal that must be broken, or for using other approved means of providing security (e.g. data
change audit trail available at the time of inspection), before any change that affects the metrological integrity of
the device can be made to any electronic mechanism.
(Added 1998)
2-59
Table S.5. Categories of Device and Methods of Sealing
Categories of Devices Methods of Sealing

Seal by physical seal or two event counters: one for calibration
Category 1: No remote configuration parameters and one for configuration parameters.
capability.
An event logger is required in the device; it must include an event
Category 3: Remote configuration capability. counter (000 to 999), the parameter ID, the date and time of the
change, and the new value of the parameter. A printed copy of the
information must be available through the device or through
another on-site device. The event logger shall have a capacity to
retain records equal to ten times the number of sealable
parameters in the device, but not more than 1000 records are
required. (Note: Does not require 1000 changes to be stored for
each parameter.)
(Table Added 1998)
N. Notes
N.1. General. - Belt-conveyor scales are capable of weighing bulk material accurately. (See Tolerances)
However, their performance can be detrimentally affected by the conditions of the installation. (See User
Requirements) The performance of the equipment is not to be determined by averaging the results of the individual
tests. The results of all tests shall be within the tolerance limits.
(Amended 2002)
N.1.1. Official Test. – An official test of a belt-conveyor scale system shall include tests specified in
N.3.1. Zero Load Tests, N.3.2. Material Tests, and, if applicable, N.3.3. Simulated Load Tests.
(Amended 2006)
N.1.2. Simulated Test. – Simulated loading conditions as recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by the official with statutory authority may be used to properly monitor the system operational performance
between official tests, but shall not be used for official certification.
(Amended 1991)
N.2. Conditions of Tests. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be tested after it is installed on the conveyor system with
which it is to be used and under such environmental conditions as may normally be expected. Each test shall be
conducted with test loads no less than the minimum test load. Before each test run, the inspector shall check the
zero setting and adjust as necessary.
(Amended 1986, 2004, and 2009)
N.2.1. Initial Verification. – A belt-conveyor scale system shall be verified with a minimum of two test runs
at each of the following flow rates:
(a) normal use flow rate,
(b) 35 % of the maximum rated capacity, and
(c) an intermediate flow rate between these two points.
Test runs may also be conducted at any other rate of flow that may be used at the installation. A minimum of
four test runs may be conducted at only one flow rate if evidence is provided that the system is used at a single
2-60
flow rate and that rate does not vary in either direction by an amount more than 10 % of the normal flow rate
that can be developed at the installation for at least 80 % of the time.
(Added 2004) (Amended 2009)
N.2.2. Subsequent Verification. – Subsequent testing shall include testing at the normal use flow rate and
other flow rates used at the installation. The official with statutory authority may determine that testing only at
the normal use flow rate is necessary for subsequent verifications if evidence is provided that the system is used
to operate:
(a) at no less than 70 % of the maximum rated capacity for at least 80 % of the time (excluding time that
the belt is unloaded), or
(b) with a normal use flow rate that does not vary by more than 10 % of the maximum rated capacity.
Example: If a belt-conveyor scale system has a maximum rated capacity of 200 tons per hour (tph), and the
normal use flow rate is 150 tph (75 % of the maximum rated capacity), no testing at additional flow rates is
required provided the flow rates remain above 140 tph for more than 80 % of the time. If the same device were
operating with a normal use flow rate of 130 tph, it is operating at 65 % of the maximum rated capacity. In this
case, testing at flow rates in addition to the normal use flow rate would be required if the normal use flow rate
varies by more that 20 tph (10 % of the maximum rated capacity).
(Added 2004)
N.2.3. Minimum Test Load. – Except for applications where a normal weighment is less than 10 minutes,
the minimum test load shall not be less than the largest of the following values.
(a) 800 scale divisions,
(b) the load obtained at maximum flow rate in one revolution of the belt, or
(c) at least 10 minutes of operation.
For applications where a normal weighment is less than 10 minutes (e.g., belt-conveyor scale systems used
exclusively to issue net weights for material conveyed by individual vehicles and railway track cars) the
minimum test load shall be the normal weighment that also complies with (a) and (b).
The official with statutory authority may determine that a smaller minimum totalized load down to 2 % of the
load totalized in 1 hour at the maximum flow rate may be used for subsequent tests, provided that:
1. the smaller minimum totalized load is greater than the quantities specified in (a) and (b), and
2. consecutive official testing with the minimum totalized loads described in N.2.3. (a), (b), or (c) and the
smaller minimum test load has been conducted that demonstrates the system complies with applicable
tolerances for repeatability, acceptance, and maintenance.
N.3. Test Procedures.
N.3.1. Zero-Load Tests. – A zero-load test shall be conducted to establish that the belt scale system
(including the conveyor) is capable of holding a stable, in-service zero.
N.3.1.1. Determination of Zero. – A “zero-load test” is a determination of the error in zero, expressed
as an internal reference, a percentage of the full-scale capacity, or a change in a totalized load over a whole
number of complete belt revolutions. For belt-conveyor scales with electronic integrators, the test must be
performed over a period of at least 3 minutes and with a whole number of complete belt revolutions. For
2-61
belt-conveyor scales with mechanical integrators, the test shall be performed with no less than three
complete revolutions or 10 minutes of operation, whichever is greater.
(Added 2002)
N.3.1.2. Test of Zero Stability. – The conveyor system shall be operated to warm up the belt and the
belt scale shall be zero adjusted as required. A series of zero-load tests shall be carried out immediately
before conducting the simulated load or materials test until the three consecutive zero-load tests each
indicate an error which does not exceed ± 0.06 % of the totalized load at full scale capacity for the duration
of the test. No adjustments can be made during the three consecutive zero-load test readings.
(Added 2002) (Amended 2004 and 2009)
N.3.1.3. Check For Consistency of the Conveyor Belt Along Its Entire Length. – After a zero-load
test with flow rate filtering disabled, the totalizer shall not change by an amount greater than plus or minus
3.0 scale divisions (± 3 d) from its initial indication during one complete belt revolution.
N.3.2. Material Tests. – Material tests should be conducted using actual belt loading conditions. These belt
loading conditions shall include, but are not limited to conducting materials tests using different belt loading
points, all types and sizes of products weighed on the scale, at least one other belt speed, and in both directions
of weighing.
On subsequent verifications, at least two individual tests shall be conducted. The results of all these tests shall
be within the tolerance limits.
Either pass a quantity of pre-weighed material over the belt-conveyor scale in a manner as similar as feasible to
actual loading conditions, or weigh all material that has passed over the belt-conveyor scale. Means for
weighing the material test load will depend on the capacity of the belt-conveyor scale and availability of a
suitable scale for the test. To assure that the test load is accurately weighed and determined, the following
precautions shall be observed:
(a) The containers, whether railroad cars, trucks, or boxes, must not leak, and shall not be overloaded to
the point that material will be lost.
(b) The actual empty or tare weight of the containers shall be determined at the time of the test. Stenciled
tare weight of railway cars or trucks shall not be used. Gross and tare weights shall be determined on
the same scale.
(c) When a pre-weighed test load is passed over the scale, the belt-loading hopper shall be examined
before and after the test to assure that the hopper is empty and that only the material of the test load has
passed over the scale.
(d) Where practicable, a reference scale should be tested within 24 hours preceding the determination of
the weight of the test load used for a belt-conveyor scale material test.
A reference scale which is not “as found” within maintenance tolerance should have its accuracy
re-verified after the belt-conveyor test with a suitable known weight load if the “as found” error of the
belt-conveyor scale material test exceeds maintenance tolerance values.*
(e) If any suitable known weight load other than a certified test weight load is used for re-verification of
the reference scale accuracy, its weight shall be determined on the reference scale after the reference
scale certification and before commencing the belt scale material test.*
(f) The test shall not be conducted if the weight of the test load has been affected by environmental
conditions.
2-62
*Note: Even if the reference scale is within maintenance tolerance it may require adjusting to be able to meet
paragraph N.3.2.1. Accuracy of Material.
(Amended 1986, 1989, 1998, 2000, 2002, and 2009)
N.3.2.1. Accuracy of Material. – The quantity of material used to conduct a material test shall be
weighed on a reference scale to an accuracy within 0.1 %. Scales typically used for this purpose include
Class III and III L scales or a scale without a class designation as described in Handbook 44, Section 2.20.,
Table T.1.1. Tolerances for Unmarked Scales.
(Added 1989) (Amended 1991, 1993, 1998 and 2000)
N.3.3. Simulated Load Tests.
(a) As required by the official with statutory authority, simulated load tests as recommended by the
manufacturer are to be conducted between material tests to monitor the system’s operational
performance, but shall not be used for official certification.
(Amended 1991)
(b) A simulated load test consisting of at least three consecutive test runs shall be conducted as soon as
possible, but not more than 12 hours after the completion of the material test, to establish the factor to
relate the results of the simulated load test to the results of the material tests.
(Added 1990)
(c) The results of the simulated load test shall repeat within 0.1 %.
(Added 1990)
T. Tolerances
T.1. Tolerance Values 1 . – Maintenance and acceptance tolerances on materials tests, relative to the weight of the
material, shall be ± 0.25 % of the test load.
(Amended 1993)
T.1.1. Tolerance Values – Test of Zero Stability. – Immediately after material has been weighed over the
belt-conveyor scale during the conduct of any material test run, the zero-load test shall be repeated. The change
in the accumulated or subtracted weight during the zero-load test shall not exceed 0.12 % of the totalized load at
full scale capacity for the duration of that test. If the range of zero adjustments during a complete (official)
verification test exceeds 0.18 % of the totalized load at full scale capacity for the duration of the zero-load test,
the official with statutory authority may establish an interval for zero-load testing during normal operation.
T.2. Tolerance Values, Repeatability Tests. – The variation in the values obtained during the conduct of
materials tests shall not be greater than 0.25 % (1/400).
T.3. Influence Factors. – The following factors are applicable to tests conducted under controlled conditions
only, provided that:
1
The variables and uncertainties included in the relative tolerance represent only part of the variables that affect the
accuracy of the material weighed on belt-conveyor scales. If this tolerance was based on an error analysis beginning
with mass standards through all of the test processes and following the principle expressed in Section 3.2. of the
Fundamental Considerations in Appendix A, the tolerance would be 0.5 %.
(Added 1993)
2-63
(a) types of devices approved prior to January 1, 1986, and manufactured prior to January 1, 1988, need not
meet the requirements of this section; and
(b) new types of devices submitted for approval after January 1, 1986, shall comply with the requirements of
the section; and
(c) all devices manufactured after January 1, 1988, shall comply with the requirements of this section.
T.3.1. Temperature. – Devices shall satisfy the tolerance requirements at temperatures from -10 °C to 40 °C
(14 °F to 104 °F).
T.3.1.1. Effect on Zero-Load Balance. – The zero-load indication shall not change by more than
0.035 % of the rated capacity of the scale (without the belt) for a change in temperature of 10 °C (18 °F) at
a rate not to exceed 5 °C (9 °F) per hour.
(Amended 2004)
T.3.1.2. Temperature Limits. – If a temperature range other than -10 °C to 40 °C (14 °F to 104 °F) is
specified for the device, the range shall be at least 30 °C (54 °F).
(Added 1989)
T.3.2. Power Supply, Voltage, and Frequency. – A belt-conveyor scale system shall satisfy the tolerance
requirements over a range of 100 V to 130 V or 200 V to 250 V as appropriate and over a frequency range of
59.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz.
UR. User Requirements

UR.1. Use Requirements. – A belt-conveyor scale system shall be operated between 20 % and 100 % of its rated
capacity.
(Amended 2004)
UR.1.1. Minimum Totalized Load. – Delivered quantities of less than the minimum test load shall not be
considered a valid weighment.
UR.1.2. Security Means. – When a security means has been broken, it shall be reported to the official with
statutory authority.
(Amended 1991)
UR.2. Installation Requirements.
UR.2.1. Protection from Environmental Factors. – The indicating elements, the lever system or load cells,
and the load-receiving element of a belt-conveyor scale shall be adequately protected from environmental
factors such as wind, moisture, dust, weather, and radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic
interference (EMI) that may adversely affect the operation or performance of the device.
UR.2.2. Conveyor Installation. – The design and installation of the conveyor leading to and from the
belt-conveyor scale is critical with respect to scale performance. The conveyor can be horizontal or inclined,
but if inclined, the angle shall be such that slippage of material along the belt does not occur. Installation shall
be in accordance with the scale manufacturer’s instructions and the following:
(Amended 2002)
2-64
(a) Installation - General. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be so installed that neither its performance nor
operation will be adversely affected by any characteristic of the installation, including but not limited
to, the foundation, supports, covers, or any other equipment.
(Amended 2002)
(b) Live Portions of Scale. – All live portions of the scale shall be protected with appropriate guard
devices and clearances, as recommended by the scale manufacturer, to prevent accidental interference
with the weighing operation. Also, see UR.3.2. Maintenance.
(Amended 2004)
(c) Storage of Simulated Load Equipment. – Suitable protection shall be provided for storage of any
simulated load equipment.
(d) Take-up Device. – If the belt length is such that a take-up device is required, this device shall be of the
counter-weighted type for either vertical or horizontal travel.
(e) Scale Location and Training Idlers. – The scale shall be so installed that the first weigh idler of the
scale is at least 6 m (20 ft) or five idler spaces, whichever is greater, from loading point, skirting, head
or tail pulley, or convex curve in the conveyor. Any training idler shall be located at least 18 m (60 ft)
from the centerline of the weigh span of the scale. Training idlers shall not be restrained at any time in
order to force belt alignment.
(Amended 1998)
(f) Concave Curve. – If there is a concave curve in the conveyor, before or after the scale, the scale shall
be installed so that the belt is in contact with all the idler rollers at all times for at least 6 m (20 ft) or
five idler spaces, whichever is greater, before and after the scale. 2 A concave curve shall start no
closer than 12 m (40 ft) from the scale to the tangent point of the concave curve.
(Amended 1998)
(g) Tripper and Movable Pulleys. – There shall be no tripper or movable head pulleys in the conveyor.
(h) Conveyor Length. – The conveyor shall be no longer than 300 m (1000 ft) nor shorter than 12 m
(40 ft) from head to tail pulley.
(i) Conveyor Orientation. – The conveyor may be horizontal or inclined, but, if inclined, the angle shall
be such that slippage of material along the belt does not occur.
(j) Conveyor Stringers. – Conveyor stringers at the scale and for not less than 6 m (20 ft) before and
beyond the scale shall be continuous or securely joined and of sufficient size and so supported as to
eliminate relative deflection between the scale and adjacent idlers when under load. The conveyor
stringers should be so designed that the deflection between any two adjacent idlers within the weigh
area does not exceed 0.6 mm (0.025 in) under load.
2
Installing the belt scale five idler spaces from the tail pulley or the infeed skirting will be in the area of least belt
tension on the conveyor and should produce the best accuracy. The performance of a belt-conveyor scale may be
adversely affected by a concave curve in the conveyor that is located between the loading point and the scale.
Therefore, whenever possible, a belt-conveyor scale should not be installed with a concave curve in the conveyor
between the loading point and the scale.
2-65
(k) Identification of Scale Area. – The scale area and five idlers on both ends of the scale shall be of a
contrasting color, or other suitable means shall be used to distinguish the scale from the remainder of
the conveyor installation, and the scale shall be readily accessible.
(Amended 1998)
(l) Belt Composition and Maintenance. – Conveyor belting shall be no heavier than is required for
normal use. In a loaded or unloaded condition, the belt shall make constant contact with horizontal
and wing rollers of the idlers in the scale area. Splices shall not cause any undue disturbance in scale
operation (see N.3. Test Procedures).
(Amended 1998, 2000, and 2001)
(m) Uniformity of Belt Loading and Flow. – The conveyor loading mechanism shall be designed to
provide uniform belt loading. The distance from the loading point to the scale shall allow for adequate
settling time of the material on the belt before it is weighed. Feeding mechanisms shall have a positive
closing or stopping action so that material leakage does not occur. Feeders shall provide an even flow
over the scale through the full range of scale operation. Sufficient impact idlers shall be provided in
the conveyor under each loading point to prevent deflection of the belt during the time material is
being loaded.
(n) Belt Alignment. – The belt shall not extend beyond the edge of the outermost roller of any carry side
(top) roller in any area of the conveyor nor touch the conveyor structure on the return (bottom) side of
the conveyor.
UR.2.3. Material Test. – A belt-conveyor scale shall be installed so that a material test can be conveniently
conducted.
UR.2.4. Belt Travel (Speed or Velocity). – The belt travel sensor shall be so positioned that it accurately
represents the travel of the belt over the scale for all flow rates between the maximum and minimum values.
The belt travel sensor shall be so designed and installed that there is no slip.
UR.3. Use Requirements.
UR.3.1. Loading. – The feed of material to the scale shall be controlled to assure that, during normal
operation, the material flow is in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation for rated capacity.
UR.3.2. Maintenance. – Belt-conveyor scales and idlers shall be maintained and serviced in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and the following:
(a) The scale and area surrounding the scale shall be kept clean of debris or other foreign material that can
detrimentally affect the performance of the system.
(b) There shall be provisions to ensure that weighed material does not adhere to the belt and return to the
scale system area.
(Added 2004)
(c) Zero-load tests and simulated load or material tests shall be conducted at periodic intervals between
official tests and after a repair or mechanical adjustment to the conveyor system in order to provide
reasonable assurance that the device is performing correctly. The minimum interval for periodic
zero-load tests and simulated load tests shall be established by the official with statutory authority or
according to manufacturer recommendations.
2-66
The actions to be taken as a result of the zero-load test are shown in the following table.
Change in Zero (∆ 0) Actions to be Taken
If the change in zero is less than ± 0.25 %

Perform zero adjustment and proceed to simulated load test.
(∆ 0 < 0.25 %)
If the change in zero is ± 0.25 % to ± 0.5 % Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance with
(0.25 % ≤ ∆ 0 ≤ 0.5 %) UR.2. Installation Requirements and repeat the zero-load test.
Inspect the conveyor and weighing area for compliance with
If the change in zero is greater than ± 0.5 %
UR.2. Installation Requirements, repeat the zero-load test, and
(∆ 0 > 0.5 %)
reduce the interval between zero-load tests.
The action to be taken as a result of the simulated load or material tests is shown in the following
table.
(Amended 2002)
Change in Factor (Reference) Established in

N.3.3.(b) Action to be Taken
[∆ N.3.3.(b)]
If the error is less than 0.25 %
No Action
(∆ N.3.3.(b) < 0.25 %)
UR.2. Installation Requirements and, after compliance is
verified, repeat the test.
If the error is at least 0.25 % but not more than
0.6 % If the result of that test remains greater than ± 0.25 %, a span
(0.25 % ≤ ∆ N.3.3.(b) ≤ 0.6 %) correction shall be made and the official with statutory
authority notified.
(Amended 1991)
UR.2. Installation Requirements and, after compliance is
verified, repeat the test.
If the error is greater than 0.6 % but does not exceed
0.75 % If the result of that test remains greater than ± 0.25 %, a span
(0.6 % < ∆ N.3.3.(b) ≤ 0.75 %) correction shall be made, the official with statutory authority
shall be notified, and an official test shall be conducted.
(Amended 1991)
If the error is greater than 0.75 % An official test is required.

(∆ N.3.3.(b) > 0.75 %) (Amended 1987)
(d) Scale Alignment. - Alignment checks shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation when conveyor work is performed in the scale area. A material test is required after
any realignment.
(e) Simulated Load Equipment. – Simulated load equipment shall be clean and properly maintained.
2-67
(f) Zero Load Reference Information. – When zero load reference information is recorded for a
delivery, the information must be based upon zero load tests performed as a minimum both
immediately before and immediately after the totalized load.
(Added 2002)
(Amended 2002, 2004, and 2009)
UR.3.3. Retention of Maintenance, Test, and Analog or Digital Recorder Information. – Records of
calibration and maintenance, including conveyor alignment, analog or digital recorder, zero-load test, and
material test data shall be maintained on site for at least the three concurrent years as a history of scale
performance. Copies of any report as a result of a test or repair shall be mailed to the official with statutory
authority as required. The current date and correction factor(s) for simulated load equipment shall be recorded
and maintained in the scale cabinet.
(Added 2002)
UR.3.4. Diversion or Loss of Measured Product. – There shall be no operation(s) or condition(s) of use
that result in loss or diversion that adversely affects the quantity of measured product.
(Added 2005)
UR.4. Compliance. – Prior to initial verification, the scale manufacturer or installer shall certify to the owner that
the scale meets code requirements. Prior to initial verification and each subsequent verification, the scale owner or
his agent shall notify the official with statutory authority in writing that the belt-conveyor scale system is in
compliance with this specification and ready for material testing.
(Amended 1991)
2-68

7
7. PL
LAN
NOS CER
C RRO VERRDE
E
FAJA
F A 10
002, 100
06 Y
LINEA
A DE
E EM
MBAARQU
UE FAJA
F A
1020
1 0

8. PLAN
P NOSS LASS BA
AMB
BAS
F
FAJA 10011 Y ANTA
A APACCAY
F JA 10
FAJ 014

Manual de Instalación, Operación Mantenimiento de Balanza Fajas PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Manual de Instalación, Operación Mantenimiento de Balanza Fajas PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

REC 3962, Rev D

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

CONVEYOR DATA SCALE DATA

This Page Left Blank Intentionally

Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

Thermo Electron Corporation

501 90th Ave. NW

Phone: (800) 227-8891

Fax: (763) 783-2525

Organization This Guide is organized into 5 chapters and 1appendix

Thermo Electron Corporation About this Manual i

Product If the equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection

ii About this Manual Thermo Electron Corporation

Chapter 2 Installation ............................................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 Operation ................................................................................. 3-1

Chapter 4 Maintenance............................................................................. 4-1

Thermo Electron Corporation Table of Contents iii

Chapter 5 Replacement Parts .................................................................. 5-1

Appendix A Drawings ..................................................................................A-1

iv Table of Contents Thermo Electron Corporation

Thermo Electron Corporation Table of Contents v

This Page Left Blank

vi Table of Contents Thermo Electron Corporation

Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction 1-1

General This Instruction Manual contains information on the installation,

1-2 Introduction Thermo Electron Corporation

Figure 1–1. Thermo Electron Model 10-14 Weighbridge

Thermo Electron Corporation Introduction 1-3

This Page Left Blank

1-4 Introduction Thermo Electron Corporation

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-1

2-2 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Figure 2–2. Conveyor Support Illustration

Figure 2–3. Recommended Installation Area

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-3

Figure 2–4. Depth Limiting Gate Illustration

Figure 2–5. Conveyor Speed and Slope Illustration

2-4 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Figure 2–6. Convex Curve Illustration

1. The point of tangency on a concave (upward going) curve must be at

Figure 2–7. Before Curve Illustration

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-5

Figure 2–8. After Curve Illustration

Trippers In any installation, where weighing accuracy is important, the scale

Figure 2–9. Tripper Location Illustration

2-6 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Figure 2–10. Feed Point Illustration

Figure 2–11. Take-Ups Illustration

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-7

Figure 2–12. Belt Tracking Illustration

Figure 2–13. Scale Service Idler Illustration

2-8 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Figure 2–14. Idler Deflection

Figure 2–15. Idler Reinforcement

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-9

Figure 2–16. Troughing Angle Illustration

2-10 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Terms The following terms are referred to in the installation procedure:

1. Install the scale on a rigid conveyor.

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-11

2-12 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation

Thermo Electron Corporation Installation 2-13

2-14 Installation Thermo Electron Corporation